DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

TECHNICAL MANUAL

DEPARTMENT OF THE AIR

FORCE TECHNICAL ORDER

AMMUNITION
GENERAL

DEPARTMENTS OF THE ARMY AND THE AIR FORCE

JUNE 1956
v ****

GENERAL

Section I. INTRODUCTION

1. Scope
a. This manual contains information pertaining to the classification
and identification of ammunition. Personnel concerned with any phase
of ammunition should be thoroughly familiar with the provisions of this
manual and TM 9-1903.
b. Information pertaining to nuclear and biological munitions has not
been included in this manual, since sufficient data are not available at
this time.
c. The appendix contains a list of current references, including supply
and technical manuals, and other publications applicable to ammunition.
d. Information pertaining to care, handling, preservation, and destruc­
tion of ammunition, which appeared in the previous edition of this
manual, is contained in TM 9-1903.
2. Forms
The forms prescribed for use throughout the Army establishment are
listed in the current DA Pam 310-2. Requisitions for these forms will be
submitted in accordance with AR 310-90.
3. Reports
a. Accidents. Responsibilities and procedures for preparation of reports
of accidents and recording and reporting requirements for Army accidents
are contained in SR 385-10-40.
b. Accidents Involving Ammunition. If an accident or malfunction involv­
ing the use of ammunition, including land mines, base charges, dynamite,
blasting caps, detonating cord, shaped charges, and demolition charges
of all types, occurs during training or combat, the range officer for units
in training, if there is one, or the senior officer of the unit in training or
combat, or, if there is no officer in charge of the unit, the senior noncom­
missioned officer or enlisted man of the unit involved, will report imme­
diately the occurrence and all available facts of the accident to the
technical service representative under whose supervision the ammunition
for the unit involved is maintained or issued. It is the duty of the tech­
nical service representative to investigate thoroughly all cases of malfunc­
tioning or accidents observed by him or reported to him and to report
serious cases to the head of the appropriate technical service as outlined
in SR 700-45-6.
2
c. Fires. A fb port will be prepared in all cases of fire or fire explo­
sion that result s of life or damage (to the extent that the estimated
cost of repair < ... >- amounts to $5G more) to Army equip­
ment, materials, structures, plants, systems, timber or grasslands, or other
property, except motor vehicles or aircraft damaged incident to their
cr^radon, at all Department of the Army installations. For further
information, see SR 385-45-20. Reports of fire or explosion followed by
fire involving ammunition or other explosives are in addition to reports
required as specified in SR 385-10-40.
d. Report of Hazardous Conditions Involving Military Explosives or Ammuni­
tion. Commanding officers of Army installations and activities engaged
in the development, testing, manufacture, maintenance, salvage, disposal,
handling, transportation, or storage of explosives or ammunition will
inform the head of the appropriate technical service of concentrations of
explosives or ammunition that are or may become undue hazards and of
previously unrecognized hazards or conditions for which existing regula­
tions and instructions appear to be inadequate, in order to permit review
by the Armed Services Explosives Safety Board. For further information,
see SR 385-15-1.
Section II. GENERAL DISCUSSION

4. Definitions
a. Munitions. Munitions consist of everything necessary for the conduct
of war and training therefor, except personnel. They include weapons,
ammunition, equipment, supplies, food, clothing, forage, and related
items.
b. Military Ammunition. Military ammunition is that type of munition
that consists of explosive or chemical agents, with their characteristic
mechanical devices, designed for use against military objectives.
c. Weapons. A weapon is any instrument of combat. For descriptions
of weapons, see pertinent technical manuals pertaining to each weapon.
d. Round. A round of ammunition consists of all the necessary expend­
able components to fire the system once.

5. Classification
Ammunition is classified according to the characteristics in a through j
below.
a. Type.
(1) Small arms ammunition. Small arms ammunition consists of car­
tridges used in rifles, carbines, revolvers, pistols, submachine­
guns, and machineguns and shell used in shotguns.
(2) Grenades. Grenades are explosive- or chemical-filled projectiles
of a size and shape convenient for throwing by hand or project­
ing from a rifle.
(3) Artillery ammunition. Artillery ammunition consists of cartridges;
3
shot; shell that are filled with high-explosive, chemical, or other
active agent; and projectiles that are used in guns, howitzers,
mortars, and recoiless Alles.
(4) Bombs. Bombs are containers filled with an explosive, chemical,
or other active agent, designed for release from aircraft.
(5) Pyrotechnics. Pyrotechnics consist of containers filled with low-
explosive composition, designed for release from aircraft or for
projection from the ground for illumination or signals.
(6) Rockets. Rockets are propellant-type motors fitted with rocket
heads containing high-explosive or chemical agents.
(7) JATOS. JATOS consist of propellant-type motors used to fur­
nish auxiliary thrust in the launching of aircraft, rockets, guided
missiles, target drones, and mine clearing detonating cables.
(8) Land mines. Land mines are containers, metal or plastic, that
contain high-explosive or chemical agents designed for laying in
or on the ground for initiation by, and effect against, enemy
vehicles or personnel.
(9) Guided missiles. Guided missiles consist of propellant-type motors
fitted with warheads containing high-explosive or other active
agent and equipped with electronic guidance devices.
(10) Demolition materials. Demolition materials consist of explosives
and explosive devices designed for use in demolition and in
connection with blasting for military construction.
(11) Cartridge-actuated devices. Cartridge-actuated devices are devices
designed to facilitate an emergency escape from high-speed air­
craft.
b. Standardization. Ammunition is classified as—
(1) Standard.
(2) Substitute standard.
(3) Limited standard.
c. Use. Ammunition is classified according to use as—
(1) Service.
(2) Practice.
(3) Drill (dummy).
d. Form. Ammunition is classified as fixed, semifixed, separated, or
separate loading.
e. Kind of Filler. Ammunition is classified as explosive, chemical,
leaflet, or inert.
f. Storage. Ammunition is classified for storage purposes into quantity­
distance classes, 1 to 12 inclusive (IM 9-1903).
g. Storage Compatibility. Ammunition is grouped for compatibility in
storage into 17 groups lettered A to Q, inclusive (TM 9-1903).
h. Interstate Commerce Commission Shipping Regulations. Ammunition is
classified by Freight Tariff No. 9, publishing ICC shipping regulations,
into class A explosives (which are subdivided into type 1 to type 8, inclu­
sive), class B explosives, and class C explosives. The regulations pertain­
4
ing to transportation of these classes of explosives are published by the
Bureau of Explosives, 30 Vesey Street, New York 7, N. Y.
i. Burning or Explosive Characteristics. Ammunition is classified in groups
according to general burning or explosive characteristics. The four
groups are identified by “symbols,” which are the Arabic numerals 1, 2,
3, and 4. Each group consists of one or more specific quantity-distance
classes (see TM 9-1903).
j. Security. Ammunition is classified as to security regulations as un­
classified, confidential, secret, or top secret.
6. Identification
a. General. Ammunition is identified by painting and marking (par.
10) on items, containers, and packing boxes. This identification does not
include grade except in the case of small arms cartridges. For purposes
of record, the standard nomenclature of the item, together with its lot num­
ber, completely identifies the ammunition. Once removed from its
packing, ammunition may be identified by the painting and marking on
the items. Other essential information may also be obtained from the
marking on ammunition items, packing containers, and ammunition data
cards. The muzzle velocity of projectiles may be obtained from the fir­
ing tables and ammunition data cards; in the case of some rounds of
artillery ammunition of smaller caliber, the muzzle velocity may appear
on the packing box.
(1) Included in both the marking and the standard nomenclature
are—
(a) Name of type or abbreviation thereof.
(b) Caliber, weight, or size.
(c) Model designation.
(2) Where required, additional information is included such as the
model and type of fuze, the model of the weapon in which the
item is fired, and the weight of projectile for which a separate­
loading propelling charge is suited.
(3) The lot number is marked on the ammunition or shipping con­
tainer but is not a part of the nomenclature. However, when
referring to specific ammunition in shipping documents and
field reports, it is necessary to mention both the lot number and
the standard nomenclature.
b. Type Designation. This is an identifying symbol used with nomen­
clature to distinguish different models and types of items or equipment
within categories and to indicate modifications and changes thereto.
Only one type identification will be assigned to items of military supply that
are physically and functionally interchangeable. For further informa­
tion, see SR 715-50-5.
c. Mark or Model. To identify a particular design, a model designation
is assigned at the time the model is classified as an adopted type. This
model designation becomes an essential part of the nomenclature and is
5
included in the marking of the item. The present system of model des­
ignation consists of the letter M followed by an Arabic numeral, for
example, Ml. Modifications «re indicat’d by adding the letter A and
the appropriate Arabic numeral. Thus, Ml Al indicates the first modi­
fication of an item for which the original model designation was Ml.
Wherever a B suffix appears in a model designation it indicates an item
of alternative (or substitute) design, material, or manufacture. Certain
items standardized for use by both Army and Navy are designated by AN
preceding the model designation, for example, AN-^M1O3A1. From
World War I to 1 July 1925, it was the practice to assign mark numbers,
that is, the word “Mark,” abbreviated Mk, followed by a Roman numeral.
The first modification was indicated by the addition of MI to the mark
number, the second, Mil, etc. After 2 April 1945, the mark numbers
were indicated by Arabic numerals rather than Roman numerals. Prior
to World War I, the letter M followed by the year in which the design
was adopted was used as the model designation, for example, Ml914.
When a particular design has been accepted only for limited procure­
ment and service test, the model designation is indicated by the letter T
and an Arabic numeral and modifications by the addition of E and an
Arabic numeral. In such cases, if the design subsequently should be
standardized, an M designation is assigned; hence there may be encoun­
tered some lots still carrying the original T designation (not yet re-marked
to show the later standardized M designation). There is no direct rela­
tionship between the numerical designation of a T item and that of the
item when standardized and assigned an M designation. Items of Navy
design are designated Mk, and Navy modifications are designated Mod
and appropriate Arabic numeral. On items manufactured in Japan,
under the offshore procurement program, the prefix J- is added to the
model number (see TB ORD 521). Items manufactured in Europe
under this program are marked with an E- preceding the model number
(see TB ORD 600).
d. Ammunition Lot Number. At the time of manufacture, every item of
ammunition is assigned a lot number. Where the size of the item per­
mits, it is marked on the item itself to insure permanency of this means
of identification. In addition to this lot number, there is assigned to
each complete round of fixed and semifixed ammunition an ammunition
lot number, which serves to identify the conditions under which the
round was assembled and the components used in the assembly. This
ammunition lot number is marked on every complete round of fixed and
semifixed ammunition (except where the item is too small) and on all pack­
ing containers. It is required for all purposes of record, including reports
on condition, functioning, and accidents in which the ammunition is in­
volved. As far as practicable, in the assembly of components during
manufacture of items to make up a particular ammunition lot all like com­
ponents are selected from the same component lot. To obtain the great­
est accuracy in any firing, successive rounds should be from the same
6
ammunition lot. On items manufactured in Japan, the prefix J- is added
to the manufacturer’s symbol in the last number and those manufactured
in Europe have the prefix E-.
e. Calibration of Lots. Calibration data for certain lots of ammunition
are provided in order to effect improvement in the relative accuracy of
predicted artillery fire. The data account for variations among ammu­
nition lots due to differences in muzzle velocity level (interior ballistics''
and differences in ballistic coefficient (exterior ballistics). The applica­
tion of corrections determined from the data is intended to reduce vari­
ations in performance due to the employment of individual ammunition­
weapon combinations and is expected to be of value in unobserved fire
under circumstances when the K correction and the velocity error (VE)
type of correction may not be applicable because of transfer limitations,
changes in ammunition lots, or weapon tube wear. For tables of data
and further information, see TB ORD 420.
f. Ammunition Data Card. An ammunition data card, 5 by 8, which is
prepared for each lot of accepted ammunition in accordance with perti­
nent specifications, will be furnished with the shipping ticket with each
shipment of ammunition except small arms ammunition. This card
contains printed data concerning the item and its components. Informa­
tion on the data card includes lot number; date packed; identity of com­
ponents; expected pressures; expected muzzle velocity; assembling and
firing instructions when required; and AIC symbols.
g. Ammunition Identification Code Symbols. The ammunition identifica­
tion code (AIC) symbol is used to facilitate the supply of ammunition in
the field. Code symbols assigned to each item of ammunition in a spe­
cific packing are to be used in messages, requisitions, and records. These
code symbols are published basically in Department of the Army Supply
Manual ORD 3 standard nomenclature lists (SNL) of groups P, R, S,
and T. A full explanation of the composition and use of the AIC symbol
will be found in TB 9-AMM 5.

7. Nomenclature
Standard nomenclature is established so that every item of ammunition
supplied by the Ordnance Corps may be specifically identified by name.
It consists of the type, size, and model of each item. Its use for all pur­
poses of record is mandatory, except where the use of the AIC symbol (par.
dg) is authorized. Ammunition nomenclature is published in Depart­
ment of the Army Supply Manual ORD 3 standard nomenclature lists
(SNL) of groups P, R, S, and T. The use of exact nomenclature in the
requisitioning, shipment, storage, issue, recording, and use of ammunition
items will keep errors to a minimum. Ammunition is grouped in the
manuals as indicated in a through d below.
a. Group P contains lists of ammunition for heavy field artillery (155-
mm gun and above) and antiaircraft weapons.
b. Group R contains lists of ammunition for light and medium field,
7
tank, antitank, and aircraft artillery weapons (20-mm gun through 155-
mm howitzer), mines, and demolition material.
c. Group S contains lists of bombs, grenades, pyrotechnics, rockets,
JATOS, catapults, and explosive components of guided missiles.
d. Group T contains lists of ammunition for small arms.
8. Grading
a. Ammunition is manufactured to rigorous specifications and is thor­
oughly inspected before acceptance. Ammunition in storage is periodi­
cally inspected and tested in accordance with specific instructions of the
Chief of Ordnance.
b. Each lot of small arms ammunition is graded primarily on the qual­
ities that make that lot especially suitable for use in a particular class of
weapons such as aircraft and antiaircraft machineguns, rifles, and
ground machineguns. For current grades of small arms ammunition,
see TB 9-AMM 4.
c. Ammunition, other than small arms ammunition, is earmarked as a
result of surveillance tests into grades, depending on its serviceability and
priority of issue (see SR 755-140-1).
9. Priority of Issue
a. Subject to special instructions from the Chief of Ordnance, ammu­
nition of appropriate type and model will be used in the following order:
limited standard, substitute standard, standard. Within this rule, ammu­
nition that has had the longest or least favorable storage will be used first.
Among lots of equal age, priority of issue will be given to the smallest lot.
b. To prevent the building up of excess stocks in the field, transfers from
one station to another should be arranged within the Army command if
no stock of appropriate grade for immediate use is on hand.
c. Certain items because of their scarcity, cost, or highly technical or
hazardous nature are known as “regulated items.” This includes all
ammunition items. Close supervision is exercised over these items in
order to insure distribution to appropriate units and commands in accord­
ance with Department of the Army priorities (see SB 725-350 and SB 725-
950).
d. Priority of issue for lots of small arms ammunition is established by
the Chief of Ordnance und published in TB 9-AMM 4 or in special in­
structions.
e. Further details will be found in Department of the Army Supply
Bulletins of the 9-AMM-series, AR 370-5, and SR 755-140-1.
10. Painting and Marking
a. Painting. Ammunition is painted primarily to prevent rust. Sec­
ondary purposes are to provide, by the color, a ready means of identifica­
tion as to type and to camouflage the ammunition by the use of lusterless
paint. See figures 1 to 19, inclusive, for the use of color for identifica-
8
Table I. Color and Markings for Various Types of Ammunition, Except Bombs,
Pyrotechnics, and Small Arms Cartridges

Type of ammunition Color and markings

Armor-piercing (projectile Olive drab w/marking in yellow.

w/HE).
Armor-piercing (projectile Black w/marking in white.
w/o explosive).
H igh-explosive___ Olive drab w/marking in yellow.
Illuminating__________ Gray w/one white band and marking in white.
Chemical:
Persistent casualty gas.. Gray w/two green bands and marking in green.
Nonpersistent casualty Gray w/one green band and marking in green.
gas.
Training and riot con­ Gray w/one red band and marking in red.
trol gases.
Smoke_______________ Gray w/one yellow band and marking in yellow.
(Rifle smoke grenades—one band of the color
of smoke produced.)
Incendiary . __ Gray w/one purple band and marking in purple.
Practice_________ Blue w/marking in white.
Dummy (inert)_______ ... Black w/marking in white (bronze or brass assem­
blies are unpainted).

tion purposes on representative examples of ammunition items.

(1) For artillery ammunition, grenades, rockets, JATOS, land
mines, guided missiles, demolition material, and miscellaneous
explosive devices, color and markings are shown in table I.
(2) For bombs, other than chemical, photoflash, target identifica­
tion, and practice, the painting is olive drab, with 1-inch color
bands painted at the nose and tail ends of the body. When
bombs are loaded with composition B, COMP B is stenciled
twice, 180 degrees apart, on each inner band. When bombs
are loaded with tritonal, TRITONAL is stenciled twice, 180
degrees apart, on each inner band. When TNT or COMP B
loaded bombs are equipped with inert end pads, they will be
stenciled WITH PADS to distinguish from bombs without
pads. The purpose of the inert pad is to render the bomb less
sensitive to possible blows on the end during handling and ship­
ping. Small fragmentation bombs have no color bands but the
nose and tail are painted yellow. For color and marking of
various types of bombs, see table II.
(3) Small arms cartridges do not require painting. However, the
bullet tips of cartridges are painted a distinctive color to aid in
ready identification as to type (fig. 1).
(4) Pyrotechnics are not marked in accordance with the general
color scheme but, where color markings are used, they indicate
the color of the pyrothenic effect produced. In general, how-
9
Table II. Color and Marking for Various Types of Tombs

Pai ted identification, bands

Color Color
Type of bomb of of Number of bands and location
body marking Color
Nose Center Tail

HIGH-EXPLO-
SIVE:
TNT or amatol Olive Black Yellow One___ One.
loaded. drab.
COMP B-loaded. Olive Black Yellow Two__ Two.
drab.
Tritonal-loaded. Olive Black Yellow One %-inch One J^-inch
drab. between between
two 1- two 1-
inch. inch.
CHEMICAL:
Smoke____ Gray Yellow Yellow One— _ One One.
Incendiary.. Gray Purple Purple One______ One One.
Persistent gas.... Gray Green Green Two___ Two Two.
N onpersistent Gray Green Green One______ One One.
gas.
TARGET IDEN- Gray Black
TIFICATION
AND PHOTO-
FLASH.
LEAFLET.... Olive Black
drab.
PRACTICE_____ .. Blue White
DRILL_________ _ Olive Black Black One______ One.
drab.

ever, pyrotechnics are painted gray with marking in black. If

the body of the item is aluminum or magnesium, it may not be
painted. If the item is intended for incendiary purposes, mark­
ings are in purple.
b. Marking.
(1) The marking stenciled or stamped on ammunition includes all
information necessary for complete identification. For further
information concerning marking on ammunition, see chapter 3
under the specific type of ammunition.
(2) Service components or rounds that have been inerted for drill
purposes will be marked as in (a) through (<?) below.
(а) Components such as shell, fuzes, boosters, artillery primers,
cartridge cases, bombs, and flares in which all explosives, in­
cendiary, or toxic materials have been simulated by substi­
tution of inert material will be identified by impressed
INERT markings.
(б) Components such as shell, fuzes, boosters, artillery primers,
10
cartridge cases, bombs, and flares in which all explosives,
incendiary or toxics, and substitutes have been omitted will
be identified by impressed EMPTY markings.
(e) In addition to being marked INERT or EMPTY, components,
if size permits, such as empty projectiles, bombs, inert loaded
and empty cartridge cases, will have four holes not smaller
than one-quarter of an inch drilled through them 90° apart.
Exceptions are inert projectiles, such as those used in target
practice, practice bombs, and other inert items, the designed
usage of which would be impaired by the presence of drilled
holes. Such items will be considered suitably identified
when they are INERT marked.
(d) Inert cloth covered components, such as bagged propelling
charges, will be marked with durable, waterproof, sunfast ink.
(«?) Inert mortar propellant increments will have the word INERT
cut through each increment.
11. Packing and Marking
Ammunition is packed and packing containers are marked in accord­
ance with pertinent drawings and specifications. Containers are de­
signed to withstand conditions normally encountered in handling, stor­
age, and transportation and to comply with Interstate Commerce
Commission regulations. Marking of containers includes all information
required for complete identification of their contents and for compliance
with Interstate Commerce Commission regulations (see also TM 9-1903).
12. Precautions in Use
a. Explosive ammunition must be handled with appropriate care at all
times. Explosive elements, such as in primers and fuzes, are sensitive to
undue shock and high temperature.
b. In order to keep ammunition in a serviceable condition and ready
for immediate issue and use, due consideration should be given to the
general rules in c through g below.
c. Store ammunition in the original containers in a dry, well-ventilated
place protected from the direct rays of the sun and other sources of ex­
cessive heat. Keep sensitive initiators such as blasting caps, igniters,
primers, and fuzes separate from other explosives.
d. Keep ammunition and its containers clean and dry and protected
from possible damage.
e. Disassembly of components of ammunition, such as fuzes and
primers, without specific authorization, is strictly prohibited. Any alter­
ation of loaded ammunition, except by direction of the technical source
concerned and under the supervision of a commissioned officer of that
service, is hazardous and must not be undertaken.
f. Do not open sealed containers or remove protective or safety devices
until just before use, except as required for inspection.
11
g. Return ammunition prepared for firing but not fired to its original
packing and mark it appropriately. Use such ammunition first in sub­
sequent firings in order to keep stocks of opened packings at a minimum.
h. The use of live ammunition for training purposes as a substitute for
authorized drill ammunition is prohibited. Such substitution must be
considered as hazardous and will not be permitted under any circum­
stances.
13. Firing Data
Firing data for the certain types of ammunition described in this
manual are given in firing tables (FT), graphical firing tables (GFT),
graphical tables (GT), bombing tables (BT), fluorescent bombing tables
(FBT), rocket firing tables (RFT), trajectory charts (TJC), aiming data
charts (ADC), and guided missile charts (GMC). For applicable in­
dexes to these publications, see the appendix.

12
A il
TR Ml6 TR M27 BALL Ml911 TEST,
HIGH PRESSURE, Ml
DUMMY M1921
TR M26

CALIBER .45 BULLETS

TR Ml TR MIO TR M17
AND M21
RAPD 167576

Figure 1. Color identification of bullets of small arm cartridges.

FRAGMENTATION FRAGMENTATION TRAINING PRACTICE
(W/TNT)

GAS SMOKE INCENDIARY OFFENSIVE

RAPD 103501A

Figure 2. Color identification and typical marking of hand grenades.

PRACTICE

WP SMOKE

COLORED SMOKE RAPD 103502B

Figure 3. Color identification and typical marking of rifle grenades.

1
|

RA PD, 167577A

Figure 4. Color identification and typical marking of cartridges for aircraft cannon.
I 1 U

1 .1 * •
1 4 • 1 II
4 • •> I
1 4 • 4l k
•I • 1 l
1 4 • 4< k
• • • * 1
1 4 ♦ »l 1'
1
4
4
• _* 4 I
* l>
1 •> 1,
4 t • 4) k
1 • »>
1 4 • 4' i>
1 • 4' i
1 4 • 4> i>
4 • _ •> •
< 4 »• li
1 •• . 4 '
< 4 •< 4- l
4 • _ •> 1.
* 4 • 4> ii
• • •> »' i
< 4 4 k
• • _ •• 4 i
•i 4 •> 4) k
<
4
4
C _ •>
•
l<
4» li
4
4 4 4> k

•
4
4
•
•
» ♦ »i 1'i
1 4
4 • _ • 4| ink
•
i 4 4H
* 4 4i k

RAPD 16757#

Figure 5. Color identification and typical marking of rifle cartridges.

408374 0 -56 -2
TRAINING

HIGH EXPLOSIVE (LIGHT)

PRACTICE

HIGH EXPLOSIVE (HEAVY)

SMOKE

HIGH EXPLOSIVE RA PD 167579

Figure 6. Color identification and typical marking of mortar shell.

(2 DIAMETRAL STRIPES AT RIGHT ANGLES
A-J AND "REDUCED" INDICATE
(REDUCED CHARGE
R_j2 BANDS AND "REDUCED" INDICATE
(reduced CHARGE
c_ 1 DIAMETRAL STRIPE AND "NORMAL"
A /INDICATE NORMAL CHARGE'
D_ 1 BAND AND "NORMAL" INDICATE
(normal CHARGE
E-"SUPER" INDICATES SUPERCHARGE
- (AMMUNITION LOT NUMBER AND LOADER'S
(initials
G_ (MANUFACTURER'S INITIALS AND YEAR
(of MANUFACTURE
H-CALIBER AND MODEL OF CARTRIDGE CASE
I-MODEL OF SHELL
J-WEIGHT-ZONE MARKING
K-KIND OF FILLER
L-CALIBER AND TYPE OF CANNON

Figure 7 Color identification and typical marking of reduced, normal, and supercharge artillery ammunition.
Figure 8. Color identification and typical marking of artillery projectiles.
C H G .M 2
DUMMY

Figure 9. Color identification and typical marking ofi artillery propelling charges.
WtHSBlW >
VMM 13 1

INCENDIARY
GP-TNT

LEAFLET

orricex
LANSLEY flELO VA.

GP-TRITONAL
GP-COMP B

CHEMICAL-CG RAPD 108226B

Figure 10. Color identification and typical ntty of bombs.

PHOTOFLASH

PRACTICE

PWP SMOKE

INCENDIARY, 4-LB INCENDIARY, 6-LB

RA PD 108227A

Figure 11. Color identification and typical marking of bombs.

1

--------- &- -------------------------- :----

[Link].
mmcMiTe, MZ6A i

J IL"

•3.85 IN MAX

—I

RAPD 167580
Figure 12. Color identification and typical markrng ofpyrotechnics.
r

SIGNAL, GROUND, WHITE STAR

PARACHUTE.M17AI

igure 13. Color identification and typical marking oj pyrotechnics.

RA PD 167582

Figure 14. Color identification and typical marking of rockets.

HIGH EXPLOSIVE PRACTICE

BOUNDING-TYPE ANTIPERSONNEL MINES

ARMED

BLAST-TYPE ANTIPERSONNEL MINES rapd 103504C

Figure 15. Color identification and typical marking of land mines.

LIGHT ANTITANK
PRACTICE MINE

LIGHT ANTITANK HE MINE

HEAVY ANTITANK HE MINE

HEAVY ANTITANK PRACTICE MINE RA PD 103578A

Figure 16. Color identification and typical marking of land mines.
BLOCK, TNT, BLOCK, TNT, I-LB
1/2-LB
29-

BLASTING CHARGE, CRATERING

MACHINE

CHARGE,
SHAPED,
CHARGE, SHAPED, CARTRIDGE, 15-LB
40-LB DYNAMITE

DEMOLITION EXPLOSIVES AND BLASTING MACHINE

LIGHTER, FUSE CAP,

(FRICTION TYPE) BLASTING
(NONELECTRIC)

LIGHTER, FUSE CAP,

(WEATHERPROOF BLASTING
TYPE) (ELECTRIC)

EXPLOSIVE INITIATING DEVICES

SNAKE, DEMOLITION, M3 RAPD 116922B

MINE-FIELD-CLEARING DEVICES

Figure 17. Color identification and typical marking of demolition material.

GAS CANISTER)

Figure 18. Color identification and typical marking offiber and metal containers.
FOR PRACTICE
AMMUNITION

FOR CASUALTY
PERSISTENT GAS
AMMUNITION

FOR HIGH
EXPLOSIVE
AMMUNITION

FOR SMOKE
AMMUNITION

KCSV ICT
*.05 HOW M4AI&M4
METAL SHtUSFTXHfM’W* I58FC

CONTAINER iwwas Y-
WT ?V CU 8
r,\c P«<ME€T>LES**

».
'v m > ■ -t _______________________________

RAPD 97765B
Figure 19. Color identification and typical marking ofpacking boxes and metal container.
CHAPTER 2

EXPLOSIVE AND CHEMICAL AGENTS

Section I. PROPELLANTS

14. General
Propellants are liquid or solid compositions used to propel a projectile,
rocket, JATO, etc. Most explosives currently used as solid propellants
have a nitrocellulose base. Various organic and inorganic substances
are added to the nitrocellulose base during manufacture to give improved
qualities for special purposes. These propellants are distinguished by M
or T numbers and by such terms as single-base, double-base, and com­
posite, as well as by commercial trade names or symbols. Black powder,
which was formerly classed as a propellant, is no longer used as such but
is now used as a delay element, as an igniting charge for propellants, in
flash reducers, or for other special purposes.
15. Classification
Solid propellants are classified in accordance with their compositions
as indicated in a through c below.
a. Single-Base Propellant includes compositions that are principally gela­
tinized nitrocellulose and contain no high-explosive ingredient such as
nitroglycerin.
b. Double-Base Propellant includes compositions that are predominately
nitrocellulose and nitroglycerin.
c. Composite Propellant includes compositions that do not contain signifi­
cant amounts of nitrocellulose or nitroglycerin and are mechanical mix­
tures of a fuel with an inorganic oxidant. A part or all of the fuel may
also serve as a binding agent.
16. Physical Characteristics
a. Form. Solid propellants are manufactured in the form of flakes,
balls, sheets, cords, or perforated cylindrical grains (fig. 20). They are
made in different shapes to obtain certain types of burning. The cylin­
drical grains are made in various diameters and lengths. Figure 21
shows the relative size of the grains used in some artillery propellants.
For small size grains, either no perforation or a single perforation is re­
quired. However, for larger grains, seven equally spaced perforations
are present in order to have an increasing burning surface area. The
critical dimension is the “web size,” that is, the average thickness of the
grain between burning surfaces. “Web size” or “web thickness” influ­
ences the initial rate of burning of the propellent grain.

408374 O -56 -3
33
34
igure 20. Shapes and forms o f propellent gi
35
WEB SLIVERS

A—UNBURNED GRAIN B—BURNING GRAIN

RAPD 4319a

Figure 22. Progressive burning of propellent grains (multiperforated).

b. Burning Action.
(1) General. Unconfined nitrocellulose propellant burns relatively
slowly and smoothly but, when confined, its rate of burning in­
creases with temperature and pressure. In order not to exceed
the permissible chamber pressure of the weapon in which it is to
be used, the rate of burning of the propellant has to be controlled.
At any given pressure, the rate of burning is proportional to the
propellent surface free to burn (fig. 23). Therefore, propellants
are made into accurate sizes and definite shapes.
(2) Degressive burning. As the surface areas of the cord and strip
forms of propellant change with burning, the surface of the
grain decreases. The burning action of these grains is, there­
fore, classified as “degressive.”
(3) Neutral burning. As a single-perforated grain burns, the outer
surface decreases and the inner surface increases. The result
of the two actions is that the total surface remains approxi­
mately the same in area. The burning of this type of grain is
known as “neutral.”
(4) Progressive burning. When the multiperforated grain burns, the
total surface area increases, since the perforated grain burns
from the inside and outside at the same time. This type of
burning is called “progressive” (fig. 22).
(5) Slivers. When a multiperforated grain is not completely con­
sumed, portions of the grain remain in the form of slivers (B,
fig. 22) and may be ejected as such from the weapon.
c. Use. Nitrocellulose propellants are used for small arms and larger -
caliber ammunition. The perforated form of grain is the one most com­
monly used in the United States military propellants. Single perforated
grains are used for small arms, grenade cartridges, minor-caliber weap-
36
SINGLE­ TRI­ MULTI­
CORD PERFORATED PERFORATED PERFORATED ROSETTE
IN IT IA L U N IT W EIG H T
BURNING SURFACE AREA
PER

Figure 23. Comparative burning rates of different shaped propellent grains.

w
N
ons, certain howitzers, and some rockets. Propellants with seven
perforations are used for larger-caliber weapons.
17. Single-Base Propellants
a. General. Single-base propellants contain nitrocellulose as their chief
ingredient. One of the first standardized nitrocellulose propellants was
termed pyrocellulose. Single-base compositions are now used in artil­
lery, small arms, and grenades.
b. Smokeless and Flashless Characteristics. Since pyrocellulose propellant
was unduly hygroscopic and gave bright flashes when fired, it was re­
placed before World War II by propellants designated, “flashless non-
hygroscopic” (FNH) and “nonhygroscopic” (NH), single-base propel­
lants. These propellants are not truly nonhygroscopic, but they are
much less hygroscopic than pyrocellulose. This method of designation
has since been replaced, and propellant compositions are now identified
by standard M or T numbers. To indicate the performance of a round
of ammunition in certain calibers of artillery ammunition, the word
FLASHLESS (Flhls), SMOKELESS (Smkls), or FLASHLESS-SMOKE-
LESS (Flhls-Smkls), or the applicable abbreviation, is stenciled on the
round and on its packing box. These terms are relative; FLASHLESS
(Flhls) indicating ammunition that does not flash more than 5 percent
of the time under average conditions; SMOKELESS (Smkls) indicating
ammunition that produces less than half the amount of smoke produced
by ammunition not so designated. FLASHLESS-SMOKELESS (Flhls-
Smkls) designates a propellant with both of these characteristics.
Whether ammunition upon being fired is flashless, smokeless, or both,
depends on the weapon in which it is used, the type of ignition used,
weapon wear, the temperature of the weapon, ambient temperature con­
ditions, and the quantity and composition of the propellant. Some
double-base propellants also have flashless and smokeless characteristics.
c. EC Blank Powder. EC blank powder, one of the earliest partially
colloided nitrocellulose single-base compositions developed, is used in
caliber .30 blank ammunition. It is usually orange or salmon pink in
color. Though it is soft and light, it resembles coarse sand. It is more
sensitive to friction, shock, and heat than completely colloided nitrocel­
lulose propellants. When exposed, it absorbs moisture readily and
therefore must be protected from the atmosphere. It burns rapidly in
the open and explodes if confined. It is usually exploded by flame from
a primer or fuze.
18. Double-Base Propellants
Double-base propellants are those having nitrocellulose and nitro­
glycerin as their major ingredients, accompanied by one or more minor
ingredients such as centralite, vaseline phthalate esters, inorganic salts,
etc. These propellants may contain from 15 to 43 percent nitroglycerin.
The minor ingredients are used for various purposes, such as to insure
38
stability, reduce flash or flame temperature (or both), and improve ignit­
ability. The usual practice in this country is to use nitrocellulose of
about 13.15 to 13.25 percent nitrogen. Nitroguanidine is used in some
double-base propellants, not only to add to the ballistic potential, but to
act as a flash reducing agent as well. Double-base propellants are gray
green to black in color, and the grains are similar in size and shape to
the single-base propellants. Another propellant is in the form of spher­
ical grains from 0.02 to 0.03 inch in diameter and is commonly known as
“ball propellant.” Generally speaking, double-base propellants are
easily ignited, have high burning rates, high flame temperature, and high
force, but they erode weapons badly and are more dangerous and costly
to manufacture than nitrocellulose propellants. For these reasons and
because glycerin is not an abundant material, double-base propellants
have tended, in this country, to be used only where some of the proper­
ties mentioned above are especially desirable. They have found their
principal uses in propellants for shotguns, pistols, mortars, and rockets;
and have been generally avoided in rifled weapons (except pistols).
19. Composite Propellants
Composite propellants are principally solid gas producing materials,
which contain neither nitrocellulose nor nitroglycerin. They are usually

M-13 JB-2

JP & JPN
o JP & JPN

BRITISH SERRATED
BRITISH
COGWHEEL
© GERMAN
ROSETTE
CRUCIFORM
RAPD 167431

ure Forms of rocket propellants ( United States and foreign).

39
a physical mixture of an organic fuel, an oxidizer, and an organic bind­
ing agent. Unlike the single- and double-base propellants that are
manufactured principally by extrusion techniques, composite propellants
are molded or cast to form into a single element or grain. They may be
coated on the surface with cellulose acetate or other inhibitor material
to control the grain burning action. Composite propellant designated as
T9 (principally ammonium picrate and potassium nitrate) is representa­
tive of such propellants. In form and shape, composite propellants may
be as shown in figures 20 and 24, respectively, which illustrate some of
the various forms of propellent grains employed in J ATOS and various
forms of propellants employed in foreign and United States rockets.
a. Like single-base and double-base propellant compositions (which
are essentially a fuel and oxidizer), composite propellant compositions
are balanced for control of their burning actions.
b. Composite-type propellants are employed in ground- and aircraft­
type rockets and JATOS.
c. A solid propellant (double-base or composite), as employed in
rockets or JATOS, is contained within the reaction motor of the weapon.
On ignition by a flame from a fuze or primer, there results an uninter­
rupted combustion reaction and generation of a large volume of hot gases
within the reaction chamber, which escape through the nozzle opening.
20. Other Solid Propellants
a. Guncotton. A nitrocellulose (nitrated cotton, nitrated wood pulp) of
high nitration (13.35 to 13.4 percent nitrogen) is employed extensively
in the manufacture of single-base as well as double-base propellants. It
is also used in electric primers and in electrically initiated destructors.
In most propellants, the guncotton is blended with pyrocellulose (12.6
percent N) to give an average of 13.15 percent nitrogen.
b. Small Arms. Propellants for small arms are usually coated with
dinitrotoluene, which acts as a moisture-proofing agent, causes the first
phase of the burning process to take place at a relatively slow rate, and
has some antiflashing action. In addition, the propellants are usually
glazed with graphite to facilitate the uniform action of automatic loading
machines and to avoid the development of large static charges in blend­
ing and loading, and thus present a black polished appearance. Since
the propellent grains are small, in the presence of abnormal temperatures
they are subject to more rapid deterioration than the larger grains.
Many small arms propellants are nearly as sensitive to friction as black
powder. Therefore, precautions used in handling black powder should
be observed for small arms propellants.
21. Liquid Propellants
Liquid propellants have recently been explored in an attempt to find
propellants for large size rockets, missiles, and projectiles that can be con­
trolled in combustion better than solid propellants. They may include
40
any viscous or nonviscous fluid or liquified gas that is principally an or­
ganic fuel and a strong inorganic oxidizer. Such propellant compounds
or mixtures are either composite (fuel and oxidizer combined) or inde­
pendent (fuel and oxidizer), in a container or containers, separate from
the reaction chamber. With or without catalysts, stabilizers, and auxil­
iary additives (when fed through an arrangement of connecting feed
lines, valves, controls, and metering devices), they can be reacted or
combusted instantaneously, to produce gaseous products for propelling
rockets at velocities greater than the speed of sound (supersonic speeds,
approx. 650 mph and over).
a. Classification. Liquid propellants can be classified in accordance
with the type of reaction system that is involved, either as a monopropel­
lant or a bipropellant, as described in (1) and (2) below.
(1) Monopropellant system includes a composite mixture or compound
of fuel and an oxidizer, delivered by means of a pump or from
a pressurized tank, for eventual reaction in the chamber of a
JATO or rocket. To initiate a reaction in such system, a sep­
arate source of ignition is required.
(2) Bipropellant system includes an organic fuel and oxidizer each
contained separately in containers for dual feed, carburetion,
and combustion within the reaction chamber. Their reaction
may be initiated by either the intimate contact of the fuel with
the oxidizer, as may be the case of hydrazine and nitric acid,
or by external influence (electrical spark ignition or catalysts),
as is the case of a hydrocarbon (alcohol) and liquid oxygen.
b. Characteristics. Liquid propellants differ from solid propellants
primarily in that they are more adaptable to control of long-term com­
bustion reactions, the former being very adaptable for dynamic regula­
tion and control while the latter is statically controlled by the propellant
composition and grain design. Like some chemical agents and explo­
sives, liquid propellants are hazardous, toxic flammable, sensitive, and
must be recognized for their inherent dangerous properties.
c. Uses.
(1) The common combustible and flammable materials that have
been used as fuels and oxidizers in liquid propellant systems are
included in (a) and (b) below.
(a) Fuels—alcohols (ethyl, methyl, furfural); kerosene, aviation
gasoline; octane, heptane, pentane, hydrocarbons; aniline,
monoethylaniline, hydrazine, diborane, pentaborane, alumi­
num borohydride, liquid hydrogen, and anhydrous ammonia.
(b) Oxidizers—white fuming and red fuming nitric acids (WFNA
and RFNA); liquid oxygen and hydrogen peroxide.
(2) Heretofore liquid propellant materials have been employed in
rockets and guided missiles such as the V-2, Corporal E, Reg­
ulus, Terrier, and Nike. Development of liquid propellants for
use in small arms and artillery weapons is now underway.
Section II. LOW EXPLOSIVES
22. General
To understand the composition and functioning of a complete round
of ammunition, a basic knowledge of the characteristics and uses of mili­
tary explosives is necessary. In order that ammunition may function at
the time and place desired, it is necessary to employ different kinds of
explosives, each of which has a specific role, either as a propellant or as
a bursting charge. Explosives suitable for one purpose may be entirely
unsatisfactory for another. Thus, the explosive used to burst a forged
steel projectile would not only be unsuited but also highly dangerous if
used for ejecting and propelling projectiles out of the weapon or propel­
ling missiles and bodies. Similarly, the explosives used in initiators, such
as in primers and fuzes, are so sensitive to shock that only small quanti­
ties can be used safely. Other characteristics of various types of explo­
sives (propellants and high explosives) are outlined in paragraphs 14
through 21 and 25 through 28. For further detailed information, see
TM 9-1910.
a. Definition. By definition, an explosive includes any chemical com­
pound or mechanical mixture that, under the influence of a flame or a
spark, undergoes a sudden chemical change (decomposition) with the
liberation of energy in the form of heat and light and accompanied by a
large volume of gases.
b. Low Explosives. Military explosives are divided into a class of low
explosives or high explosives, according to their rates of decomposition.
Low explosives are mostly solid combustible materials that decompose
rapidly but do not normally explode. This action is known as deflagra­
tion. Upon ignition and decomposition, they develop a large volume
of gases that produce enough pressure to propel a missile in a definite di­
rection. The rate of burning is an important characteristic, which
depends upon such factors as combustion gas pressure, grain size and
form, composition, etc., which were discussed in paragraph 16. Low ex­
plosives do not usually propagate a detonation. Under certain condi­
tions, however, they react in the same manner as high explosives; that is,
they may detonate. The single-base, double-base, and composite pro­
pellants (discussed in pars. 17-19), as well as black powder mixtures are
typical examples of low explosives.
c. Requirements fior a Low Explosive. Before an explosive (propellant)
can be adopted for military use, it must possess the following principal
characteristics:
(1) Possess controlled burning rate.
(2) Be capable of instant ignition and combustion.
(3) Be stable over extended periods of storage under normal condi­
tions.
(4) Be balanced for complete combustion and produce a minimum
amount of residue and weapon bore erosion.
42
cartridge before FIRING

H CHANNEL FOR SQ ACTION

FOR SUPERQUICK
ACTION THE
XLAY ELEMENT
GUN BARRH IS BY PASSED

BURNING i
CHARGE
SHELL
\

BOOSTER

BURSTING
)NVERTEO I CHARGE
OPULENT
EXPLOSIVE .OWES DETONATOR
>AS TRAIN
(UPON JPPER DET
IMPACT)
FIRING PIN
FUZE
OF WEAPC* PROPELLING
CHARGE
PRIMER EXPLOSIVE TARGET
TRAIN
(UPON FIRING)

RA PD 8Q672C
A
W
Figure 25. Explosive trains—artillery ammunition.
(5) Possess a safe minimum toxic and explosive hazard.
(6) Be able to withstand mechanical shock incident to loading,
transportation, and handling by commercial and military
carriers.
d. Low-Explosive Train. The arrangement of a series of combustible
materials, beginning with a small quantity of sensitive explosive and end­
ing with a relatively large quantity of comparatively insensitive explosive,
is termed an “explosive train.” In general, there are two explosive
trains (fig. 25). These are the propelling-charge explosive train and the
bursting-charge explosive train. In all explosive ammunition one or
both of these explosive trains will be found.
(1) The low-explosive or propelling-charge explosive train is em­
ployed for the ejection or propulsion of a body or missile from
the weapon. This train may consist of a primer, an igniter or
igniting charge, and a propelling charge. Thus, a spit of fire
from a small quantity of sensitive explosive (primer) is trans­
mitted in a manner so that a large amount of relatively insen­
sitive explosive (the propelling charge) burns in the proper
manner to propel the body forward. Although a primer is
absent in rockets and the igniter in small arms ammunition, all
three elements are found in artillery propelling-charge explosive
trains.
(2) In small arms ammunition (cartridges), where the propelling
charge is relatively small, the igniter is not required. The
components in this train are a percussion primer and a propel­
ling charge. The firing pin explodes the primer and the flame
passes through the vent leading to the powder chamber and
ignites the propelling charge; the expansion of the resultant
gases forces the bullet out through the bore of the weapon.
(3) In artillery ammunition, the propelling-charge explosive train is
slightly different from the one in small arms ammunition (fig.
25). In this train, it is necessary to place an auxiliary charge
of black powder, called the primer charge or igniter charge, be­
tween the primer and the propelling charge. The addition of
the primer charge is necessary because the small flame pro­
duced by the primer composition is not of sufficient intensity to
initiate the combustion of the large quantity of propellant.
The primer or igniter charge may be continued in the body of
the primer, making one assembly of the percussion element of
the primer and the primer charge as in fixed ammunition, or it
may be divided between the primer body and the igniter pad
attached to separate-loading propelling charges.
(4) In jet propulsion weapons (rockets andJATOS) the propellant
explosive train consists of a propelling charge (single or multi­
grain, double-base, or composite propellant) and an igniter,

44
usually a black powder mixture contained together with an
electric squib or squibs that act as the initiator.
23. Black Powder
a. Characteristics. Black powder, the oldest explosive known, is an inti­
mate uniform mechanical mixture of finely pulverized potassium nitrate
(or sodium nitrate), charcoal, and sulfur. Until the development of
nitrocellulose propellants, black powder was the only propellant and ex­
plosive available. Potassium nitrate is used in most military black pow­
ders. It ignites spontaneously at about 300° C. or 540° F., and develops
a fairly high temperature of combustion (2,300° to 3,800° G. or 4,172°
to 6,872° F.), which causes erosion in the bore of weapons. Black pow­
der is usually in the form of small, black grains that are polished by
glazing with graphite. It is hygroscopic and subject to rapid deteriora­
tion when exposed to moisture. If kept dry, it retains its explosive prop­
erties indefinitely. It is one of the most dangerous explosives to handle
because of the ease with which it is ignited by heat, friction, or spark.
b. Uses. Although black powder has been replaced by single- and
double-base and composite propellants, it still is used in several grades
in—
(1) Primers and igniters for artillery shell.
(2) Delay elements in fuzes.
(3) Expelling charge for base ejection smoke shell, illuminating
shell, and pyrotechnics.
(4) Saluting and blank fire charges.
(5) Smoke-puff and spotting charges for practice ammunition.
(6) Burster in incendiary ammunition.
(7) Bursting charge for 37-mm explosive shells.
(8) Safety fuse.
(9) Quick-match.
(10) Spotting charges for practice bombs and shells, and subcaliber
shells.
(11) Time-train rings in time and combination fuzes.
(12) Igniter in jet propulsion units.
(13) Blasting operations.
c. Precautions. Black powder is particularly sensitive to shock, friction,
heat, flame, or spark. When black powder is handled in cans or bags
or when it is not absolutely protected against sparks, the precautions
described in paragraph 12 will be strictly observed.
24. Pyrotechnic Compositions
a. Characteristics. Pyrotechnic compositions with respect to rapidity of
action are low explosives because of their low rates of combustion. The
compositions are essentially homogeneous physical mixtures or blends of
powdered chemicals. Fuels, such as magnesium, aluminum, charcoal,
sulfur, and metallic hydrides, are mixed with oxidizers, such as the ni-
45
Table III. Characteristics of Low Explosives

Burning rate Heat liberated Temperature developed

In minutes In seconds Cal/GM ° C.

Pyrotechnic compositions 2-14 500-2, 500 800-3, 500

Black powder 4 655 2, 770
Nitrocellulose composi­ 7-12 700-1, 300 1, 700-3, 300
tions.

trates of barium, strontium, sodium, potassium; the perchlorates of am­

monium and potassium; and the peroxides of barium and strontium.
They are generally compressed, with or without a binder, into a definite
shape or form. They also contain color intensity and waterproofing ma­
terials. On ignition and combustion they produce considerable light
and decompose or burn by a process known as deflagration. The func­
tional characteristics of pyrotechnic compositions are their luminous
intensity (candle power), burning rate, color, color value, and efficiency
of light production. Other important characteristics are sensitivity to
impact and friction, ignitibility, stability, and hygroscopicity. That is,
for military use, pyrotechnic compositions must have acceptable explosive
as well as pyrotechnic characteristics. Table III shows burning perform­
ance characteristics of black powder, nitrocellulose composition, and
pyrotechnic low-explosive compositions.
b. Uses. Pyrotechnic illuminating and igniting compositions are used
in a wide variety of ammunition items. The most important uses are—
(1) Flares (trip, airport, ground, aircraft, parachute, reconnaissance
and landing observation, bombardment, and tow target).
(2) Artillery projectiles.
(3) Photoflash cartridges and bombs.
(4) Igniter in incendiaries.
(5) Gunflash simulators.
(6) Igniter for jet propulsion units (rockets, JATOS, and guided
missiles).
(7) Signal smokes.
c. Precautions. Pyrotechnic compositions are hazardous materials.
In general, the regulations in paragraph 12 apply to these compositions.

Section III. HIGH EXPLOSIVES

25. General
High explosives are usually nitration products of organic substances,
such as toluene, phenol, pentaerythritol, amines, glycerin, and starch and
may be nitrogen-containing inorganic substances or mixtures of both.
A high explosive may be a pure compound or an intimate mixture of
several compounds with additives such as powdered metals (aluminum),
plasticizing oils, waxes, etc., which impart desired stability and perform -
46
ance characteristics. A high explosive is characterized by the extreme
rapidity with which its decomposition occurs; this action is known as det­
onation. When initiated by a blow or shock, it will decompose almost
instantaneously, either in a manner similar to an extremely rapid com­
bustion or with rupture and rearrangement of the molecules themselves.
In either case, gaseous and solid products of reaction are produced. The
disruptive effect of the reaction makes some explosives valuable as a
bursting charge but precludes their use as a propellant for the reason
that the gases formed would develop excessive pressures that might burst
the barrel of the weapon.
a. Terms and Definitions.
(1) Primer. A primer is a relatively small and sensitive initial ex­
plosive train component which, on being actuated, initiates
functioning of the explosive train and will not reliably initiate
high-explosive charges. In general, primers are classified in
accordance with the method of initiation, such as percussion,
stab, electric, friction, chemical, etc.
(2) Detonator. A detonator is an explosive train component that
can be activated by either a nonexplosive impulse or by the
action of a primer and is capable of reliably initiating high-
order detonation in a subsequent high-explosive component of
the train. When activated by a nonexplosive impulse, a det­
onator includes the function of a primer. In general, detonators
are classified in accordance with the method of initiation, such as
percussion, stab, electric, friction, flash, chemical, etc.
(3) Igniter.
(a) A device containing a readily burning composition, usually in
the form of black powder, used to amplify the initiation of a
primer in the functioning of a fuze.
(Z>) A device containing a spontaneously combustible material,
such as white phosphorus used to ignite the fillings of incen­
diary bombs and flamethrower fuels at the time of disper­
sion or rupture of the bomb casing.
(c) A device used to initiate burning of the fuel mixture in a
rocket combustion chamber.
(4) Delay. A delay is an explosive train component that introduces
a controlled time delay in the functioning of the train.
(5) Relay. A relay is an element of a fuze explosive train that aug­
ments an outside and otherwise inadequate output of a prior
explosive component, so as to reliably initiate a succeeding
train component. Relays, in general, contain a small single
explosive charge, such as lead azide, and are not usually em­
ployed to initiate high-explosive charges.
(6) Lead. A lead is an explosive train component that consists of a
column of high explosive, usually small in diameter, used to
transmit detonation from one detonating component to a suc­
47
ceeding high-explosive component. It is generally used to
transmit the detonation from a detonator to a booster charge.
(7) Booster charge. A booster charge is the final high-explosive com­
ponent of an explosive train that amplifies the detonation from
the lead or detonator, so as to reliably detonate the main high-
explosive charge of the munition.
(8) Fuge explosive train. A fuze explosive train is an arrangement of
a series of combustible and explosive elements consisting of a
primer, a detonator, a delay, a relay, a lead, and booster
charge, one or more of which may be either omitted or com­
bined. The function of the explosive train is to accomplish the
controlled augmentation of a relatively small impulse into one
of sufficient energy to cause the main charge of the munition
to function.
(9) Primer compositions. A primer composition is an explosive that
is sensitive to a blow such as that imparted by a firing pin. It
is used to transmit shock or a flame to another explosive, a time
element, or a detonator. Most military priming compositions
consist of mixtures of one or more initial detonating agents, oxi­
dants, fuels, sensitizers, and binding agents. Many composi­
tions contain potassium chlorate, lead thiocyanate, antimony
sulfide, lead azide, lead styphnate, mercury fulminate, and a
binding agent. The potassium chlorate acts as an oxidizing
agent, the lead thiocyanate as the fuel and as a desensitizer to
the chlorate, and the explosive as the detonating agent. Other
materials such as ground glass and carborundum may also be
added to increase sensitivity to friction. Priming compositions
for electric primers and squibs may contain barium nitrate as
the oxidizing agent instead of potassium chlorate and lead
styphnate or DDNP (diazodinitrophenol) as the initiating ex­
plosive. Primer mixtures are used in the percussion elements
of artillery primers, in fuzes, and in small arms primers and as
the upper layer of a detonator assembly.
(10) Bursting charge. This is an encased explosive that, when ini­
tiated, is designed to break the metal casing into small frag­
ments.
b. High-Explosive Train. Explosive train may be defined as a series of
steps by which a small, initial amount of energy is built up to the large
amount of energy necessary to insure a high-order detonation for a burst­
ing charge. Fundamentally, an explosive train consists of a detonator,
booster, and bursting charge. This sequence is often interrupted by a
delay or relay. To illustrate the principle of the explosive train, a 2,000-
pound bomb filled with TNT has a fuze of the firing pin type. The
TNT by itself will not detonate from the release of the firing pin, because
the initial source of energy being a friction or percussion effect of the fir-

48
J | DETONATOR

DETONATING WAVE AMPLIFIED BY USE OF BOOSTER

Figure 26. Detonating wave amplified by the use of a booster.

ing pin is insufficient and must be stepped up to a point where it will det­
onate the TNT. This is always accomplished by means of an explosive
train. Components and performance characteristics in explosive trains
are discussed in (1) through (6) below.
(1) The detonator sets up a high-explosive wave when initiated by
the stab action of a firing pin or by a flame. This detonation
is so small and weak that it will not initiate a high-order deto­
nation in the bursting charge, unless a booster is placed be­
tween the two. The booster picks up the small explosive wave
from the detonator and amplifies it to an extent that the burst­
ing charge is initiated and a high-order detonation results (figs.
25 and 26).
(2) To gain the action necessary to control the time and place at
which an explosive will function, it is necessary to incorporate
other components in a high-explosive train. The action de­
sired may be a burst in the air, a burst instantly upon impact
with the target, or a burst shortly after the projectile has pene­
trated the target. The components that may be used to give
these various actions are a primer, a black powder delay pellet
or train, an upper detonator, or any combination of these com­
ponents. Regardless of the arrangement of the components,
the basic chain will remain the same, other components being
placed in front of the basic chain (fig. 27).

408374 0 -56 -4 49
U1
O
PRIMER
MECHANICAL PRIMER
TIME UPPER
TRAIN DETON­
ATOR

DELAY
PELLET
PRIMER FLASH
TUBE
PRIMER

DETONATOR DETONATOR
PRIMER
DETONATOR LOWER
DETON­
ATOR

IGNITER
CHARGE BOOSTER BOOSTER BOOSTER BOOSTER

PROPELLING BURSTING BURSTING BURSTING BURSTING

CHARGE CHARGE CHARGE CHARGE CHARGE

A—BASIC PROPELLANT B—BASIC HIGH-EXPLOSIVE C—TIME ACTION HE TRAIN D—SUPERQUICK ACTION E—DELAY ACTION
TRAIN (HE) TRAIN HE TRAIN HE TRAIN
RAPD 212775A

Figure 27. Schematic arrangement of components of explosive trains.

(3) The action that causes a projectile to burst in the air may be
obtained by placing a primer, which is fired when the projectile
leaves the weapon or when the bomb is dropped, and a black
powder time train in front of the basic chain. The primer ig­
nites the time-train rings, which burn for the length of time
desired, and, in turn, initiates the action of the detonator,
booster, and bursting charge (schemes A and C, fig. 27).
(4) To burst the projectile promptly upon impact with the target, a
superquick or instantaneous action is necessary. This action is
usually obtained by placing an upper detonator in the extreme
front of the fuze and a lower detonator in the body near the
booster charge. In this manner, the detonating wave is trans­
mitted instantly to the bursting charge (scheme D, fig. 27).
(5) To permit penetration of the target by the projectile, a delay
action is necessary as included in armor-piercing projectile.
This is obtained by placing a primer and delay element ahead
of the detonator. In some cases this combination of primer
and delay is inserted between an upper and lower detonator
(scheme E, fig. 27).
(6) A variation of the high-explosive train is found in chemical
shell. In this train there is no large bursting charge such as is
found in high-explosive projectiles, as it is only necessary to rup­
ture the shell case and allow the chemical contents to escape.
The actual bursting of the case is accomplished by an enlarged
booster, known as a burster charge, contained in a tube running
down the center of the shell.
26. Classification
High explosives may be subdivided into three types, according to their
sensitivity, as initiating, booster, and bursting explosives.
a. Initiating High Explosives. Initiating high explosives are extremely
sensitive to shock, friction, and heat. Under normal conditions, they
will not burn, but will detonate if ignited. Their strength and brisance
are inferior, but are sufficient to detonate high explosives. Because of
their sensitivity, they are used in munitions for initiating and intensifying
high-order explosions. Mercury fulminate, lead azide, lead styphnate,
and diazodinitrophenol are examples of such explosives.
b. Booster Explosives. Explosives of this type include tetryl, PETN, and
RDX. They have intermediate sensitivity between initiating explosives
and explosives used as bursting charges such as TNT. They may be ig­
nited by heat, friction, or impact and may detonate when burned in
large quantities.
c. Bursting Explosives. Bursting explosives include explosive D, amatol,
TNT, tetryl, pentolite, picratol, tritonal, RDX compositions, torpex,
DBX, HBX, and others.

51
27. Demolition and Fragmentation Explosives
a. Tetryl.
(1) Characteristics. Tetryl (trinitrophenylmethylnitramine) is a fine
yellow crystalline material. When heated it first melts and
then decomposes and explodes. It burns readily and is more
easily detonated than TNT or ammonium picrate (explosive D)
and is much more sensitive than picric acid. It is detonated
by friction, shock, or spark. It is insoluble in water, practi­
cally nonhygroscopic. Tetryl is stable at all temperatures that
may be encountered in storage. It is toxic when taken inter­
nally; on contact it discolors skin tissue (tobacco stain) and
causes dermatitis.
(2) Detonation. Brisance tests show tetryl to have a very high shat­
tering power. It is greater in brisance than TNT and is ex­
ceeded in standard military explosives only by PETN and some
of the newer military explosives, such as RDX.
(3) Uses.
(a) Charges. Tetryl is the standard booster explosive and is suffi­
ciently insensitive when compressed to be used safely as a
booster explosive. The violence of its detonation insures a
high-order detonation of the bursting charge. It is used in the
form of pressed pellets. Tetryl is the standard bursting charge
for small-caliber (20- and 37-mm) projectiles. It produces ap­
preciably better fragmentation of these shells than TNT. It
is also more readily detonated, and yet, in small-caliber shell
withstands the force of setback in the weapon. It is also a
constituent of tetrytol.
(b) Detonator. Tetryl is used in detonators, the tetryl being pressed
into the bottom of the detonator shell and then covered with
a small priming charge of mercury fulminate, lead azide, or
other initiator.
b. PETN (Pentaerythrite Tetranitrate). PETN is one of the strongest
known high explosives. It is more sensitive to shock or friction than
TNT or tetryl. In its pure form, PETN is a white crystalline powder;
however, it may be a light gray due to impurities. It will detonate under
a long, slow pressure. PETN in bulk must be stored wet. Its primary
use is in booster and bursting charges in small caliber ammunition; up­
per detonator or in some land mines and shells; explosive core of prima-
cord detonating fuze. When suspended in TNT it forms a pentolite
explosive of high brisance.
c. RDX. RDX, one of the most powerful explosives, is commonly
known as cyclonite (cyclotrimethylenetrinitramine), CTMTN, C6; hexo­
gen (H) (German); T4 (Italian); and Tanoyaku (Japanese). It is a
white crystalline solid having a melting point of 202° G. (397° F.) and is
very stable. It has slightly more power and brisance than PETN. It is

52
more easily initiated by mercury fulminate than is tetryl. RDX has
been used mainly in mixtures with other explosives, but can be used by
itself as a subbooster, booster, and bursting charge. It is being com­
bined with nitrohydrocarbons, which also permit cast-loading, or with
waxes or oils for press-loading. It has a high degree of stability in
storage.
d. TNT (Trinitrotoluene). Trinitrotoluene, commonly known as TNT,
is a constituent of many explosives, such as amatol, pentolite, tetrytol,
torpex, tritonal, picratol, ednatol, and composition B and has been used
by itself under such names as triton, trotyl, trilite, trinol, and tritolo.
(1) Characteristics. TNT in a refined form is one of the most stable
of high explosives and can be stored over long periods of time.
It is relatively insensitive to blows or friction. Confined TNT,
when detonated, explodes with violence. When ignited by a
flame, unconfined TNT burns slowly without explosion, evolv­
ing a heavy oily black smoke; however, burning or rapid heat­
ing of large quantities, especially in closed vessels, may cause a
violent detonation. It is nonhygroscopic and does not form
sensitive compounds with metals, but is readily acted upon by
alkalies to form unstable compounds that are very sensitive to
heat and impact. It usually resembles a light brown sugar but
when pure is crystalline and nearly white. When melted and
poured into a shell or bomb it forms a solid crystalline explo­
sive charge. TNT is a very satisfactory military explosive.
The melting point of standard grade 1 TNT is 80.2° C. (176°
F.). Ammunition loaded with TNT can be stored, handled,
and shipped with comparative safety.
(2) Exudation. When stored in warm climates or during warm sum­
mer months, some ammunition loaded with TNT may exude an
oily brown liquid. This exudate oozes out around the threads
at the nose of the shell and may form a pool on the floor. The
exudate is flammable and may contain particles of TNT.
Pools of exudate should be removed.
(3) Detonation. TNT in crystalline form can be detonated readily
by a No. 6 blasting cap or when highly compressed by a No. 8
blasting cap. When cast, it is necessary to use a booster charge
of pressed tetryl or an explosive of similar brisance to insure
complete detonation.
(4) Uses.
(а) Bursting Charge. TNT is used as a bursting charge for high-
explosive shell and bombs, either alone or mixed with am­
monium nitrate to form 50/50 or 80/20 amatol. Flake
TNT is used in fragmentation hand grenades. Other mili­
tary uses of TNT are in mines and for parts of certain shell
and bomb bursters.
(б) Demolition. TNT is used to demolish bridges, railroads, fortifi­
53
cations, and other structures. For such purposes TNT is
used in the form of a large shaped charge or a small highly
compressed block inclosed in a waterproof fiber container
that protects it from crumbling in handling. The triton
blocks used by the Corps of Engineers are blocks of pressed
TNT inclosed in cardboard containers.
(c) Blasting. TNT is suitable for all types of blasting and pro­
duces approximately the same effect as the same weight of
dynamite of 50 to 60 percent grade. It is also used as a sur­
round in some amatol-loaded ammunition.
e. Amatol.
(1) General characteristics. Amatol, a mechanical mixture of am­
monium nitrate and TNT in various percentages, has approxi­
mately the same general characteristics as TNT. It is crystal­
line, yellow or brownish, and insensitive to friction, but it may
be detonated by severe impact. It is less sensitive to detona­
tion than TNT and is readily detonated by mercury fulminate
and other detonators. It is hygroscopic and in the presence of
moisture attacks copper, brass, and bronze, forming danger­
ously sensitive compounds. Amatol, 50/50, has approximately
the same rate of detonation and brisance as TNT, while 80/20
amatol is slightly lower in velocity and brisance than TNT.
Amatol, 80/20, produces a white smoke on detonation, and
amatol, 50/50, produces a smoke less black than straight TNT.
(2) Composition andform. Amatol, 50/50, consists of 50 percent am­
monium nitrate and 50 percent TNT by weight. When hot,
it is sufficiently fluid to be poured or cast like TNT. Amatol,
80/20, consists of 80 percent ammonium nitrate and 20 percent
TNT. It resembles wet brown sugar. When hot, it becomes
semiplastic (consistency of putty) and in that state it can be
pressed into shells and bombs.
(3) Uses. Amatol is a substitute for TNT. Amatol, 50/50, was
used for 75-mm and larger shell, and 80/20 amatol was used for
shell of 155-mm and larger. Amatol was also used in large
bombs. Its primary use, however, is for bangalore torpedoes.
f. Picric Acid (Trinitrophenol).
(1) General. Picric acid, a nitrated product of phenol under the
name of melinite, was adopted as a military high explosive by
the French in 1886 and has been used more extensively as a
military explosive by foreign nations than by this country.
The British designate it as lyddite.
(2) Characteristics. Picric acid is a lemon-yellow crystalline solid.
It is stable but reacts with metals when moist, in some cases
forming extremely sensitive compounds. Picric acid is more
readily detonated by means of a detonator than TNT but has
about the same sensitivity to shock. It is not as toxic as TNT
54
and is also nonhygroscopic although slightly soluble in water.
Picric acid has a high melting point—approximately 122° C.
(251.6° F.).
(3) Uses. Picric acid is chiefly used for conversion to ammonium
picrate (explosive D) and to form bursting-charge mixtures with
other nitro compounds.
g. Ammonium Picrate (Explosive D).
(1) Characteristics. Ammonium picrate is the least sensitive to shock
and friction of all military explosives. This makes it well suited
for use as a bursting charge in armor-piercing projectiles. It
is slightly inferior in explosive strength to TNT. When heated,
it does not melt but decomposes and explodes. It reacts slowly
with metals, and when wet it may form sensitive and dangerous
compounds with iron, copper, and lead. It is difficult to deto­
nate. When ignited in the open it will burn readily like tar or
resin.
(2) Special precautions.
(a) Ammonium picrate, which has been pressed at a shell-loading
plant and removed from a shell, is very much more sensitive
to shock or blow than fresh ammonium picrate. It should
be protected against coming in contact with lead, iron, or
copper because it forms sensitive compounds.
(b) Although less sensitive than TNT, it can be exploded by se­
vere shock or friction, is highly flammable, and may detonate
when heated to a high temperature.
(3) Uses. Explosive D is used as a bursting charge for armor-pierc­
ing shell and in other types of projectiles that must withstand
severe shock and stresses before detonating.
h. Picratol. Picratol is a mixture of 52 percent explosive D and 48 per­
cent TNT. It can be poured like straight TNT and has approximately
the same resistance to shock as that of straight explosive D. The brisance
of picratol is between that of explosive D and TNT. Picratol is non­
hygroscopic. Picratol is a standard filler employed for all Army semi­
armor-piercing bombs.
i. Pentolite. Pentolite is a 50/50 mixture of PETN and TNT and is
commonly known as pentol (German) and pentritol. Pentolite has
largely been displaced by composition B. Pentolite should not be drilled
to form booster cavities; forming tools should be used. It is superior to
TNT in explosive strength and is less sensitive than PETN. It may be
melt-loaded and is satisfactory for use—
(1) As a bursting charge in small caliber shells, e. g., 20-mm.
(2) In shaped-charge ammunition of many types, e. g., antitank,
rifle grenades, and bazookas.
(3) In rockets and shaped demolition charges.
(4) In some ammunition, as a booster or booster-surround.
j. Tetrytol. Tetrytol is a uniform mixture of 75 percent tetryl and 25
55
percent TNT. It has higher brisance than TNT and is more effective
in cutting through steel and in demolition work. It is less sensitive to
shock and friction than tetryl and only slightly more sensitive than TNT.
Tetrytol is stable in storage but exudes at 65° C. (149° F.). Tetrytol is
nonhygroscopic and is suitable for underwater demolition, since sub­
mergence for 24 hours does not appreciably affect its characteristics.
Tetrytol is used in chain and individual demolition blocks and in certain
destructors.
k. Nitrostarch Explosives.
(1) Characteristics. Nitrostarch, gray in color, is nitrated cornstarch
used to sensitize combustibles and oxidizing agents in much the
same manner that nitroglycerin is used in dynamite. It is
highly flammable, and can be ignited by the slightest spark, as
may result from friction and burns, with explosive violence.
Nitrostarch is less sensitive than dry guncotton or nitroglycerin.
As a demolition explosive, it is as insensitive to impact as explo­
sive D and as sensitive to initiation as TNT. Nitrostarch explo­
sives are readily detonated by a No. 6 blasting cap.
(2) Uses. A nitrostarch demolition explosive has been adopted as
a substitute for TNT and is available as: four *4-pound units,
each 14-pound unit containing three Viz-pound small size pel­
lets (briquets) wrapped in paraffined paper with markings to
indicate the location of holes for the blasting caps; Impound
blocks; and 1-pound blocks. TNT formulas for computing
small charges are directly applicable to the nitrostarch demoli­
tion explosive. The blocks must not be broken into fragments,
as this may cause detonation.
l. Dynamite. Commercial blasting explosives with the exception of
black powder are referred to as dynamite. There are several types, each
type being subdivided into a series of grades, each type and grade differ­
ing in one or more characteristics. Dynamite consists essentially of ni­
troglycerin absorbed in a porous material. Each composition generally
is designated as either a straight, ammonia, gelatin, or ammonia-gelatin
dynamite and generally available as paraffin coated G-pound sticks or car­
tridges, rated according to the percent by weight of nitroglycerin content.
(1) Characteristics. Dynamite of from 50- to 60-percent nitroglyc­
erin content is equivalent on an equal weight basis to TNT in
explosive strength. Dynamite of 40 percent is equivalent to
TNT in the ratio of llA pounds dynamite to 1 pound TNT.
Straight dynamite is more sensitive to shock and friction than
TNT and is capable of being detonated by the action of a rifle
bullet. Generally, the higher percentages of dynamite have
very good water resistance. Explosion of the common types of
dynamite produces poisonous fumes, which are dangerous in
confined places. Dynamite, as well as other nitroglycerin ex­
plosives, are adversely affected by extreme cold; dynamite
56
freezes at —20° F., consequently, it is unsatisfactory for service
under low-temperature arctic conditions.
(2) Uses. Dynamite is used as a substitute for nitrostarch or TNT
for training purposes. It is also employed by the Corps of En­
gineers for trench, harbor, dam, flood control, and mining demo­
litions. The following limitations are applicable to its use—
(a) Not to be issued or used for destruction of “duds.”
(b~) Not to be supplied for training in use of demolition equipment.
(c) Not to be used in coastal defense submarine mines or mine
batteries.
(</) Not to be carried in combat vehicles subject to extremes of
temperature.
m. Ednatol. Ednatol is a mixture of haleite or explosive H (ethylene­
dinitramine) and TNT and is one of the most powerful explosives. It is
less sensitive than tetryl, PETN, or RDX. Ednatol is equivalent to
tetryl in brisance. It can be cast in the same manner as amatol. It has
no tendency to combine with metals in the absence of moisture and has
no toxic effect. In the presence of moisture, haleite hydrolyzes slightly
giving an acid reaction, but hydrolysis of ednatol is not appreciable.
Ednatol is very stable and can be stored for long periods; it is nonhygro­
scopic. Ednatol may be used for the same purpose as pentolite, namely,
in rockets, grenades, and high-explosive antitank shell. As an explosive
for producing blast effect, it is superior to amatol, pentolite, and compo­
sition C-3 and nearly equal to composition B.
n. Tritonal. Tritonal is a generic term for explosives containing TNT
and powdered aluminum, generally in the ratio of 80/20. It produces a
greater blast effect than TNT or composition B. Because of the alumi­
num powder constituent, the inclusion of moisture in the mixture must
be avoided. It is used in light-case and general-purpose bombs.
o. HBX. HBX is an aluminized (powdered aluminum) explosive hav­
ing the same order of sensitivity as composition B. HBX may produce
pressure within a casing due to gassing. It is used as a bursting charge
in mines, depth bombs, depth charges, and torpedoes.
p. Composition A. Composition A (comp A) is a mixture containing 91
percent RDX and 9 percent beeswax; a composition that is semiplastic
in nature. When the beeswax was replaced by a wax derived from
petroleum and with subsequent changes in the method of adding the de­
sensitizer, the designation was changed to composition A-2. Recently
the composition has been redesignated as composition A-3, because of
changes in the granulation of RDX and the method of manufacture.
Composition A-3 is granular in form, resembling tetryl in granulation.
It is usually buff in color and is press-loaded in minor-caliber (20-, 37-,
and 40-mm) shell. It is 30 percent stronger than TNT; strength is
usually dependent on the amount of wax binder.
q. Composition B. Composition B (comp B) is a (59/40/1) mixture of
RDX, TNT, and beeswax. Its color may vary from dirty white, light
57
yellow to brownish yellow. It is less sensitive than tetryl but more sen­
sitive than TNT. It is intermediate between TNT and RDX with re­
spect to sensitivity and initiation. It is only inferior to tritonal and tor-
pex with respect to blast effect. Composition B is an authorized filling
for Army-Navy (AN) standard aircraft bombs, mines, torpedoes, anti­
tank artillery shells (76- and 105-mm), demolition charges, and in
rockets. Composition B containing 60 percent RDX and 40 percent
TNT, exclusive of wax, is known as composition B-2, a nonstandard ex­
plosive. Because of its greater sensitivity to impact, composition B-2 is
not as suitable as composition B for use in bombs.
r. Composition C (Series).
(1) General. Composition C, sometimes referred to as PE, is a plas­
tic explosive, a (88/12) RDX, and an inert plasticizer compo­
sition. It was replaced by a (80/20) RDX and an explosive
plasticizer composition C-2 containing no tetryl. Composition
C-3, a (77j^-2/23±2) RDX and an explosive plasticizer with
tetryl substituted in part for RDX, was developed to replace
composition C-2. Because of the hardening of composition
C-3 at low temperatures ( — 29° C., —20° F.), its volatility at
elevated temperatures, and its hygroscopicity, a plastic explosive
designated as composition C-4 was developed recently and
standardized. Composition C, brown in color, plastic in form,
about the consistency of putty, has a tendency to leach out
(sweat out) plasticizing oils, leaving pure RDX which is too
sensitive for use in the field.
(2) Composition C-2. This putty-like composition is about 35 per­
cent stronger than TNT. It was developed to overcome the
objections of composition C. It was employed as a demolition
charge.
(3) Composition C-3. It is slightly inferior to composition B as an
explosive for producing blast effect. It is considerably less sen­
sitive than TNT and may not always be detonated by a No. 8
blasting cap, but will always be detonated by the special Corps
of Engineers blasting cap. It was used principally as a com­
mando and demolition explosive, either with or without a con­
tainer. It is also used as a filler in some types of munitions.
If its plasticity is lost by long storage at low temperatures, it
may be restored to satisfactory plasticity by molding with the
hands after warming by immersion in warm water. It must
not be exposed to open flame, as it catches fire easily and burns
with an intense flame. If burned in large quantities, the heat
generated may cause it to explode. Its explosion produces
poisonous gases in such quantities that its use in closed spaces
is dangerous. Existing inventories of this material are being
exhausted and replaced with a standardized composition C-4.
(4) Composition C-4. This is a (91/9) RDX and plastic explosive
58
composition. It is a semiplastic putty-like material, dirty
white to light brown in color, less sensitive, more stable, less
volatile, and more brisant than composition C-3. It is a non-
hydroscopic material that has found application in demolition
blocks and specialized uses.
5. DBX. DBX is a (21/21/40/18) RDX, ammonium nitrate, TNT,
and aluminum powder composition. It is gray in color, with a melting
point between 80° and 90° C. (176° and 194° F.). It will react with
metals in the same manner as amatol. Because of the inclusion of am­
monium nitrate, it is somewhat hygroscopic. It resembles torpex in sen­
sitivity, strength, and brisance.
28. Initiating and Priming Explosives
a. Mercury Fulminate. Mercury fulminate is a heavy crystalline solid,
white when pure, but ordinarily having a faint brownish-yellow or gray­
ish tint. It is extremely sensitive to heat, friction, spark, flame, or shock,
detonating completely in nearly every instance. Its sensitivity varies
with temperature. It has been found that its sensitivity is dependent in
part on crystal size. It is nonhygroscopic and may be safely stored for
long periods of time at moderate temperatures. However, it will not
stand long-term storage at elevated temperatures. For all practical pur­
poses, mercury fulminate has been replaced by lead azide and lead
styphnate. It was used on limited scale in a few primers, in fuze deto­
nators, and in blasting caps. It may be used alone or mixed with po­
tassium chlorate. At present this material is no longer included in
standard ammunition.
b. Lead Azide. Lead azide, one of the most stable initiators, is used to
detonate high explosives. It is a fine-grained, cream-colored compound.
It is sensitive to flame and impact but is not certain to detonate by the
action of a firing pin. It is not easily decomposed on long continued
storage at moderately elevated temperatures. It flashes at a much
higher temperature than mercury fulminate. A smaller weight of lead
azide than of mercury fulminate is required to detonate an equal amount
of TNT, tetryl, etc. Lead azide has replaced mercury fulminate because
of its properties and because it stands up better in storage and is less
hazardous to manufacture. It is found in primer mixtures and usually
loaded in containers of aluminum and in detonator assemblies and fuzes.
When in contact with copper metal, it forms a supersensitive explosive.
c. Lead Styphnate. This explosive has been widely employed commer­
cially and as an initiator for foreign military explosives. Recently, it
has been adopted by the United States military. It may be pale straw,
deep yellow, orange-yellow, or reddish-brown in color. Lead styphnate
is slightly less sensitive than mercury fulminate and it has about the same
strength as lead azide. It should be stored under water in conductive
rubber containers. It is used in detonators to lower the ignition tem­
perature of lead azide. As a primer it produces a very good flame. It
59
is more easily ignited by an electrical spark than is mercury fulminate,1
lead azide, or DDNP. As a substitute for mercury fulminate in primer
compositions, lead styphnate offers sensitivity, stability, and ample flame.
It is useless as a detonator, except as a sensitizing agent when employed
in lead azide friction-type primers or lead azide detonators.
d. Diazodinitrophenol (DDNP). Extensively employed in commercial
blasting caps, this explosive has found a place in military priming com­
positions and detonators. It is nonhygroscopic, greenish yellow to brown
in color. Its sensitivity to impact is equal to mercury fulminate; how­
ever, it is much less sensitive to friction, about that of lead azide. If
pressed into a blasting cap shell with a reinforcing cap and a piece of
black powder safety fuse is crimped in the shell, a charge of DDNP un­
dergoes detonation when ignited. For the less sensitive high explosives
(explosive D and cast TNT), it is a better initiator of detonation than
mercury fulminate. For the more sensitive high explosives, DEfNP is
not superior to lead azide. It is not as stable as lead azide but markedly
superior to mercury fulminate. It is used to some extent in loading fuze
detonators and the manufacture of priming compositions.

Section IV. CHEMICAL AGENTS

29. General
A military chemical agent is a substance that produces a toxic (casualty)
or an irritating (harassing) effect, a screening smoke, an incendiary action,
or a combination of these.
30. Classification
Chemical agents are compounds and mixtures other than pyrotechnics
and are used as fillers in artillery shell, mortar shell, grenades, rockets,
and bombs. They are classified according to tactical use, physiological
effect, and purpose, as described in a through d below.
a. Military Gases. A military gas is any agent or combination of
agents that can produce either a toxic or irritating physiological effect.
Such agent may be in solid, liquid, or gaseous state, either before or after
dispersion. The gases may be persistent (those remaining effective at
point of release for more than 10 min.) or nonpersistent (those becoming
ineffective w/in 10 min.). Persistent gases are further divided into mod­
erately persistent (those remaining effective in the open 10 min. to 12
hr.) and highly persistent (those remaining effective in the open longer
than 12 hr.). The military gases are classified in accordance with their
toxic and irritating effects as listed below.
(1) Casualty gases:
Blister gases.
Choking gases.
Blood and nerve poisons.
60
(2) Training and riot control gases:
Vomiting.
Tear gases.
b. Screening Smokes. A screening smoke is a cloud that consists of small
particles of solids, liquids, or both, dispersed and suspended in air.
c. Incendiaries. An incendiary may be a solid, liquid, or a gelled semi­
plastic material that, by its intense heat and flame, can start fires and
scorch combustible and noncombustible materials, as well as injure and
inactivate personnel.
d. Simulated Military Gases. Simulated agents are essentially mild non­
toxic harassants (substitute for the real agent) designed specifically for
training purposes.
31. Blister Gases (Casualty)
Blister gases are agents that affect the nose, throat, eyes, lungs, or ex­
posed skin tissue. They harass and produce casualties resultant from the
injuries (inflammations, blisters, destruction of body tissue). The princi­
pal gases in this group are mustard, mustard mixtures, lewisite, and
simulated mustard gases.
a. Mustard gas (H) is a dark-brown liquid that slowly evaporates to a
colorless gas having the odor of garlic. Distilled mustard gas (HD) may
be practically odorless. Its principal physiological effect is to produce skin
blisters, although the blistering does not ordinarily appear for several hours
after contact. If inhaled, mustard gas vapors have a choking (lung irri­
tant) effect. For complete protection against mustard (H, HD), mustard-
T (HT), or the nitrogen mustards (HN-1, HN-2, HN-3), both protec­
tive mask and protective clothing are necessary. HN-1 is a colorless to
pale yellow liquid, having a faint odor varying from fishy to almost odor­
less. Because HN-1 may be virtually odorless, harmful effects may be
produced without warning. Both HN-1 vapor and liquid are dangerous.
HN-1 attacks the respiratory tract as H gas does, but to a lesser degree,
and has especially dangerous effects on the eyes that may result in per­
manent injury or blindness. The tactical use of mustard gas and its
mixture is to neutralize areas, contaminate materiel, restrict aggressor
movements, and inflict casualties. These agents can be dispersed by
artillery and mortar shell and from aircraft bombs. Food contaminated
by mustard gases or its mixtures is unfit for use.
b. Lewisite gas (L) is a dark-brown liquid that evaporates to a color­
less gas and has an odor of geraniums. In addition to being a blister and
choking gas, lewisite acts as an arsenical poison. The protective mask
and protective clothing are necessary against L. Lewisite is best de­
stroyed with bleach, DANC solution, or an alcoholic solution of caustic
soda. If lewisite is destroyed by burning, there is a danger of contami­
nating the atmosphere with poisonous arsenic oxide. The tactical use of
L and the methods of projection are the same as those for H. It renders
food and water permanently unfit for use.
61
c. Simulated H agents possess physical properties that are similar to
mustard gas and generally include a dye, an odoriferous constituent, or
both. Unusually nontoxic, such material is employed as a substitute filler
for the agent in munitions in simulated military training exercises. A
simulated agent may be harmless or partially harmful. The principal
materials used are molasses residuum and asbestine suspensions.
(1) Molasses residuum (MR) is a nontoxic (25 percent solution)
thick, sirupy, viscous liquid with a molasses odor. When dis­
persed from aircraft, chemical spray tanks, artillery shell,
mortar shell, or bombs, the spray patterns resemble those of
mustard gas (H).
(2) Asbestine suspension (AS) is a nontoxic suspension of finely
ground asbestos in water. It may or may not include butyric
acid (odor of rancid butter), a material that imparts a disagree­
able lingering scent to the mixture. With butyric acid, it is
known as an asbestine-butyric acid suspension; without butyric,
it is known as an asbestine suspension. AS is dispersed as a
spray from aircraft. When dispersed, it will adhere like MR
to surfaces and personnel and show up in contrast to the sur­
rounding medium.
32. Choking Gases
Choking gases affect the nose, throat, and lungs of unprotected person­
nel. They cause casualties resulting from a lack of oxygen. The prin­
cipal gas in this group is phosgene. Phosgene (CG) appears on
projection as a whitish cloud, changing to a colorless gas. In high con­
centrations, one or two breaths may be fatal in a few hours. CG
produces but a slight irritation of the sensory nerves in the upper air pas­
sages; therefore any personnel exposed to this gas are likely to inhale it
more than they would equivalent concentrations of other olfactory sensi­
tizing gases. Phosgene is insidious in its action; consequently personnel
exposed to it often have little or no warning symptoms until it is too late
to avoid serious poisoning. CG as a chemical agent can be employed
effectively at very low temperatures, since it freezes only below —155° F.
33. Blood and Nerve Poisons
Blood and nerve poisons, when absorbed by the blood stream, affect
the nervous system, respiratory system, or muscular functions of the body,
to cause temporary or permanent paralysis or instant death. They can
immobilize aggressor forces by rendering them helpless. Hydrocyanic
acid and cyanogen chloride are representative of such agents.
a. Nerve gases are usually colorless to light brown at the point of re­
lease. Their odor is faint, sweetish, fruity, or nonexistent. On exposure,
personnel will experience nausea, vomiting, and diarrhea; these effects
are followed by muscular twitching and convulsions. Due to the
extreme toxicity of the nerve gases, these effects are caused by extremely
62
low concentrations of the gases and are quite rapid. Protection requires
impermeable clothing and the protective mask.
b. Hydrocyanic acid (AC) is a colorless gas upon release. Its odor is
faint and similar to that of bitter almonds or peach kernels. It is not
readily detected in the field. On exposure, personnel first experience a
rapid stimulation of the respiratory system, later followed by deeper in­
halation. Death by paralysis of the respiratory system may occur in a
few minutes.
c. Cyanogen chloride (CK) is a colorless liquid. On release in the
field, it changes into a colorless gas that is about twice as heavy as air.
CK sometimes may be faint in odor, otherwise its odor is sharp and
pungent. On contact or exposure, CK will irritate flesh and stimulate
a strong flow of tears. Its action is rapid after inhalation, producing
paralysis of the respiratory system. Unlike AC, it first produces an in­
voluntary spasm (a warning of its presence) of short duration of the
upper respiratory tract. For protection against CK and AC, a protective
mask is required.
34. Training and Riot Control Gases
A group of vomiting and tear gases that, when vaporized or dispersed,
exist as suspended particles in the atmosphere. They cause partial or
complete temporary disability of personnel. The principal ones in this
category are chloracetophenone and liquid mixtures of chloracetophe­
none in hydrocarbon solvents.
a. Chloracetophenone (CN), commonly known as tear gas, having a
fruity apple blossom odor, is typical of such agents. It is solid material
(white to black in color) that, when converted into a gas, gas-aerosol, or
finely divided particles, will cause a profuse flow of tears, necessitating
the use of a protective mask for protection. CN in normal concentra­
tions has no permanent injurious effect on the eyes. In high concentra­
tions it irritates the skin, producing a burning and itching sensation.
Food and water contaminated by CN possess a disagreeable taste. It is
the principal constituent in the filler used in CNS, CNB mortar shell,
and CN-DM grenade. It can be used in bursting-type munitions in
arctic regions.
b. Tear gas solution (CNB) is a 10 percent liquid mixture of CN in
equal parts of benzene and carbon tetrachloride. It is a less severe
lacrimator and skin irritator than CNS. For this characteristic, it is
used as a filler in hand grenades, artillery shell, mortar shell, small
bombs, and aircraft spray for all training purposes. It has a character­
istic fruity-benzene odor.
c. Tear gas solution (CNS) is a 23.2 percent liquid mixture of CN in
equal parts of chloropicrin (PS) and chloroform. CNS has an odor
similar to fly paper. The protective mask is an effective protector
against both CNS and CNB. CNS as well as CNB can be used in gre­
nades, mortar shell, small bombs, and aircraft spray.
63
d. Adamsite (DM) typifies the vomiting gases. It is a yellow or green
solid when pure. It is dispersed by burning-type munitions such as
candles and grenades and appears as a yellow smoke with an odor re­
sembling coal smoke. Physiologically, it causes lacrimation, violent ‘
sneezing, intense headache, nausea, and temporary physical debility.
For protection, the protective mask is required. DM has only a slight
corrosive effect on metals. It renders food and water permanently unfit
for use. Very low-temperature (arctic) conditions impose no special
limitations on DM or its mixture with CN (CN-DM burning mixture)
when dispersed by hand grenade.
e. Chloracetophenone and diphenylamide chlorarsine (CN-DM mix­
ture) is a solid mixture of CN and DM including nitrocellulose, a burn­
ing ingredient. When ignited, it burns to form an irritating yellowish
white smoke. CN-DM vapors cause headache, nausea, sneezing, de­
pressed sick feeling, intense eye irritation, and temporary disability. In
hot and humid tropical weather, it will irritate exposed skin. A protec­
tive mask gives adequate protection against CN-DM smokes and vapors.

35. Screening Smokes

A screening smoke is produced by the dispersion of particles in the at­
mosphere through the burning of solids or the spraying of liquids. It is
used to obscure military movements, blanket the enemy from observation,
spot artillery fire and bombing, as well as to disguise cloud gas. Smoke
screen producing materials are rated in units for their top obscuring
power (TOP*). The principal smoke producing agents are white phos­
phorus, plasticized white phosphorus, sulfur trioxide-chlorsulfonic acid
mixture and hexachlorethane-zinc mixture, with obscuring powers in the
order listed.
a. White phosphorus (WP) with a 3,500 unit TOP is a white to light
yellow, waxlike, luminous substance (phosphorescent in the dark). On
ignition it produces a yellow-white flame and dense white smoke. WP
is poisonous when taken internally. Its smoke or fumes are not. When
dispersed by ammunition, as small particles, it ignites spontaneously on
exposure to air and continues to burn on contact with solid materials, even
when embedded in human flesh. WP smoke is unpleasant to breathe
but harmless; the particles, however, will poison food and water. It is
used in bursting-type projectiles, artillery and mortar shell, grenades,
rockets, and bombs. It is used as an igniter in incendiary ammunition
that contains flammable fuels (IM, NP, PT1). WP, when used in pro­
jectiles and burst on terrain covered with soft deep snow, is smothered
and produces approximately 75 percent less smoke.
b. Plasticized white phosphorus (PWP) is a finely divided form of WP
* TOP—A relative value that indicates the amount of obscurity (due to reflection and refraction of
light rays) that 1 pound of smoke producing material will develop under standard and controlled con­
ditions against a 25-candlepower light source.

64
suspended in a thickened and gelled xylene rubber mixture. Like WP,
it is an effective double purpose screening and incendiary agent that can
be dispersed under arctic, tropic, and temperate climatic conditions.
c. Sulfur trioxide-chlorsulfonic acid mixture (FS) with a 2,240 unit
TOP, second only to WP and PWP, is a liquid with an acrid and acid
odor that produces dense white smoke when dispersed in a humid
atmosphere. FS smoke is non poisonous. Its liquid irritates and in­
flames contacted skin tissue. A protective mask is required for protec­
tion against exposures to heavy concentrations. The mask and protec­
tive clothing should be used for protection against combination FS gas
and liquid sprays. Liquid FS renders food and water unfit for use; the
smoke merely imparts an unpleasant taste. In view of the fact that
liquid FS possesses corrosive properties of strong mineral acids, such as
sulfuric or hydrochloric, stringent precautions should be observed at all
times for protecting nonaggressor personnel and noncombat forces and
materiel during use and handling. FS is dispersed from mortar shells,
grenades, and by aircraft spray from cylinders. Since FS smoke mix­
tures freeze at low temperatures (approx. —22° F.), smoke shells con­
taining this agent are partially or completely ineffective for use at freezing
temperatures. Under tropical and high humidity conditions, FS per­
forms very effectively.
d. Hexachlorethane-zinc mixture (HC) with a 2,000 unit TOP is a
combination of zinc powder, hexachlorethane, ammonium perchlorate,
and ammonium chloride. When ignited, it produces zinc chloride that
passes into the air as a dense grayish-white smoke. HC is toxic to un­
protected personnel exposed to heavy concentrations for short periods or
to light concentrations for extended periods of time. A protective mask
offers adequate protection against light concentrations. For heavy con­
centrations and prolonged exposure, a self-contained oxygen mask is re­
quired. Food and water are not spoiled by HC, but acquire a disagreeable
odor. HC in canisters, dispersed by base ejection artillery shell, is not
effective for use on terrain covered with deep loose snow, because the
canisters bury themselves and become smothered. However, they can
be employed effectively on hard packed snow or ice. HC is dispersed
effectively from fixed and floating smoke pots, base ejection artillery
shell, mortar shell, and grenades under favorable (humid atmospheres
and hard terrain) arctic, tropic, or temperate region conditions.
36. Incendiaries
Incendiaries start and intensify fires and harass and cause casualties.
The principal incendiary solid mixtures as used in ammunition are ther­
mite and thermate (TH). For functioning in arctic regions on ice or deep
snow, TH incendiaries (bomb and grenade) are ineffective, since they
bury themselves and smother in melted ice or snow. Because thermite
and thermate generate great heat, they are useful in destroying equip­
ment and vital parts of materiel that might be in danger of capture by
408374 0 -56 -5 65
the enemy. In bursting ammunition (grenade or bomb), they are em­
ployed for casualty as well as incendiary effects.
a. Thermite is an intimate uniform mixture of powdered aluminum
and iron oxide. On ignition, it produces intense heat (approx. 4,300° F.
in a few seconds) with the formation of a white hot mass of molten iron
and slag. TH is used in cartridges, bombs, grenades, mortar shell, and
artillery shell. TH as a filler is included in thin-walled nonmagnesium
metal containers.
b. Thermate is essentially a thermite, barium nitrate, sulfur, and
lubricating oil composition contained in a heavy-wall body, usually mag­
nesium or a magnesium alloy. When ignited by electrical or mechan­
ical means, the contents and body burn with an intense heat of about
3,700° F. and are difficult to extinguish.
c. Magnesium, in fine powder or thin ribbon or solid form, is a ma­
terial that ignites and burns with intense heat and white light. It is a
material extensively used in pyrotechnic mixtures and incendiary muni­
tions. As a container body with thermate, it is an effective incendiary.
d. Aluminum, in powder, flake, or grain form (12 to 120 mesh), is sil­
very gray in color. When ignited in mixture with strong oxidizing
agents, such as nitrates, chlorates, or perchlorates, it will burn with great
heat and intensely bright light. In a fine powdered form, it is used as a
constituent of explosive mixtures and primer compositions, in flares, and
various pyrotechnic devices. The coarse granular form of material is
used in incendiary bomb mixtures. In flake form, aluminum powder is
used as an ingredient in detonating mixtures. Alloyed with magnesium
metal, it is used to make an aluminum-magnesium-alloy powder. Such
alloy powder is employed in the same manner as aluminum powder.
Special precautions are to be taken when loading or blending aluminum
and aluminum-alloy powders to avoid undue exposure to humid atmos­
pheres, dampness, and moisture.
e. Incendiary oil (IM) is an 88 percent gasoline mixture thickened
with fatty soaps, fatty acids, and special chemical additives (isobutyl
metfiacrylate polymer, napthenic acid). It may or may not contain
metallic sodium or WP particles for ignition. When dispersed and
ignited, IM adheres to combustible and noncombustible surfaces. It
burns like ordinary gasoline with a hot orange flame and gives off a
black smoke. IM is used as a filler in bombs, grenades, and portable
and mechanized flamethrowers. Winterized IM incendiary fuels can be
dispersed from bombs or grenades and effectively employed under arctic
climatic conditions.
f. Incendiary oil, napalm (NP) is a flammable fuel, principally
aviation gasoline (approx. 88 percent), thickened with a napalm thickener
(a special gelling mixture of fatty acids and fatty soaps and chemical ad­
ditives). As a filler with or without metallic sodium or WP particles,
NP can be used in munitions in the same manner as IM.

66
g. Incendiary mixture (PT1) is a peptized NP incendiary fuel mixture
that is used in the same manner as IM and NP.
37. Flamethrower Fuels
Flamethrower fuels are essentially gelled gasoline and oil incendiary
mixtures. When dispersed (bomb, flamethrower) and simultaneously
ignited by mechanical, electrical, or chemical means, they cause destruc­
tion of materiel and casualties by burning or scorching with hot flame.
( lie main flamethrower fuels are—
a. Gasoline thickened with napalm, octal, or similar thickener to form
a gelled gasoline. This mix is known as thickened fuel.
b. Gasoline blended with light fuel oils or lubricating oils. This fuel
is known as unthickened fuel (see TM 3-366 and 3-400).
38. Marking and Identification
a. All ammunition containing chemical agents is identified and
marked with distinctive symbols or letters and colors, as indicated in
table I (par. 10).
b. For the purpose of storage, chemical agents and munitions are seg­
regated into four groups, according to the nature of the filling and their
inherent hazards as follows:
(1) Group A (blister and nerve gases) includes chemical agents re­
quiring complete protective clothing plus protective masks.
(2) Group B (toxic and smoke) includes chemical agents requiring
protective masks.
(3) Group C includes spontaneously flammable chemical agents,
such as WP.
(4) Group D includes incendiary and readily flammable chemical
agents.

67
CHAPTER 3

BASIC TYPES OF AMMUNITION

Section I. SMALL ARMS AMMUNITION

39. General
Small arms ammunition consists of cartridges of various types and sizes
used in rifles (except recoilless type), carbines, pistols, revolvers, machine­
guns, and submachineguns and shell used in shotguns. Small arms car­
tridges are similar to each other in general shape and construction.
They may be identified as to caliber, model, and type by their size,
shape, and color (figs. 28-32) and by marking on packing boxes and car­
tons. See TM 9-1990 for complete information on small arms ammu­
nition.
40. Cartridges
a. General. A cartridge of the small arms type may consist of a bullet
to which a cartridge case is crimped. The cartridge case is fitted with a
primer and contains a propelling charge. A cartridge is known as a
round of small arms ammunition. A conventional cartridge and the
terminology of its components are shown in figure 33.

' 'C\

CARTRIDGE, BALL, CAL. .22, SHORT (HIGH VELOCITY)

CARTRIDGE, BALL, CAL. .22, LONG RIFLE

CARTRIDGE, BALL, CAL. .22, LONG RIFLE, M24

RAPD 108642/X

Figure 28. Caliber .22 cartridges.

68
Figure 29. Caliber .30 cartridges.

Bullet. Bullets for service use have a metal core or slug that is
coxcred with a gilding metal or gilding-metal-clad steel jacket. The
nose of pointed-nose bullets is blunted to a meplat (flattish curve) (fig.
33). Copper-plated steel may be used instead of gilding metal for the
69
J*---------- 1.68---- ------- —<«j

y '... ......... '

CARTRIDGE. GRENADE.
CARBINE, CAL. .30, M6

r
cartridge, rifle grenade, cal. .30, m,3
RIFLE GRENADE CARTRIDGES

CARTRIDGE, BALL, CARTRIDGE. TRACER,

CARBINE, CAL. .30, Mi CARBINE, CAL. ,30, MI6

CARTRIDGE, DUMMY, CARTRIDGE. TRACER.

CARBINE, CAL, .30, Ml3 CARBINE, CAL. *30, M27 '(T4.3)

1. — . ........................
GW

CARTRIDGE,'TEST, HIGH-PRESSURE, CARBINE, CAL. .30, M18

CARBINE CARWilGiT

h----- 1.275----

Nt

CARTRIDGE CARTRIDGE. DUMMY

CAL. .45 CAL. .45, Ml921

CARTRIDGE, TRACER,
CAL. .45, M26 (T30)

:T" " ......

- j-nwhfcw------- jjtutt

............ s'
CARTRIDGE, BLANK.
CAL. .45, M9
CALIBER .45 CARTRIDGES
RAPD 95671D

Figure 30. Rifle grenade cartridges, carbine cartridges, and caliber .45 cartridges.
70
i

i fa

-±r
AT-

r4

J*

Figure 31. Caliber .50 cartridges.

71
r

Figure 32. Caliber .60 cartridges.

72
HkiAAEk F'Ooi FiUs-t ( pnikAFD a^^fkari y
PAPER DISK (FOIL.J . ASSEMBLY
ANVIL
COMPOSITION) <TBAr„
COMPOSITIONS IDA
■I COMPOSITION /ASSEMBLY
( D

MER VENT IN ANVIL

i
PRIMER
/
SLUG
POCKET "SQUAR
EXTRACTING' GROOVE
BULLET........................ •
CARTRIDGE
INCENDIARY
COMPOSITION
(OR
T Fll i ER)

i HEAD

Figure 33. Cartridge terminology.

W
jacket of caliber .45 bullets. Ball and tracer bullets have a lead alloy or
common steel core or slug. Other service-type bullets have a hardened
steel alloy core. The base of bullets is either flat or tapered (“boat
tailed”). A cannelure or annular knurl is rolled or cut into the jacket
of bullets to provide a recess into which the cartridge case is crimped
(figs. 35-39). Some commercial-type bullets are molded of lead alloys
and may have wax or some chemically plated covering as a lubricant to
prevent lead fouling of the weapons. Other commercial-type bullets
have a lead core within various designs of gilding metal jackets. Some
caliber .60 service-type bullets may have only a metal case and outer
covering (or jacket) of gilding metal, while other caliber .60 types consist
of a steel core, a gilding metal jacket, a gilding metal sabat, and an
active point filler material or an inert point filler material. In addition,
the latter types may also have a tracer composition or a high-explosive
charge within the steel core.
c. Propellant. There are two types of small arms propellants generally
used, the single-base (nitrocellulose) type and the double-base (nitrocel­
lulose and nitroglycerin) type (pars. 14-21). The effective difference
between the two types is that the double-base type burns more rapidly
than the single-base type; the double-base type is used in shotgun shell,
some caliber .45 rounds, and carbine ammunition. The weight of the
charge and granulation of the propellant of a particular composition are
in accordance with specification requirements for velocity and pressure.
The charge is assembled loosely in the cartridge case (fig. 33).
d. Primer. The primer assembly of centerfire cartridges (fig. 33) con­
sists of a brass or gilding-metal cup that contains a primer-composition
pellet of sensitive explosive, a paper disk, and a brass anvil. A blow
from the firing pin of a small arms weapon on the center of the primer
cup compresses the primer composition violently between the cup and
the anvil, thus causing the composition to explode. The holes or vents
in the anvil allow the flame to pass through the primer vent in the car­
tridge case, thereby igniting the propellant. Rimfire ammunition, such
as the caliber .22 cartridge, does not contain a primer assembly; the
primer composition is spun into the rim of the cartridge case and the
propellant is in intimate contact with the composition. In firing, the fir­
ing pin strikes the rim of the case and thus compresses the primer com­
position and initiates its explosion. Caliber .60 ammunition, used in
caliber .60/20-mm automatic aircraft gun, may be assembled with per­
cussion or electric primer. As indicated by the terminology, percussion-
primed cartridges can only be initiated by the blow of a firing pin
striking the primer cup. Electric-primed cartridges are initiated by the
passage of an electric current through the primer composition; a modi­
fied firing pin contacts the uninsulated portion of the primer cup and
permits the electric current to pass through the primer cup and primer
composition to the grounded cartridge case.
e. Cartridge Case. The cartridge case (fig. 33) is composed of brass
74
------ 0.36.

BULLET, BALL, CAL. .22, SHORT

0.46

BULLET, BALL, CAL. .22 LONG RIFLE

0.475

BULLET, BALL, CAL. .22, LONG RIFLE, M24

RAPD 108643

Figure 34. Caliber .22 bullets—sectioned.

75
BULLET, BALL, CAL. .30, M2 BULLET, ARMOR-PIERCING,
CAL. .30, M2

A\ \
c__ f •«* ■-jCLjir * .*. .
\H
BULLET, INCENDIARY, BULLET, ARMOR-PIERCING,
CAL. .30, Ml CAL. .30, Ml4

A , T
\M J

J' ■■ \

BULLET, TRACER, CAL. .30, Ml BULLET, BALL, FRANGIBLE,

CAL. .30, M22

ORANGE

BULLET, TRACER, BULLET, TRACER, CAL. .30,

CAL. .30, M25 (T10) M2S (T72E1)

A-.. GILDING METAL JACKET H. -.. INCENDIARY COMPOSITION

B-...I. IARDENED ALLOY STEEL CORE , '.TRACER COMPOSITION-. -
C. -GILDING METAL BASE FILLER J. .. 'DIM
D-.. -LEAD '. F" SHOT POINT FILLER „ (TRACER COMPOSITION—
... /BRIGHT
E-.. -LEAD-ANTIMONY SLUG
, (GILDING METAL CLAD
f-. -STEEL BODY
[Link] JACKET
G—LEAD SHOT *4 BODY FILLER
M—IGNITER COMPOSITION

RAPD 108631A.:

Figure 35. Caliber .30 bullets—sectioned.

(brass, copper, or gilding metal in the case of cal. .22) or steel. With the
exception of its larger dimension, the caliber .60 cartridge case is similar
in design to the caliber .30 and .50 cartridge cases. The cartridge case
serves as a means whereby the other components (primer, propelling
charge, and bullet) are assembled into a unit, the cartridge. Another of
its functions is to expand and seal the chamber against the escape of
gases to the rear when the cartridge is fired. This action is known as
76
B
J
•Q

0.690

BULLET, BALL, CARBINE, CAL. .30, Ml

BUllET TRACER. CARBINE CaL .30, M16

A—LEAD-ANTIMONY SLUG
B—GILDING METAL JACKET
C—GILDING METAL CLAD STEEL JACKET
D-~IGNITER COMPOSITION
E—TRACER COMPOSITION

BULLET, TRACER, CARBINE, CAL. .30, M27 (T43)

RAPO 108630A

Figure 36. Caliber .30 carbine bullets—sectioned.

77
BULLET. BALL, CAL, ,45. M19J1

B >" A-u r r“LKET

E t
RAPD 5 08632.A

Figure 37. Caliber .45 bullets—sectioned.

obturation. To make the cartridge waterproof and to keep the propel­

ling charge dry, the primer is sealed in the primer seat and the bullet is
sealed in the neck of the cartridge case by a thin film of lacquer or var­
nish at the time of manufacture. An extractor groove or rim, turned in
the head of the cartridge case, provides a means of removing the case
from the chamber of the weapon. Shotgun shell and other cartridges
are manufactured with a rim at the cartridge case head to facilitate ex­
traction of the fired cartridge from the weapon.
41. Types
Small arms cartridges are classified according to type as follows:

Service Special
Ball. Blank.
Ball, hornet. Dummy.
Armor-piercing. High-pressure test.
Armor-piercing-incendiary. Frangible.
Armor-piercing-incendiary-i Gallery practice.
High-explosive-incendiary. Subcaliber.
Incendiary. Grenade.
Tracer.

78
BULLET BALL CAL. 50 M2

BULLET. ARMOR-PIERCING CAL .50. M2

ALUMINUM "

BULLET ARMOR-PIERCING-INCENDIARY CAL

A -

D I
G-

BULLET. ARMOR-PIERCING-INCENDIARY-TRACER CAL. .50. M20

LIGHT blue
A ■ 1__J
) 1 I
L \
F
BULLET INCENDIARY. CAL. .50 M1

A----- -

K ■
'F
BULLET. INCENDIARY, CAL. .50, M23
A..GILDING ME1 AL JACKET G IGL
B STEEL CORE H..TIG
C "LEAD-aNTImONY POM' FLIER J
D hardened alloy steel core K SGI
E leao-antimony base filler m
F INCENDIARY MIXTURE L "LEA

Figure 38. Caliber .50 bullets—sectioned.

f I ;

n 0 o io >
*7
■

BULLET, TRACER, CAL. .50, Ml

[Link]

BULLET, TRACER, CAL .50, MIO

1
»
■

f*-RED'

BULLET, TRACER, HEADLIGHT, CAL. .50, M21 "■J-

AMGNITER composition
B-SUB-IGNITER composition
C-TRACER COMPOSITION
D-LEAD-ANTIMONY SLUG
E-GILDING METAL JACKET
F-GILDING METAL CLAD STEEL JACKET
G-GILDING METAL CLOSURE RAPD 108640A

Figure 39. Caliber .50 bullets—sectioned.

80
Figure 40. Caliber .22 hornet ball cartridge.

42. Ball
This type of cartridge, intended for use against personnel and light
materiel targets, is the oldest service type. It has been replaced for com­
bat purposes, however, by armor-piercing and other types. The term
;‘ball,” which long since ceased accurately to describe the shape of the
modern bullet, has been continued in use to designate that type of bullet
and ammunition used for the same purposes as ammunition of very early
design, the bullet of which was actually a ball.

43. Ball, Hornet

This type of cartridge (fig. 40) is authorized for use in the caliber .22
survival rifle M4 and in the upper barrel of the caliber .22/.410 gage sur­
vival rifle-shotgun M6 and is designed for shooting game for food pur­
poses. It has the conventional 45-grain full-jacketed bullet. See para­
graph 59 for information on the .410-gage shotgun shell.

44. Armor-Piercing
This type of cartridge is intended for use against armored aircraft and
vehicles, concrete shelters, and similar bullet-resisting targets. The bul­
let has a hardened steel-alloy core. In addition, it may have a base
filler and a point filler of a softer metal.
45. Armor-Piercing-Incendiary
This type of cartridge is used in caliber .30, .50, and .60 weapons as a
single combination cartridge in lieu of the separate armor-piercing and
incendiary cartridges.
46. Armor-Piercing-Incendiary-Tracer
This type of cartridge combines the features of armor-piercing, incen­
diary, and tracer cartridges and is intended to replace these cartridges.
47. High-Explosive-Incendiary

This type cartridge contains an incendiary composition as the bullet

point filler that ignites upon impact with the target; the impact also ini­
tiates action of the high explosive.
48. Incendiary

1 his type of cartridge is similar to ball or armor-piercing ammunition

408374 0 -56 -6 81
in outward appearance. It is used for incendiary purposes against air­
craft. It contains an incendiary composition, as a central bullet core or
as a point filler, that ignites on impact with the target.
49. Tracer
This type of cartridge is intended for use with other types to show the
gunner, by its trace, the path of the bullets, thus assisting in correcting
aim. It may also be used for incendiary purposes. The tracer element
consists of a pressed flammable composition in the base of the bullet; this
composition is ignited by the propellant when the cartridge is fired.
50. Blank
This type of cartridge is distinguished by the absence of a bullet. It is
used for simulated fire, in maneuvers, and in firing salutes. It is also
used in machine guns equipped with blank firing attachments in order to
operate these weapons for instructional purposes. EC blank fire propel­
lant is used to produce the noise.
51. Dummy
This type of cartridge is used for practice in loading weapons, to detect
flinching of personnel in firing weapons, and to simulate firing. The
cartridge case of older lots of dummy ammunition is tin-coated but the
current method of identification is by means of holes through the side of
the case and by the empty primer pocket. The ammunition is com­
pletely inert but simulates service ammunition in sufficient detail to meet
drill requirements.
52. High-Pressure Test
This type of ammunition is manufactured to produce pressures sub­
stantially in excess of the specification pressures of the corresponding
service items. It is used for proof-firing of weapons at place of manu­
facture, test, and repair. Due to the excessive pressures developed by
this type of ammunition and the consequent danger involved in firing,
the weapons under test are fired only by authorized personnel from fixed
rests under hoods by means of mechanical firing devices.
53. Frangible
This type of cartridge is for use in machinegun trainers, caliber .30,
T9 and T9E3. It is also used in caliber .30 tank machineguns, firing
single shot, for training in tank gunnery. At its normal velocity, the
bullet, which is composed of powdered lead and bakelite will completely
disintegrate upon striking a 3/i6-inch duralumin plate at 25 yards from
the muzzle of the gun.
54. Gallery Practice
The cartridge used for this purpose is the caliber .22 long rifle car­
82
tridge (lead bullet) (fig. 28), which is the rimfire cartridge of commercial
trade.
55. Subcaliber
Ball cartridge, caliber .22, long rifle (lead bullet) (fig.;28), is used in
the caliber .22 interior mount subcaliber rifle M2A1 to subcaliber the
57-mm gun Ml. Ball cartridge, caliber .30, M2 (fig. 29), is used in the
caliber .30 interior mount subcaliber rifle M1903A2 to subcaliber the 57-
mm gun Ml. Ball cartridge, caliber .50, M2 (fig. 31), is used in heavy
barrel caliber .50 machine gun M2 (flex) on exterior subcaliber mount to
subcaliber the 76-mm gun of the Ml series and the 90-mm gun M3 (see
TM 9 1901).

56. Grenade
Grenade cartridges (fig. 30) are special blank cartridges for use in pro­
pelling grenades and ground signals from launchers attached to rifles or
carbines. Rifle grenade cartridges and carbine grenade cartridges are
distinguished by a rose-petal crimp at the mouth of the case. The car­
bine grenade cartridge is no longer used by the Army for launching
grenades but is authorized for blank fire for training purposes. For in­
formation pertaining to grenades, see paragraphs 64 through 70.

RAPD 108644A

Figure 41. Caliber .32 ball cartridge.

Figure 42. 9-mm ball cartridge.

83
CARTRIDGE, BALL, AUTOMATIC PISTOL, CAL. .380,
95-GRAIN BULLET (9-MM SHORT)

CARTRIDGE, BALL, CAL. .38, SUPER AUTOMATIC COLT,

130-GRAIN BULLET, METAL JACKET

CARTRIDGE, BALL, REVOLVER, CAL. .38, SHORT COLT,

125- OR 130-GRAIN BULLET

CARTRIDGE, BALL, REVOLVER, CAL. .38, S&W,

146-GRAIN BULLET

RA PD W8645

Figure 43. Caliber .38 cartridges.

84
CARTRIDGE, BALL, REVOLVER, CAL. .38, SPECIAL, 158-GRAIN BULLET

CARTRIDGE, BALL, REVOLVER, CAL. .38, SPECIAL, 158-GRAIN BULLET,

STEEL JACKET (COPPER PLATED)

1.53
*—N)CKEL-PLATED—
•v- " -

CARTRIDGE, BALL, REVOLVER, CAL. .38, SPECIAL, 200-GRAIN BULLET,

NICKELED CARTRIDGE CASE ("SUPER-POLICE") •

CARTRIDGE, BALL, REVOLVER, CAL. .38, SPECIAL, MID-RANGE,

146-GRAIN BULLET (WAD-CUTTER)

CARTRIDGE, TRACER, REVOLVER, CAL. .38, SPECIAL,

158-GRAIN BULLET, STEEL JACKET

H----------- 1.16

l-.______ __________ , t
B
CARTRIDGE, BLANK, REVOLVER, CAL. .38, SPECIAL

CARTRIDGE, TEST, HIGH-PRESSURE, REVOLVER, CAL. .38, SPECIAL,

158-GRAIN BULLET
RAPD 108646

Figure 44. Caliber .38 special cartridges.

85
Figure 45. Cartridge, blank, cal .45, M32, line-throwing (Navy).

Figure 46. Metallic belt links: A—caliber .30 Ml; B—caliber .50 A12; and C—caliber .50 M9.

57. Miscellaneous Small Arms Cartridges

These cartridges (figs. 41-45) consist of various types and calibers used
for special or auxiliary purposes. They include: caliber .32 cartridges
for use in pistols and revolvers; 9-mm cartridge for use in submachine
86
gun; caliber .38 cartridges for use in automatic pistols and revolvers; cali­
ber .38 special cartridges for use in special revolvers; and caliber .45
blank line-throwing cartridge for use with a special projectile attached to
a standard line in the Navy line-throwing gun.

58. Links, Belts, and Clips

Metallic belt links (figs. 46-48) are used with calibers .30 and .50
cartridges in machineguns. The links are made of steel, processed for

0.506 MAX

Figure 47. Section of metallic link belt of caliber .30 cartridges.

87
RA PD 61 184C

Figure 48. Section of metallic link belt of caliber .50 cartridges.

Figure 49. Metallic belt end-caliber .30 Ml.

88
j
4V

RAPD 6903OBI

RA PD 69032B

Figure ol. Caliber .30 cartridges in 5-round clip.

89
Figure 52. Caliber .30 cartridges in 8-round clip.

rust prevention, and are required to meet specific test requirements, to

assure satisfactory ammunition feed and functioning under all service
conditions. A metallic belt end (fig. 49) is attached to metallic link belts
of caliber .30 cartridges packed in metal boxes for ground machinegun
use. The belt end facilitates starting the belt of cartridges through the
gun. A belt end is also required for certain aircraft gun installations.
For information on metallic belt link linking and delinking machines, see
90
LOADtD

UNLOADED RA PD 45153

Figure 53. Caliber .45 cartridges in revolver clip.

TM 9-2200. Web belts (fig. 50) of cotton fabric are used in caliber .30
machineguns. Clips (figs. 51-53) are provided for caliber .30 cartridges;
the 5-round clip for rifles M1903 and M1917, the 8-round clip (nonex­
pendable in peacetime) for the rifle Ml, the 10-round clip for the caliber
.30 carbine, and the 3-round clip for the caliber .45 revolver.
59. Shotgun Shell
Shotgun shell (shot shell) of appropriate loads are procured commer­
cially for use in shotguns of various gages (figs. 54-59). The .410-gage
aluminum shotgun shell (fig. 60) is used in the .22/.410 gage survival
rifle-shotgun M6 (par. 43).
60. Grades and Lots
a. Current grades of existing lots of small arms ammunition are estab­
lished by the Chief of Ordnance, in accordance with acceptance and sur­
veillance tests, and are published in TB 9-AMM 4. The small arms
ammunition lot numbers are on all packing boxes containing carton-
packed cartridges and on the cartons. Repacked lot numbers are printed
on the repacked lot reference data card. Grade 3 indicates unservice­
able ammunition, which will not be issued or used.
b. Small arms ammunition that has been graded “For Training Use
Only” will not be used in demonstrations or on training courses requir-
ing this ammunition to be fired over the heads of participating troops.

91
SHELL, SHOTGUN, ALL BRASS, 12-GAGE, NO. 00 BUCK, M19

2.3 APPROX.

SHELL, SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, PAPER,

LOADED WITH SMOKELESS POWDER AND #00 BUCKSHOT

SHELL, SHOTGUN. 12-GAGE, PAPER,

LOADED WITH SMOKELESS POWDER AND #7-1/2 CHILLED SHOT

SHELL, SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, PAPER,

LOADED WITH SMOKELESS POWDER, #8 CHILLED SHOT, AND TRACER ;
RAPD 230800-

Figure 54. 12-gage shotgun shell.

Only those small arms ammunition lots that have been specifically desig­
nated for such use by the Chief of Ordnance will be issued for and used
in infiltration course firing. When available, these specific lots will also
be used in other combat firing training courses.
61. Care and Precautions in Handling
a. Care of Containers. Small arms ammunition is comparatively safe to
handle. However, care must be taken to prevent ammunition boxes
92
RA PD 49594B

Figure 55. 12-gage paper shotgun shell—sectioned.

----------------------- 2515

RA PD I08641A

Figure 56. 12-gage brass shotgun shell—sectioned.

Figure 57. 16-gage shotgun shell.

■248 ...... I

Figure 58. 20-gage shotgun shell.

93
2.86

MARKED ON REVERSE SIDE: "FOR 3 INCH CHAMBER ONLY"

RA PD 64463

Figure 59. .410-gage paper shotgun shell.

RA PD 131054

Figure 60. ,410-gage aluminum shotgun shell.

from becoming broken or damaged. Broken boxes must be repaired im­

mediately and careful attention given to the transfer of all markings to
the new parts of the box. Metal liners and metal cans should be sealed
and air-tested if equipment for this work is available.
b. Preservation of Packings. Ammunition boxes will not be opened until
the ammunition is required for use, because ammunition from airtight
containers, particularly in damp climates, may corrode and become
unserviceable.
c. Marking Opened Packings. When cartridges are taken from their
original packings for loading into clips or machinegun belts, the belts or
clips should be tagged or marked so as to preserve the ammunition lot
number, thereby preventing the ammunition from falling into grade 3
through loss of this means (lot number) of identification.
d. Keeping Cartridges Clean. Cartridges should be carefully protected
from mud, sand, dirt, and water. If they get wet or dirty, they should
be wiped off at once. If light corrosion or verdigris forms on cartridges,
they should be wiped off. However, cartridges should not be polished
merely to make them look brighter or better.
e. Protection of Ammunition. The primer of a cartridge should be pro­
tected from blows by sharp instruments, as such a blow might explode
the cartridge. Ammunition should not be exposed to excessive heat or
the direct rays of the sun for any considerable length of time. Such ex­
posure is likely to affect the firing qualities of cartridges.
f. Use of Oil or Grease. The use of oil or grease on cartridges is danger­
ous and is prohibited. Oil or grease might cause injurious abrasives to
collect in automatic weapons and produce excessive and hazardous pres­
sures when fired.
94
62. Precautions in Firing
a. Misfires and Hangfires.
(1) In blank firing. Misfires in which the primer explodes but fails to
ignite the powder charge have proved dangerous in firing, as
some of the unburned propellant is blown into the bore of the
weapon. A series of such rounds will cause an accumulation of
powder sufficient to result in serious damage when ignited by a
normal cartridge. When misfires in excess of 5 percent occur
in firing blank cartridges, the firing of that lot of ammunition
will be suspended and reported to the Chief of Ordnance.
(2) Suspension. When excessive misfires or hangfires that are not at­
tributable to defects of the weapon occur in any lot, its use
should be suspended and a report should be made as prescribed
in SR 700-45-6. The ammunition lot thus affected will be
withdrawn and replaced by serviceable ammunition, as pre­
scribed in AR 385-63.
b. Identification. No small arms ammunition will be fired until it has
been identified as to type, lot number, and current grade. Since differ­
ent types of small arms ammunition are of similar appearance, the kind
of ammunition being issued will be strictly checked from the markings on
the packing.
c. Inspection of Bore. Before firing, be sure that the bore of the weapon
is free of any foreign matter such as cleaning patches, mud, sand, snow,
etc. Firing a weapon with any obstruction in the bore will result in
damage to the weapon and may result in injury to the firer.
d. Lodged Bullets. When a bullet lodges in the bore of a rifle, pistol, or
machinegun, it should be removed by the application of pressure from
the muzzle end of the weapon.
Warning: To attempt to shoot the bullet out with another cartridge is
extremely dangerous and therefore prohibited.
e. Defective Rounds. Badly dented cartridges that fail to chamber,
cartridges with loose bullets, or otherwise defective rounds should not be
fired.
f. Armor-Piercing Cartridges. The use of armor-piercing cartridges is
prohibited in demonstrations in which tanks take part. When using
armor-piercing ammunition, the cores of bullets that fail to penetrate will
rebound. The radius of rebound depends on several factors but may be
estimated as a maximum of 100 yards for caliber .30 and 200 yards for
caliber .50 armor-piercing cartridges.
g. Firing Blank Cartridges. Blank cartridges should not be fired at a
representative enemy at distances less than 20 yards, as the wad or paper
cup may fail to break up. The intact wad or paper cup and/or un­
burned propellant grains may cause injury within this distance. Before
firing, blank cartridges should be visually inspected for evidence of any
foreign matter within the cartridge case mouth. Any foreign matter
therein would be expelled as a projectile in firing.
95
Figure 61. Packing symbols—small arms ammunition in M1917 box.

96
Figure 62. Caliber .30 cartridges in 5-round clips, in bandoleers, in metal can M8, and in box M9.

■>08374 0 -56 -7
97
RA PD 108210

Figure 63. Caliber .30 cartridges, linked, in cartons, in metal can M8, and in box M9.

98
h. Report of Malfunction. Any malfunction of ammunition must be re­
ported promptly to the technical service representative under whose su­
pervision the ammunition for the unit involved is maintained and issued.
As provided in SR 700-45-6, the technical service representative will re­
port such malfunction to the head of the appropriate technical service.
It is important, therefore, that all evidence be preserved. This includes
the cartridge case, other cartridges from the same box, the weapon con­
cerned, and all recoverable pieces—in short, everything that might deter­
mine the cause of the malfunction.
63. Packing and Marking
a. Packing. Dependent on its intended use, small arms ammunition is
packed in link or web belts, in clips in bandoleers, or in cartons. For
detailed descriptions of the wide variety of small arms ammunition pack­
ings and packing materials, see Department of the Army Supply Manual
ORD 3 standard nomenclature lists (SNL) of the T group.
b. Marking.
(1) Small arms packing boxes may be either stained brown with
marking in yellow or unstained with marking in black. Metal
boxes with replaceable covers, which are usually packed in
wirebound boxes, are painted olive drab.
(2) Instead of the lot number, a functional (repacked) lot number
may be stenciled, on packing boxes containing web belts and
metallic link belts; the serial number of the functional (repacked)

Figure 64. Caliber .50 cartridges in metal ammunition box M2, in wirebound wooden box — outer
box opened.

99
METAL CAN, Ml 3

is c*«-nsiuc8S ; 1
RIFLE grena < /
ChiJbER 30 M3
LOT f. A. 186 J

t> CABTISIOSES'
Oeww CARBIN

J
/ -.30 M6

CARTRIDGES
^wwmmsriw w j g
■_wwwtt n»,A'r CARTONS,
WRAPPED CARTONS W/O WRAPPING RAPD iO861OA

Figure 65. Grenade cartridge assortment in metal can M13.

lot number is preceded by the letter B for belted ammunition

and L for linked cartridges.
(3) To provide a further means of quickly identifying type of pack­
ing, stenciled silhouettes are used on boxes and crates contain­
ing clipped, belted, and linked cartridges. These silhouettes
indicate whether the ammunition is packed in rifle clips, web
belts, or metallic link belts. The silhouettes are vertical for
caliber .30 cartridges and diagonal for caliber .50 cartridges.

100
figure 66. 12-gage paper shotgun shell in cartons, in metal can MIO, and in box M15.

101
The absence of stenciled silhouettes on boxes may indicate car-
ton-packed ammunition.
(4) The expendable metal ammunition boxes M1A1, M2, M2A1,
M19, and M19A1 are painted olive drab with marking in yel­
low or white.
(5) Examples of representative packings and markings are shown in
figures 61 through 66. For detailed coverage of packings and
markings, see TM 9-1990.

Section II. GRENADES

64. General
A grenade is a small (approx. 1 to 1V2 lb.) missile filled with high ex­
plosive or chemical intended for projection against enemy personnel or
materiel at relatively short ranges. The two types are hand grenades
and rifle grenades. The hand grenade is thrown by hand in a prescribed
manner and the rifle grenade is projected by a special blank cartridge
from a caliber .30 rifle equipped with a grenade launcher. The hand
grenade is used to supplement small arms for effect against an enemy in
close combat and for a screening smoke. The rifle grenade is for use
against enemy tanks and for screening and signaling smokes, covering
the range between the maximum for hand grenades and the minimum
for mortar shell. Service hand and rifle grenades are filled with high-
explosive, chemical, or smoke-producing composition. Practice hand
grenades contain a small black powder spotting charge. Practice rifle
grenades are completely inert. Inert hand grenades are used for training
in handling. Grenades are classified according to filler as high-explosive,
chemical, practice, or inert. Grenades are identified by the painting and
marking on the item (figs. 2 and 3) and on the containers. Service frag­
mentation hand grenades are painted olive drab with yellow marking;
offensive hand grenades are painted black with black marking on a yel­
low sealing strip; illuminating hand grenades are unpainted with black
marking. Service HE, AT rifle grenades are painted olive drab with
marking in yellow; smoke rifle grenades are painted gray with yellow
marking; and illuminating rifle grenades are unpainted with gray sealing
tape and black marking. Practice hand grenades are painted blue.
Practice rifle grenades are painted black with marking in white because
they are completely inert. Training hand grenades (also inert) are
painted black with marking in white. Simulator hand grenades are
painted gray with black markings on a white label. Where practicable,
inerted items are drilled in conspicuous places, the holes being about Vi-
inch diameter, in order to indicate unmistakably the absence of explosive
(see SR 385-410-1). For complete information on grenades including
tactical employment, see FM 23-30.
102
65. Hand Grenades
a. General. The three general types of hand grenades are service, prac­
tice and training, and simulator. Service hand grenades are classified
according to use as fragmentation, offensive, or chemical (burning or
bursting). The chemical grenades described herein are issued by the
Chemical Corps. Practice hand grenades and “simulated” or “simu­
lator” hand grenades are designed to simulate the fragmentation-type
service hand grenades. Fuzes used in explosive grenades are of the M6
series, M204 series, or M206 series “delay-detonating ” types. Fuzes used
with burning-type chemical grenades are of the M201 “igniting” type
and fuzes used with the bursting-type chemical grenades are of the M6
series or M206 series “delay-detonating” type. Fuzes used with practice
and training grenades are of the MIO series and M205 series “time”
types. Fuzes for the hand grenade simulator or the “simulated hand
grenade” consist of a piece of safety fuse and fuse lighter. All hand
grenades are issued fuzed or “complete” except the offensive hand gre­
nade, which is issued unfuzed.
b. Fragmentation. A typical fragmentation hand grenade is GRENADE,
hand, fragmentation, M26 (T38E1) (fig. 67). This is an improved type
that consists of a thin metal body, approximately the size and shape of a
lemon, lined with a wire-wound coil, and replaces the older type (Mk 2)
cast iron body. The M26 body is approximately 2’4 inches in diameter

t' igure 67. Grenade, hand, fragmentation, M26 ( T38E1) fuzed with fuze M204A1 or ivi7fr4A2.

103
at the center and 3 inches long; 3.9 inches long including fuze. The ex­
plosive charge consists of composition B. This grenade is shipped fuzed
with detonating fuze M204A1 or M204A2, which has a striker, primer,
delay charge, and detonator. This fuze is of the “silent” type, which

GRENADE PARTS FUZE PARTS

FRAGMENTATION GRENADE, MK 2 PRACTICE GRENADE, M2)

A B

FUZE PARTS
GRENaOE PARTS -

TNT CHARGE

FIRST
& T COMPOSITION
CHEMIC
i I CHAP

GAS PORT

| BODY-

OFFENSIVE GRENADE
MK 3A2 UNFUZED CHEMICAL GRENADE
C D
HAND GRENADES—CROSS-SECTIONED RAPO 893401

Figure 68. Comparison of hand grenade types.

104
means only that the delay charge burns silently. The safety lever, which
is curved to conform to the shape of the grenade body, is hooked to the
top of the fuze and held in place by a safety pin, which holds the striker
against the action of a spring. The complete assembly weighs 1 pound.
.After grasping the grenade and safety lever, in the manner prescribed in
FM 23-30, the safety pin is pulled out with the free hand just prior to
throwing the grenade with the throwing hand. When the grenade is
thrown, the striker under the force of the spring pushes the safety lever
free of the fuze and strikes the primer. The primer ignites the delay
charge which, after a 4- to 5-second delay, explodes the detonator and
the bursting charge thereby fragmenting the grenade body. Since frag­
ments may be projected over 200 yards, fragmentation grenades will not
be used in training without adequate cover. An older type grenade, the
Mk 2 (A, fig. 68), which has a cast iron serrated body, operates in a simi­
lar manner and is also fuzed with M204A1 or M204A2 fuze. Fragmen­
tation hand grenades are painted olive drab with a band at the neck
near the fuze and marking in yellow.
c. Offensive. The offensive hand grenade Mk 3A2 (C, fig. 68) is about
the same size as the fragmentation hand grenade but is cylindrical in
shape. It is used with the “silent” type fuze M206A2. This grenade,
which is shipped unfuzed, contains about one-half pound of TNT and is
therefore used as a blasting or demolition agent. Since fragments may
be projected over 200 yards, offensive grenades will not be used in train­
ing without adequate cover.
d. Chemical.
(1) Burning type. This type grenade (D, fig. 68) consists of a cylin­
drical steel container (approx. 2% diam. x 4% Ig.) filled with
a burning-type munition and fitted with an igniting-type fuze,
usually the 2-second delay M201 (w/lg. or short safety lever
depending upon the type), which is somewhat similar to deto­
nating-type M206A1 except that it has an igniter instead of a
detonator. Chemical grenades, depending upon the purpose
for which they are employed, contain fillers as follows: the CN-
DM irritant gas M6 consisting of tear gas, vomiting gas, and
smokeless powder, burning 90 seconds, used to control disturb­
ances; the CN tear gas M7 series, burning 30 to 60 seconds,
also used to control disturbance; the white smoke (HC) AN-
MS, burning 2 minutes, and colored (green, red, violet, and
yellow) smokes Ml8, burning 1 to 2 minutes, used for screen­
ing and signaling; the incendiary thermite (TH) AN-M14,
burning 30 seconds at 4,300° F., used to set fire to enemy mate­
riel; and the illuminating Mk 1 (fig. 69), burning 25 seconds at
55,000 candlepower, used to illuminate terrain in night opera­
tions. (Violet smoke is used only for demonstration or train­
ing.) There is also a CN riot grenade M25A1 ((2) below) that,
although functioning as a bursting-type, acts as a burning-type.
105
s&k i
QUICKMATCH

QUICKMATCH
BUSHING

^QUICKMATCH

SAFETY/
LEVER/
-FIRST FIRE
/COMPOSITION

ILLUMINATING/ 167596
CHARGE/

Figure 69. Illuminating hand grenade Mk 1.

(2) Bursting type. The two bursting-type grenades are the white
phosphorus M15 and the CN riot grenade M25A1. The M15
consists of a cylindrical steel contain^- filled with about one-half
pound of white phosphorus. This grenade may be fuzed either
with the “silent-type” fuze M206A2 or with the fuze M6A4D.
These fuzes have the 4- to 5-second delay also. This grenade
has a tetryl burster that is designed to rupture the grenade
i body and disperse white phosphorus filler in the form of small
particles, which ignite spontaneously on contact with the air
and form a dense white smoke. This grenade is a combat
.: weapon used to lay a smoke screen. The CN riot grenade M25
■ series consists of a 3-inch spherical plastic container filled with
' , CN gas. This grenade is fitted with a detonating-type fuze
that has a 2-second delay fuse and a detonator that is designed
to burst the grenade body releasing the gas.
e. Practice, Training, and Simulator Types. These types simulate the serv­
ice types. The practice grenade (B, fig. 68) contains a small black pow-
IP6
SAFETY PIN

Figure 70. Simulator, hand grenade, M116 (T79).

der spotting charge and is painted blue in accordance with the conven­
tional color scheme for practice ammunition; it is used for practice in
throwing. The training grenade, which is completely inert, is painted
black in accordance with the color scheme and is used only for training
in handling preparatory to throwing. “Practice” models are—the M21
which is fuzed with the fuze M205A2, or the older fuze M10A3, both of
which are fitted with a time fuse; the Mk 2A1, which is fitted with fuze
M10A3; and the M30 (T39), which simulates the service grenade M26
(b above). The “training” model Mk 1A1, formerly designated
“dummy,” is completely inert and simulates the service grenade Mk 2
(A, fig. 68). The “simulator” types are—the hand grenade simulator
Ml 16 (T79) (fig. 70), which consists of a closed cylindrical paper tube
containing an ounce of photoflash powder, a short piece of safety fuse,
and a fuse lighter, for simulating the functioning of a hand grenade (see
TM 9-1981); and the GRENADE, hand, simulated, an older type.
66. Rifle Grenades

а. General. The several types of rifle grenades are fragmentation;

antitank; chemical; and practice and training. Rifle grenades are pro­
jected by caliber .30 rifles equipped with grenade launchers and are au­
thorized for use only with special grenade cartridges (g below). Rifle
grenades were formerly also authorized for use with carbines.
б. Fragmentation. There is no fragmentation rifle grenade designed as
such. However, a fragmentation hand grenade, either the M26 or the
Mk 2 (par. 65), fitted with ADAPTER, grenade-projection, M1A1 or
M1A2 (par. 67), constitutes a fragmentation rifle grenade.
107
Figure 71. Grenade, rifle, HE, AT, A128 and grenade, rifle, practice, M29.

108
U__________________________________ _
— 9.65 i N •

RAPD 167591

Figure 72. Grenade, rifle, illuminating, M27 (T45).

c. Antitank. This type grenade is designed for use against tanks and
armored vehicles. The high-explosive antitank (HE, AT) rifle grenade
M28 (T41E1) (fig. 71) consists of a body assembly, stabilizer, and fin
assembly. The body contains about 12 ounces of high explosive in the
form of a shaped'charge and a base detonator. A point-initiating fuze
is attached to the nose of the grenade. Upon impact, this fuze, which
has a small shaped charge, initiates the base detonator, which, in turn,
explodes the main charge. At 0 degree obliquity, that is at right angles,
the jet from this grenade will penetrate upwards of 8 inches of armor
plate and is effective up to 65 degrees obliquity. The new type high-
explosive antitank rifle grenade M31 (T37E4) is similar to the M28.
d. Chemical-Burning Type. There are two types of burning rifle grenades,
the illuminating and the smoke. The illuminating rifle grenade M27
(T45) (fig. 72) consists of a cylindrical body and a stabilizer assembly.
The body contains one-half pound of illuminant, a base igniting fuze,
and a quickmatch. Upon impact, the illuminant burns for 55 seconds
with 80,000 candlepower, illuminating an area 240 yards in diameter.
Colored smoke grenades are the green, red, violet, and yellow signaling
smokes of the M22 series and the orange (nonstandard) smoke T8E1.
Colored smoke streamer grenades of the M23 series are the same color
smokes as the M22 series. Colored smoke grenades (fig. 3), which are
used for signaling, begin to burn upon impact and burn for 45 seconds.
Colored smoke streamer grenades, which are also used for signaling, emit
a stream of smoke for about 12 seconds, beginning at 50 feet from the
muzzle of the rifle. (Violet smoke is used only for demonstration or
training).
e. Chemical-Bursting Type. Rifle grenade M19A1 (fig. 3) is the rifle
counterpart of the hand grenade M15 (par. 65). The M19A1 has a
stabilizer and fin assembly. It contains 8V2 ounces of white phosphorus
and is equipped with a burster that is actuated by a base detonating fuze
on impact. White phosphorus grenades, both hand and rifle, are used
to lay down screening smokes.
109
CARTRIDGE, GRENADE, CARBINE, CAL. .30, M6

CARTRIDGE, RIFLE GRENADE, CAL. .30, M3

RA PD 68318D

Figure 73. Rifle grenade cartridges.

f. Practice and Training Types. The two models of practice rifle grenades
are the Mil series and the M29. The practice M11A4 (fig. 3), which
is the latest model of the Mil series, is used in training. In flight, it
simulates the action of a high-explosive antitank grenade. As the Ml 1A4
is completely inert, it is painted black, and since it is intended to be used
repeatedly, it is issued with replacement fins and ogives. The M29 (fig.
71), which simulates the flight of the M28 (c above), is also inert and is
painted black.
g. Grenade Cartridges. These cartridges are especially designed car­
tridges for use in projecting rifle grenades from caliber .30 rifles equipped
with rifle grenade launchers. The two types of rifle grenade cartridges
now in use (fig. 73) are—CARTRIDGE, rifle grenade, caliber .30, M3,
which is a special blank cartridge with a rose-petal crimped wad-end,
used in the chamber of the caliber .30 rifle for projecting a rifle grenade
for normal ranges; and CARTRIDGE, grenade, carbine, caliber .30,
M6, which is a special blank cartridge with a rose-petal crimped wad­
end, used in the chamber of the caliber .30 carbine for projecting ground
signals (rifle grenades are no longer projected from carbines') and for blank fire
training purposes. Ground signals may be fired from rifles equipped with
rifle grenade launchers and using rifle grenade cartridge M3 only.
Caution: No blank cartridges other than those prescribed above will be
used for firing grenades or ground signals. No bulleted cartridge will
ever be used in a rifle projecting rifle grenade or ground signal or in a
carbine projecting ground signal (rifle grenades are no longer authorized
for projection from carbines.). Firing instructions and methods of use of
grenade launchers are given in FM 23-30. Complete technical informa­
tion on grenade cartridges is given in TM 9-1990.
67. Adapters and Clip
a. Fragmentation Grenade-Projection Adapter. ADAPTER, grenade-pro-
110
jection, M1A2, the current standard model, consists of a stabilizer and
fin assembly. Three spring-steel claws, adjusted so that they will grip
the grenade body, are attached to the fin assembly. An arming clip is
assembled to the longest claw. When the grenade is placed in the
adapter, the safety lever of the grenade is inserted in the arming clip to
hold the lever in place until the grenade is fired. Upon firing, the arm­
ing clip moves to the rear under the force of setback and the safety lever
is thereby released, initiating the fuze. Hand grenades that are author­
ized for rifle projection in adapters of the Ml series are: the fragmenta­
tion hand grenade M26, fragmentation hand grenade Mk 2, illuminating
hand grenade Mk 1, and practice grenade M21.
b. Chemical Grenade-Projection Adapter. ADAPTER, grenade-projection,
chemical, M2A1, the current standard model (fig. 74), consists of a sta­
bilizer and fin assembly. A separate setback band assembly is used with
this adapter. At the front end of the stabilizer tube is a base plate and
a 3-pronged clip to grip the base of the grenade. The metal setback
band fits around the grenade, over the grenade safety lever. When the
grenade is fired from a rifle, the setback band moves to the rear, thereby
releasing the safety lever and initiating the fuze. Earlier models of this
adapter differ only in method of assembly of the stabilizer tube to the
plug that holds the clip and base plate. Hand grenades that are author­
ized for rifle projection in adapters of the M2 series are the chemical
grenades mentioned in paragraph 6.W except the illuminating grenade
Mk 1.
c. Clip, Launcher, Positioning. This is a 5/i«-inch steel strip bent to fit
around the rifle grenade launcher. It may be moved to various num­
bered positions on the launcher to aid in the uniform and rapid position­
ing of a number of grenades to be fired from the same position on the
launcher. Positioning clips are packed in the box with service rifle gre­
nades and adapters (both Ml and M2 series).

68. Care and Precautions in Handling

Due consideration should be given to the observance of general pre­
cautions in use of ammunition, which will be found in chapter 1, and
appropriate safety precautions in handling grenades, which will be found
in TM 9-1903 (see also TM 3-300 and FM 23-30). Representative
precautions pertaining to grenades are described in a and b below.
a. Hand grenades must not be lifted or handled by the pull ring that
is attached to the safety pin of the fuze. The safety pin will be removed
just before throwing or just before launching if the hand grenade is fitted
to a grenade-projection adapter and at no other time. 'Once a hand gre­
nade has been inserted into a grenade-projection adapter, it must not be
removed without first reinserting the safety pin. Offensive hand gre­
nades, which are shipped unfuzed, will be fuzed in quantities sufficient
only for anticipated current needs, because if fuzed offensive hand gre­
nades should accidentally detonate en masse they might cause the deto­
nation of nearby ammunition.
b. Rifle grenades must not be lifted or handled by the pull ring that is
attached to the safety pin. They must be handled with care to prevent
damage to the stabilizer assembly. A grenade should not be placed on
the launcher unless it is intended to be fired immediately. If it is not
fired, it must be rendered safe by replacing the safety pin before the gre­
nade is removed from the launcher.
69. Precautions in Firing
General safety precautions for firing hand and rifle grenades are given
in a through i below.
a. The safety pin will not be removed until just before throwing or
launching the grenade.
b. After the safety pin is removed from a hand grenade, the safety lever
will be held firmly in place, as prescribed in FM 23-30, until the grenade
is thrown, tossed, or placed in position.
c. Silent-type fuzes (identified by a T-lug, which protrudes from the
top of the fuze through a slot in the safety lever) may be used in frag­
mentation, offensive, and white phosphorus hand grenades. Under no
conditions, therefore, will the thrower consider the grenade a dud because
no noise, smoke, or sparks are observed upon release of the safety lever.
d. Occasionally, chemical grenades may flash. Hence, when used in
maneuvers, they will be so thrown as to function not less than 30 feet
from personnel.
112
I

408374 0 -56 -8
igure 75. Typical packing o f hand grenades.

113
e. Since fragments may be projected over 200 yards, fragmentation
grenades will not be used in training without adequate cover.
f. Rifle grenades with cracked or distorted stabilizer assemblies will not
be used.
g. The appropriate rifle and prescribed combination of launcher and
cartridge must be used to launch hand grenades fitted with adapters or
to launch rifle grenades.
h. Rifle grenades or adapted hand grenades must never be launched
with any cartridges other than the special blank grenade cartridges pro­
vided for that purpose. Do not use a bulleted cartridge to project a gre­
nade or a ground signal from a launcher under any circumstances.
i. Detailed information concerning safety precautions to be observed
in firing grenades will be found in AR 385-63, TM 3-300, and FM 23-
30. Duds will be disposed of in accordance with the provisions of TM
9-1903.

70. Packing and Marking

Grenades are usually packed as fuzed complete rounds, each in an
individual fiber container, in wooden boxes. Fragmentation hand gre­
nades are packed 25 containers per wooden box. The offensive hand
grenades are packed unfuzed, 24 or 50 per wooden box (fig. 75). The
standard packing for rifle grenades is 10 containers per box, with a supply
of cartridges for launching from the appropriate weapon. Jungle pack­
ing is waterproofed to withstand hot humid climates. Grenade-projec­
tion adapters are packed 48 per box, with sufficient number of various
grenade cartridges and positioning clips. Inner containers are marked
with nomenclature, lot numbers, AIC symbol, and other appropriate data.
Packing boxes are marked with nomenclature, AIC symbol, lot number,
weight, volume, and other appropriate information. The grenade
M25A1 is not marked with identifying symbols, only the container is
marked.

Section III. ARTILLERY AMMUNITION

71. General
a. Designations. Artillery ammunition is the type of ammunition de­
signed for firing from weapons that, because of their particular character­
istics, are designated as guns, howitzers, mortars, or rifles (recoilless-type).
The basic components of an item of artillery ammunition, known collec­
tively as a “round,” consist of a projectile (solid or filled w/an active
agent) and an integral or separate propelling charge (quantity of grained
solid propellant), each with means (fuze or primer) of initiating function­
ing. Rounds of artillery ammunition that are composed of a projectile
and an integral propelling charge have one basic designation for the com­
plete round, which is the term “cartridge” or the older terminology of “pro-
114
Figure 76. Types of complete rounds of artillery ammunition.

115
jectile,” “shell,” or “shot” and the qualifying adjective of “fixed” or
“semifixed.” Rounds of artillery ammunition that are composed of a
projectile and a separate propelling charge have a basic designation for the
projectile of “projectile,” “shell,” or “shot” and the basic designation for
the propelling charge of “propelling charge.” Such rounds are classified
as “separated” or “separate-loading” ammunition. Types of complete
rounds are shown in figure 76.
b. Identification. Artillery ammunition is identified by color and mark­
ing (figs. 4-9). The marking on the ammunition or container, as appro­
priate, includes: ammunition identification code (AIC) symbol; caliber
and type of weapon in which fired (e. g., 75H, 155G, etc.); type and model
of projectile (e. g., SHELL, M335, etc.); kind of shell filler (e. g., COMP
B, etc.); Weight zone markings (crosses or squares); ammunition lot num­
ber and loader’s symbol; functional marking (e. g., flshls (flashless), etc.);
range characteristics (e. g., NORMAL, etc.); and any other appropriate
information (pars. 4-13). For detailed information on artillery ammuni­
tion, see TM 9-1901. For identification of inert ammunition and
ammunition components, see paragraph 10.
72. Classification
a. Artillery ammunition is classified according to use as service, target­
practice, training, blank, dummy, or test.
b. It is classified according to type as fixed, semifixed, separated, or
separate-loading.
c. It is classified according to kind of filler as high-explosive, target-prac-

OLIVE DRAB
^MARKING IN YHLOWI

A N....... ...
..
17.60 IN MAX......... ....... ..... ~-4

OLIVE DRAB
MARKING IN YELLOW

?■................... ■ ■ .......... ... ............... —................... ■” i

A.. —...... — ... —... —.... —...... —..... 4071 IN MAX ....... .......... ..... .......
RAPD 212780

Figure 77. Types offixed ammunition.

116
tice (black powder spotting charge), illuminating, chemical (smoke or
gas), nuclear, biological, leaflet, or inert.
d. For other classifications of ammunition in general, see paragraph 5.
73. Types
Artillery ammunition is designed in several types for most efficient use
in the weapon in which it is fired.
a. Fixed Ammunition. Ammunition in which the propellant is fixed
(nonadjustable) is known as “fixed” ammunition (fig. 77). The propel­
lant is loose (or in a cloth bag or held packed by distance wadding) in a
metal cartridge case that is rigidly crimped to the projectile. A primer
is assembled into the base of the cartridge case. An item of fixed ammu­
nition is loaded into the weapon in which it is fired in one operation.
Fixed ammunition is generally used in guns and rifles (recoilless-type). In
ammunition for recoilless weapons, the cartridge case is perforated to per­
mit the escape of propellent gases into the chamber and out of nozzles in
the breech in order to counteract weapon recoil. This ammunition may
be issued fuzed or unfuzed.
b. Semifixed Ammunition. This type of ammunition (fig. 78) is charac­
terized by the adjustability of the propelling charge. The cartridge case

»W)

*-

RAPE) 212781

Figure 78. Types of semifixed ammunition.

117
is a loose fit over the projectile, so that the propellant may be accessible
for adjustment for zone firing. Like fixed ammunition, it is loaded into
the weapon in one operation. In the usual design of this type of ammu­
nition, the propellant is divided into sections, each consisting of propel­
lant in a bag. To adjust the propelling charge, the projectile is removed
from the cartridge case, the sections of increments not required are re­
moved, and the projectile is placed back into the cartridge case. As in
fixed ammunition, the primer is assembled in the base of the cartridge
case. The 105-mm howitzer HE, AT round is a special type in that the
charge is fixed, that is, nonadjustable; the cartridge case and projectile
are not crimped together in this instance because of the method of pack­
ing. Semifixed ammunition is generally used in howitzers and mortars.
This ammunition may be issued fuzed or unfuzed.
c. Separated Ammunition. In this type of ammunition (fig. 79), the pro­
pellant is sealed in a metal cartridge case into which a primer is fitted and
this assembly is called a propelling charge. It is separate from the pro­
jectile with which it is used but the projectile and the propelling charge
are loaded into the weapon in one operation. Separated ammunition is
generally used in medium caliber antiaircraft and antitank guns.
d. Separate-Loading Ammunition. Ammunition consisting of separate
components (projectile, propelling charge, and primer), which are loaded
separately into the weapon in which they are fired, is known as separate­
loading ammunition (fig. 80). Separate-loading ammunition is generally
designed for use in large caliber guns and howitzers. The large caliber
HE-filled projectiles are generally shipped with nose plugs, which are
replaced in the field with the desired type fuzes.
74. Complete Round
A complete round of service artillery ammunition comprises all of the
ammunition components used in firing a weapon once and to cause the
projectile to function at a desired time and place. The components are
the projectile, the propelling charge, the primer, the fuze, and the car­
tridge case (except w/separate loading ammunition) and are defined in
paragraphs 75 through 79. Complete rounds of the several types are
shown in figure 76.
75. Projectiles
a. General. With a few exceptions, artillery projectiles are of the same
general shape, i. e., a cylindrical body, solid or hollow, and an ogival head
(or windshield). (Canisters have blunt heads.) Types of projectiles
which vary in length from 2 to 6 calibers are shown in figures 81 through
84. The principal characteristic differences are described in (1) through
(7) below.
(1) Location of fuzes—point or base.
(2) Radius of ogive—smaller for low-velocity, larger for high-velocity
projectiles and larger with increased length of ogival section.
118
A M M U N IT IO N LO T N U M B ER ? / //C A L IB E R A N D TYPE O F CANNON

CALIBER A N D M O D E L O F C A R T R ID G E C A SE
L O T N U M B E R A N D L O A D E R 'S IN IT IA L S R A PD 65171A

119
O

OLIVE DRAB (MARKING IN YELLOW)'

•50 IN MAX....... - ——--- --- --- — --- —-- —— ---- —•

kA RD 212/SZ

Figure 80. Separate-loading ammunition.

STEEL SLUGS

I o

STILE
A~WITH EXPLOSIVE FILLER (APC)
B—ARMOR-PIERCING SHOT (AP-T)
C—HYPERVELOCITY ARMOR-PIERCING SHOT (HVAP-T) ;•
D—-C AN I S T E K RA PD 212783Ai

Figure 81. Typical armor-piercing and canister projectiles.

(3) Rotating band—narrow for low-velocity, wide for high-velocity

projectiles.
(4) Base—tapered (“boat-tailed”), cylindrical (“square”) base, hemi­
spherical, or finned.
121
HIGH-EXPLOSIVE-ANTITANK SHELL

Figure 82. 'typical high-explosive, high-explosive antitank, and chemical projectiles.

(5) Armor-piercing cap—used only with certain armor-piercing pro­

jectiles.
(6) Windshield (ballistic cap or false ogive)—when required for the
purpose of incorporating adequate ballistic properties into
design.
(7) Filler—high explosive, gas, smoke, illuminant candle and para­
chute assembly, or others.
b. Elements.
(1) Ogive and windshield. The forward portion of the projectile from

122
' '...... 1

■RAlElL PLATE

ANTI TON CHARGE

RELEASE AEtvF SOLDERED-
\ONTO CENTER WIRE
AiRINIS CHARGE E

CENTER WIRE I

IUUMINANT CHARGE '

CENTER WIRE 'TUBE

SWIVEL PIN NETT

COMPRESSION PAD

MHROUD PLATE I

Figure 83. Illuminating projectile (J'or 155-mm gun or hoivitger).

123
(ONE YELLOW BAND
/INDICATES SMOKE
(TWO GREEN BANDS INDICATE
/PERSISTENT GAS

>HT ZONE MARKING

G KIND OF FILLER
IALIBER AND
155 YPE OF CANNON (

T S3 LOT NUMBER

ELL MODEL OF SHELL

65200A

Figure 84. Chemical projectile.

124
the bourrelet to the point is called the ogive. The length of the
ogive influences the flight of the projectile. The generated
radius of the ogive has generally varied from 6 to 11 calibers.
Shell of recent design, however, have long ogives of radii that
exceed these values appreciably. Since armor-piercing projec­
tiles have a short radius of ogive for purposes of penetration, a
windshield is placed over the armor-piercing head to impart
adequate ballistic qualities to the projectile.
(2) Bourrelet. The bourrelet is the accurately machine surface that
bears on the rifling lands of the weapon. It centers the front
end of the projectile in its travel through the bore. Generally,
the bourrelet is located at the forward end of the projectile,
immediately in rear of the ogive. Some projectiles of large cal­
iber have a front and rear bourrelet.
(3) Body. While generally applicable to the entire projectile, the
term “body” is used to designate the cylindrical portion of the
projectile between the bourrelet and the rotating band. It is
generally machined to a smaller diameter than the bourrelet to
reduce the surface in contact with the lands of the bore. Only
the bourrelet and rotating band bear on the lands.
(4) Rotating band. The rotating band is a cylindrical ring of com­
paratively soft metal, or similar substance or of steel pressed into
a knurled or roughened groove near the base of the projectile
(or attached to the base of the projectile as in the 4.2-inch mor­
tar). It affords a closure for the projectile in the forcing cone
of the weapon in separate-loading projectiles and centers the rear
end of the projectile in the bore of the weapon. In fixed am­
munition the rotating band may not seat in the forcing cone until
the instant of initial movement upon firing. As the projectile
moves forward, the rotating band is engraved by the lands of
the bore. Metal displaced during the engraving process flows
into annular relief grooves or “cannelures” cut in the rotating
band. In the case of 4.2-inch mortar shell, the rotating band
is bell-shaped and is expanded into the grooves of the mortar
rifling by the pressure of the propellent gases upon a pressure
plate. Since the rifling of the weapon is helical, engagement
with the band imparts rotation to the moving projectile. The
rotating band also provides obturation, that is, prevents the
escape of the propellent gases forward of the projectile by com­
pletely filling the grooves of the rifling. In the case of recoilless
rifle projectiles, the rotating band is preengraved. Some pro­
jectiles may be provided with a double band.
(5) Type of base. When the surface to the rear of the rotating band
is tapered or conical, it is known as “boat-tailed”; when cylin­
drical, the projectile is described as having a “square base.”
Nonrotating mortar shell have fins at the rear for stabilization
125
of the projectile.
(6) Base plug. To facilitate manufacture, some armor-piercing pro­
jectiles are closed at the base with a steel plug. In the larger
AP shot, the base plug also provides a seat for the fuze. In the
smaller calibers, if an explosive charge is loaded in the cavity of
the AP shot, the base plug is replaced by a base detonating
fuze. In certain types of projectiles, the base plug may contain
the tracer element.
(7) Base cover. Each high-explosive shell is provided with a base
cover to prevent the hot gases of the propelling charge from
coming into contact with the explosive filler of the projectile
through joints or possible flaws in the metal of the base. The
base cover consists of a thin metal disk, which may be caulked,
crimped, or welded to the base of the shell. Projectiles with
high-explosive filler and base detonating fuzes are not ordinarily
provided with base covers, but have caulking or sealing rings.
(8) Tracer. For observation of fire, some projectiles are equipped
with a tracer element in the base of the projectile. In most
smaller-caliber antiaircraft shell, the tracer is used to ignite the
filler and destroy the shell should it miss the target. Such a
tracer is called “shell-destroying (SD).”
c. Types of Projectiles.
(1) High-explosive (HE) shell. This type of projectile (fig. 82), usually
made of forged or cold extruded steel, has comparatively thin
walls and a large bursting charge of high explosive. It is used
against personnel and material targets, producing blast or min­
ing effect and fragmentation at the target. It may be fitted
with either a time or impact fuze, a concrete-piercing fuze, or
an influence (proximity or VT) fuze according to type of action
desired.
(2) High-explosive-antitank (HE, AT) shell. This is a high-explosive
shaped-charge shell (fig. 82) for use against armor plate. Its
effect is dependent upon the shape of the charge. It has a
conical windshield that provides standoff for the charge as well
as ballistic characteristics for the projectile. The round is fitted
with a base-detonating fuze having nondelay action.
(3) Chemical shell. The two functional types of chemical shell are
burster and base-ejection (BE) (fig. 82).
(a) Burster. The burster type (fig. 82) is similar to high-explosive
shell except for the type of filler, which consists of a chemical
such as gas or smoke. An explosive charge, termed a burster
charge, located centrally in the shell, is used to rupture the
shell body and aid in dispersion of the chemical filler. As the
filler is not explosive, a base cover is not used.
(Z>) Base ejection (BE). Base-ejection shells (fig. 82) that are set to
function in flight do not have a burster, but have an expelling
126
charge of black powder, adjacent to the time fuze. This ex­
pelling charge, when ignited by the fuze, ignites the smoke
mixture of the canisters, strips the threads of the base plug,
and forces the canisters from the base of the shell.
J^ote. The canister in this type of shell is a container for smoke mix­
ture and should not be confused with the canister that is a fixed round
projectile and contains steel slugs (cylinders) ((7) below).
(4) Illuminating shell. These shell contain a parachute and an illu-
minant assembly that are ejected by an expelling charge adja­
cent to the time fuze in a manner similar to base-ejection smoke
shell. The illuminant suspended by the parachute burns,
lighting up a target area. Illuminating shell are fired from
105-mm howitzers, 155-mm guns and howitzers, and from all
mortars. An example, the 155-mm illuminating shell is shown
in figure 83.
(5) Armor-piercing projectiles.
(а) The term “armor-piercing-capped” (APC) (fig. 81) refers to
a shot or a projectile with an armor-piercing cap for use
especially in penetrating face-hardened armor plate. The
cap is of forged alloy steel, heat-treated to have a hard face
and a relatively soft core. On impact, the hardened face of
the cap destroys the hardened surface of the armor-plate,
while the softer core of the cap protects the hardened point of
the projectile by distributing the impact stresses over a large
percentage of the area of the head. A tracer may be present
in the base plug or in the base end of the fuze.
(б) Armor-piercing (AP) shot (fig. 81) are made of heat-treated
high-carbon alloy steel. The head is hardened steel for
penetration of armor and the body is tough to withstand the
strains imposed by impact and the twisting action of the pro­
jectile at high angles of obliquity. A windshield is generally
secured to the head of the shot to insure adequate ballistics.
A tracer will be present in the base end of the shot.
(6) Hypervelocity (velocities above 3,500fps) armor-piercing shot (HVAP).
This shot is a lightweight projectile (fig. 81) having an armor-
piercing core of tungsten carbide. The tungsten carbide core,
a steel base containing a tracer element, an aluminum body
and nose plug, and an aluminum windshield comprise the
HVAP-T shot.
(7) Canister. The canister projectile, which consists of a light metal
case filled with steel slugs (cylinders) contains no high explo­
sives (fig. 81). Early design canisters contain steel balls instead
of slugs. It is fired pointblank at short ranges (up to 600 ft. for
larger caliber canisters) for effect against personnel. The case
breaks upon leaving the muzzle of the weapon, and the balls or
slugs scatter in the manner of shot from a shotgun shell.
127
(8) Leaflet. These shell are essentially base-ejection shell fitted with
a means of dispersing literature from the shell. Identifying
colors on packages containing these shell consist of a red band
centered in a wider white band.

76. Cartridge Case

A cartridge case (figs. 77 and 78), made of drawn brass or steel of
spiral wrapped multipieced or drawn construction, serves as the con­
tainer for the propelling charge in rounds of fixed, semifixed, and “sep­
arated” artillery ammunition. Its profile and size conform to that of the
chamber of the weapon in which the round is fired, except for recoilless
rifles. The “head” of the case is designed relatively heavy, in order to
provide for firm attachment of a primer, and has a flange or groove to
permit mechanical extraction. Rounds used in automatic guns have
cartridge cases with an extracting groove instead of a flange or rim.
The cartridge case, with its attached primer, contains the propellent
charge. In nonadjustable (fixed) propellent charge rounds, the case is
crimped to the projectile. In adjustable (semifixed) propellent charge
rounds, the case is a free fit to the projectile. In “separated” ammuni­
tion, the case is plugged and separate from the projectile (w/which it
comprises a round). Having a nonadjustable propellent charge, “sep­
arated” ammunition may be considered a special type of “fixed” ammu­
nition. Both fixed and semifixed rounds are designed to be loaded into
the weapon in which they are fired in one operation. Separated rounds
(propelling charge and projectile) are also loaded into a weapon in one
operation. Cartridge cases consist of special compositions of brass or
steel, especially processed, in order that they may adequately fulfill (in
recoil-type weapons) the functioning of obturation, that is, expansion
against the chamber wall under the pressure of burning propellent gases
to prevent the escape of these gases from the rear of the weapon. The
cartridge case in recoilless-type weapons is perforated in a manner to
allow sufficient propellent gases to escape into the weapon chamber and
out of the breechblock to the atmosphere to counteract weapon recoil.
The interior of recoilless-type cartridge cases contains a lever that serves
to cover the perforations in the case, thereby preventing the entrance of
moisture and leakage of the propelling charge grains. Liners are made
of various materials such as paper, rayon, plastic, etc.

77. Propelling Charges

a. General.
(1) Description. Propelling charges consist of the propellant and
igniter or primer, and a container (cartridge bag for separate­
loading and semifixed ammunition and cartridge case for sep­
arated and semifixed ammunition). The propellant itself is
carefully designed for the particular role of the ammunition, in­
128
eluding such factors as chemical composition, grain size, and of
course, charge weight.
(2) Propellant. Propellants are described in paragraphs 14 through
21.
(3) Igniter charge. In fixed and semifixed rounds, the igniter charge
(black powder) is present in the artillery primer (fig. 76). In
“separated” ammunition, an auxiliary igniter charge is placed
around the primer (fig. 76) or on the distance wadding to
insure proper ignition of the propellant. In separate-loading
rounds, the igniter charge (fig. 85) is in an igniter bag sewed to
the base end of the propelling charge and, in some designs, also
forms a core running through the center of the propelling
charge bag. Cartridge-igniter pads are made of tightly woven
silk to prevent the black powder from sifting through. Cloth
used for the igniter charge is dyed red to indicate the presence
of the black powder igniter. Pads of early manufacture (un­
dyed) are marked IGNITER.
(4) Types of propelling charge. The type of propelling charge depends
upon the type and size of complete round, that is: fixed, semi­
fixed, separated, or separate-loading.
b. Fixed and Semifixed Charges.
(1) Propelling charge in fixed ammunition. The propelling charge in a
round of fixed ammunition is loose (or in a polyethylene bag)
in the cartridge case (fig. 76). In some instances where the
charge does not fill the case completely, a spacer or distance
wadding, usually a cardboard disk and cylinder, is inserted in
the neck of the cartridge case, between the charge and the base
of the projectile.
(2) Propelling charge in semifixed ammunition. In semifixed gun or
howitzer ammunition, the charge, which is divided into parts
or increments for zone firing, is in several cloth bags (fig. 76).
The full charge, with all increments in proper order, is in the
cartridge case, which is a free-fit over the rear end of the pro­
jectile. Each part of the charge is numbered, the base charge
being numbered 1. Thus, for example, to arrange a propelling
charge in proper order for firing charge 4, the increments
would be arranged in the order 1, 2, 3, and 4, increment 4
being placed uppermost. The charge for 105-mm howitzer
ammunition is termed “dualgran” charge. It consists of a
charge in which a quick-burning propellant of single-perforated
grains is used in charges 1 and 2 and a slowburning propellant
of multiperforated grains in charges 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7. This
charge is used with a long primer (no charge-retaining spring
required) and incorporates a lead foil in charge 5 as a decop­
pering agent. The increments are of the flat-bag type and
they are folded around the primer. Less muzzle flash than
408374 0-56-9 129
with the older-type charge, improved uniformity of perform­
ance, and greater accuracy are obtained with the dualgran
charge. Mortar propelling charges, being adjustable, are of
the semifixed type. Mortar charges are composed of incre­
ments, which consist of thin sheets of propellant arranged to be
fitted around the stabilizing fins or to the cartridge container or
“boom” at the base of a shell.
c. “Separated” Ammunition Propelling Charge. This propelling charge is
contained in a brass or steel cartridge case, together with the primer (fig.
76). The charge consists of propellant that is loose in a cartridge case,
which is closed by a plastic or asphalt composition plug.
d. Separate-Loading Charges.
(1) Cartridge bags. Cartridge bags form a suitable and convenient
means of containing the propellant in separate-loading ammu­
nition. Acrylic cotton cloth is used as material for cartridge
bags. Silk was formerly used.
(2) Multisection charges. Multisection charges permit the guncrew to
vary the size of the propelling charge and facilitate handling
the larger and heavier charges. Multisection charges are sub­
divided into “base and increment” and “unequal section”
types.
(a) Base and increment. This type of propelling charge (figs. 76
and 85) consists of a base section or charge and one or more
increments. The increments may be of equal or unequal
weight. Whereas the base section is always fired, the incre­
ments may or may not be fired. With some types, one igniter
pad is attached to the base end of the base section only, while

CHARGE, PROPELLING M3 (GREEN BAG)

CHARGE, PROPELLING, M4A1 (WHITE BAG)

130
other types have a core-type igniter in the base section and
sometimes in one or more increments as well.
(by Unequal section. In the case of certain howitzers, the charge is
made up in unequal sections. In the case of guns, the
charge may be made up of several equal sections and two or
more unequal sections. This type permits firings at reduced
velocities and provides the maximum flexibility.
(3) Color. In connection with certain howitzers, two base and in­
crement charges are provided, one for inner, the other for outer
zones of fire. The cloth of the bags for the inner zones is dyed
green to distinguish that charge from the other type, which is in
undyed (white) bags. Accordingly, these two types of charges
are called “green bag” and “white bag” charges.
(4) Flash reducers. Optional flash reducers are cloth packets filled
with flash-reducing slats that can be applied to separate-load­
ing propelling charges, specifically for elimination of flash in
night firings. The use of these flash reducers increases the
amount of smoke and therefore they are not generally favored
for daytime use. Flash reducers are provided for use with the
“white bag” charges only, in the 155-mm howitzer Ml or M45
and the 8-inch howitzer Ml. They consist of pads suitable for
inserting between the sections of the propelling charge, in ac­
cordance with instructions contained in pertinent technical
manuals. No flash reducers are necessary with the “green
bag” charges for these howitzers, since the fastest burning pro­
pellant is flashless without any assistance. The same precau­
tions should be used in handling flash reducers that apply to
the use of any other item containing black powder (par. 88).
See TB’s ORD 565 and ORD 590 for information on use.
78. Fuzes
a. General. An artillery fuze is a mechanical device used with a pro­
jectile to cause it to function at the time and under the circumstances
desired.
b. Classification.
(1) Artillery fuzes are classified according to their position on the
projectile as base-detonating (BD) (fig. 86), point-initiating
base-detonating (PIBD) (fig. 87), and point-detonating (PD).
Base-detonating fuzes are used with some types of armor-pierc­
ing projectiles and a few types of high-explosive projectiles.
Artillery fuzes are classified according to their method of func­
tioning as impact, time, or proximity, or a combination of these.
Impact fuzes are classified, according to type of action, as
superquick, delay, or nondelay. The nondelay type, which actually
has a measurable, but very slight delay, is used as a base fuze
and represents the fastest action possible for the inertia-type
131
RAPD 109523B

Figure 86. Base-detonating (BD) fuze M91A1.

fuze. On delay fuzes, the time of delay is usually 0.05 or 0.025

second, which refers to the delay action at the instant of im­
pact, whereas on time fuzes, the “time” refers to the length of
time from the instant of firing of the weapon to the instant of
functioning of the fuze. There are two types of time fuzes.
One type makes use of compressed black powder rings that
burn for a predetermined length of time and then initiates the
high-explosive element of the fuze. The other type incorpo­
rates a clocklike mechanism that, through a gear train and es­
capement, trips a firing pin at a predetermined time, thus
causing the fuze to function.
(2) Selective-type fuzes have time action or more than one type of
action, for example, superquick and delay (SQ-DEL) and
mechanical time and superquick (MTSQ) (fig. 88). Such
fuzes can be adjusted in the field for the type of action desired.
Time fuzes can be set (“cut”) to function at any desired time
of flight after firing (up to the limit of the graduated time scale)
by turning a time ring on which the scale is engraved. All
MT fuzes should be set in the direction of increasing time of
flight, i. e., the setting indicating line should in all cases travel
from the minimum reading on the scale toward the maximum
reading.
132
A—PRIMER
B. -SPEEL OGIVE
C—BODY
D..-..DETONATOR
E—ROTOR
F..-BODY PIN
G . -LOCK
H—AUXILIARY DETONATING CHARGE

108184A

I'lgure 87. Point-initiating base-detonating (PIBD) fuze M90A1, for 57-mm rifle shell.

(3) The “proximity fuze” (VT) is essentially a combination trans­

mitter and receiver. A short time after the projectile leaves the
muzzle of the weapon, the fuze becomes armed and begins
sending out continuous waves. As the projectile approaches an
object, the waves are reflected back to the fuze and picked up
by a receiving unit in the fuze. The interaction of the out­
133
going and incoming waves results in beats. When the beats
reach a predetermined intensity an electronic switch is tripped
and an electric charge is permitted to flow through an electric
firing squib. VT fuzes can be used only in deep cavity shell
without the supplementary bursting charge; when “standard
contour” fuzes (PD, MTSQ, TSQ, and CP) are used in deep
cavity shell, the supplementary bursting charge must be used
(fig. 89). Newer-type proximity fuzes are designed for
“bracket arming” for antiaircraft artillery use and “adjustable
delay arming” for field artillery use. Fuze, VT, M515 (fig. 90)
is of the “bracket arming” type. This fuze has a time ring that
must be set to the predicted time-to-target. When fired, the
VT element of the fuze becomes armed at a short time pretar­
get and functions on proximity approach to the target. In the
event the fuze does not come within the influence range of a
suitable target, the fuze will cause self-destruction of the shell at
a time slightly greater than the set time. The fuze also con­
tains an impact element that will function the shell if impact
with a resistant object occurs at any time after arming of the
impact element, but before arming and functioning of the fuze
by the proximity element. Fuze, VT, M514 (fig. 90) is of the
“adjustable delay arming” type. This fuze has a graduated
time scale that must be set to correspond with the predicted
time-to-target. The fuze becomes armed a short time pretar­
get and functions the shell on proximity approach to the target.
This fuze also contains a superquick impact element that will
detonate, on impact, any shell that fails to function normally
on proximity approach to the target.
(4) The long-point-type mechanical time fuze, which is used with
120-mm shell, is shown in figure 91.
(5) The concrete-piercing fuze (fig. 92) is a special point-detonating
impact type used against highly resistant targets.
(6) Many point fuzes are interchangeable because of the “standard
contour” and equal weights, hence a variety of uses may be ob­
tained from any one of several types of projectile. See TM
9-1901 for fuze interchangeability chart.
c. Safety Features.
(1) Artillery fuzes contain safety devices that tend to prevent func­
tioning until after the fuze has been subjected to centrifugal
and setback forces, which take place after the round is fired.
(2) Certain fuzes are said to be “boresafe.” A boresafe (detonator­
safe) fuze is one in which the path of the explosive train is in­
terrupted so that, while the projectile is still in the bore of the
gun, premature explosion of the shell is prevented if any of the
more sensitive elements, primer, detonator, or both, should

134
4.5? IN

M500A1 MECHANICAL TIME

AND SUPERQUICK (MTSQ)

figure 88. Point-detonating impact super quick and delay ( PD-SQDEL) and point-detonating
I mechanical-time and superquick (MTSQ) fuzes.
ST

135
V'ED

LARI
CTlON

/ 3.52 IN<
MAX I

Mi!Ai §5s
K

CALIBER’ MAX

MT TNT
I RT: A. .fRYSHfU

POINT FUZE AND VT FUZE

SUPPLEMENTARY charge RA

Figure 89. Point-detonating impact superquick and delay (PD-SQ DEL) and point-detonating
proximity ( VT) fuzes.

function. Interruption is most generally obtained by out-of­

line components or interrupter blocks or slides.
(3) Certain internal parts of an impact fuze are in “unarmed” posi­
tions prior to firing. Upon firing and while the projectile is
being rotated and accelerated, centrifugal and setback forces
136
Figure 90. Bracket arming and adjustable delay arming ( VT) fuzes.

137
Figure 91. Point-detonating mechamcal-time fuze for separated ammunition.

138
1.60 IN.. —..

Figure 92. Concrete-piercing fuze and booster.

act upon those parts. As the projectile leaves the muzzle of the
weapon, acceleration ceases and hence setback ceases. The
combination of centrifugal force and setback in the bore of the
weapon together with cessation of setback after the projectile
has left the bore of the weapon arms the fuze. The time train
of time fuzes is initiated at the instant of firing by setback. To
prevent accidental arming in handling and shipping, safety de­
vices such as a safety wire or cotter pin are used. Such safety
devices must be removed before firing.
(4) Arming of VT fuzes is delayed by a series of internal safety de­
vices. The fuze becomes automatically armed a specified
length of time after the projectile is fired.
79. Primers
a. General. A primer is the component used to initiate the low- or
high-explosive train. Artillery primers consist essentially of a small
quantity of sensitive explosive and a charge of black powder or propel­
lant in the case of mortar ammunition encased in a metal tube. In
fixed, semifixed, and separated ammunition, the primer is fitted to the
head of the cartridge case at time of manufacture. In separate-loading
ammunition, the primer is inserted by hand into the breechblock of the
weapon.
b. Types. Based on the method of firing, artillery primers are classi­
fied as electric, percussion, combination percussion-electric, and ignition.
c. Electric. This type of primer is the very small type such as used in
20-mm cartridges. It is fired by the heat generated when an electric
current passes through a resistance wire or conductive primer mixture
embedded in a primer composition. The electric primer is distinguished
by black insulation that surrounds it in the head of the cartridge case.
139
A
O

ml

MGfflG<ZGG<>a.4F .a''
-z|-~■Saia ..■ .11.. . »i..... ........ 'll

A-> ZiNG !'■ ;

F G H 1
fi-GZMtz GuG

PRIMER. PERCUSSION. M22A3 [■■ iLMr.N ' ■ 'j

......... .. -..... -. -......... Mm
0- ,
£ - ZINGER GHARGil
f-Wf’HfiAGM

PRIMER PERCUSSION. M31A2

Tigure 93. Typical percussion primers Jor fixed, semifixed, and separated ammunition.
PRIMEF

RA PD 65129D

A-INSULATOR
g FIRING KNOP E. FIRING PLUNGER
_ -GUN COTTON AROUND F. IGNITION WIRE
C ■ ELECTRIC ELEMENT r 'IGNITION CHARGE
D.. METAL SEAL . -(BLACK POWDER)
RA PD 212787

Figure 95. Combination electric and percussion primer Mk 15 mod 1 —for separate-loading rounds.

d. Percussion. This type of primer, fired by a blow of the firing pin, is

generally used in fixed, semifixed, and separated artillery ammunition
(fig. 93). The primers used in cartridge cases contain sufficient black
powder to properly ignite the propellant in the cartridge case. Those
used with separate-loading propelling charges contain only enough black
powder to ignite the black powder igniter charge attached to the pro­
pelling charge. The percussion primer used in separate-loading rounds
is shown in figure 94.
e. Combination Electric and Percussion. This type of primer (fig. 95) is
fired either electrically or by the blow of a firing pin. This primer is
used with separate-loading rounds.
f Ignition. The ignition primer, although somewhat similar to the
percussion type, differs in that it contains an inert cap with a hole in it
instead of a live percussion cap. It is intended for use in the 75-mm
target practice round that is used in the 75-mm subcaliber gun M25,
which is used as subcaliber equipment in the 155-mm gun M2. For this
purpose, a service primer is fired in the 155-mm gun M2. The flame
from this service primer passes through the hole in the inert cap of the
ignition primer, thus igniting the black powder charge of the ignition
primer.
141
80. Boosters
The term “booster” is applied to the explosive element in the bursting­
charge explosive train that detonates the main charge. Some boosters
contain mechanical centrifugally actuated safety devices to prevent pre­
mature detonation of the main charge. The booster charge on some
mortar fuzes is incorporated within (integral with) the fuze itself. The
booster used with fuzes for some shell are contained in a thin metal or
plastic casing that is screwed to, and handled as a unit with, the fuze
(fig- 88).
81. Burster Charge
An auxiliary high-explosive element in certain types of chemical shell
(fig. 82), which ruptures the shell and disperses the chemical agent, is
called a burster charge. It consists of a high-explosive charge, a con­
tainer for the charge, and a metal head. The burster charge is contained
in a burster casing in the shell. It may be used in conjunction with a
“burster initiator” (75-, 76-, and 90-mm chemical shell).

82. Practice Ammunition

a. General. Target-practice (TP) rounds (fig. 96) of all types, fixed,
semifixed, separated, and separate-loading, are used for training in
marksmanship. The rounds have the same weight and contour as the
service rounds they simulate. Moreover, since target-practice ammuni­
tion is actually fired at a practice target, the rounds have the same pro­
pelling charges as in the service rounds they simulate. Because target­
practice ammunition has a live propelling charge and because it is used
with the same efforts to achieve accuracy as with service ammunition, it
must be handled with the same care and precautions. Thus, where in­
dicated by firing table titles, the same firing data are used for firing prac­
tice rounds as are used in firing their service counterparts. Some target­
practice projectiles are cast iron while others are service projectiles loaded
with sand or other inert material. Some target-practice projectiles con­
tain a black powder spotting charge that emits a smoke puff to simulate
functioning and to assist in spotting. Target-practice shell for mortar
contain a black powder charge, propellant, ignition cartridge, and per­
cussion primer. However, training shell for mortars have an inert body

figure 96. Target-practice shell for 90-mm guns Ml, M2, and M3 series, and 7'8 with dummy
fuze M73 or M44A2, or inert fuze of the M51 senes.

142
(MARKING IN WHITE'

PRACTICE SHELL
YELLOW

IGNITION CARTRIDGE
PERCUSSION
PRIMER

—BLACK (MARKING IN WHITE)............... —-I

RED YELLOW

TRAINING SHELL RA. PD 64448D

Figure 97. Typical mortar practice and training shell.

and no propellant as such, being propelled only by an ignition cartridge

(fig- 97).
b. Identification. For identification purposes, practice projectiles are
painted blue with marking in white (table I). The blue color signifies
that the round, of which the projectile is a component, is for use in tar­
get-practice firing and includes a propelling charge and any other prescribed
explosive.
Caution: Some older fixed or semifixed practice rounds may be en­
countered in which the projectiles were inadvertently painted black be­
cause they are inert, even though the cartridge case contained “live” pro­
pellant (explosive). In handling any round in which the projectile is
painted black (w/or w/o the marking of the word INERT), the complete
identifying marking of the round should be noted, and it should be noted
whether or not any of the components contain explosive.
For identification marking of inert ammunition, see paragraph 106.
c. Simulators. Several types of simulators are used in connection with
143
AF

.....

D-TYPICAL SEPARATE-LOADING DUMMY PROPELLING CHARGE

Figure 98. Dummy ammunition.

artillery training. They are considered pyrotechnic items as they con­

tain pyrotechnic compositions (see TM 9-1981).
(1) The smoke puff charge (fig. 154) is used with a smoke percus-
144
Figure 99. Dummy fuzes.

408374 0 -56 - 10 145

sion cap and is fired in a smoke puff discharger. The smoke
puff simulates the appearance of the burst of an artillery shell.
(2) The gunflash simulator (fig. 155) simulates the flash and noise
accompanying the firing of an artillery weapon.
(3) The shell burst simulator (fig. 156) simulates battle noises and
effects such as whistle, flash, and report.
(4) The firecracker is a small paper cylinder filled with an explosive
composition. It has a black powder cord-type fuse that may
be lit with an ordinary match. It may be used to simulate the
noise of artillery fire.
(5) Blank ammunition (par. 85) may be used for limited artillery
practice.
d. Field Artillery Trainer. This trainer, which is used in preliminary ar­
tillery training, is a compressed air unit consisting of a miniature “gun”
mounted on a miniature carriage. Four units are mounted on a “firing”
platform to make up a field artillery training battery. The “ammuni­
tion” for this trainer consists of a 1-inch commercial steel ball (the
simulated projectile) weighing about 214 ounces and a selection of air
pressures (the simulated adjustable (semifixed) propelling charge) up to
80 pounds per square inch. The maximum range is 85 yards at 800-mil
(45°) elevation.
83. Dummy Ammunition
Dummy rounds, dummy projectiles, and dummy propelling charges
are used for training in loading and unloading ammunition into a
weapon. They consist of completely inert replicas of service rounds of
ammunition or components. Fixed and semifixed rounds of this type are
designated “dummy cartridges,” while separate-loading rounds of this
type are designated “dummy projectiles” and “dummy propelling car­
tridges.” Representative ammunition of this type is shown in figure 98.
Fuzes used in ammunition of this type are shown in figure 99. As this
type ammunition is completely inert, no special safety precautions such
as those required for “service” and “practice” ammunition are necessary.
In accordance with painting and marking requirements (table I), metal
components of dummy ammunition (except bronze dummy rounds) are
painted black with marking in white. Dummy propelling charges are
filled with wood grains simulating “live” propellant grains, and the color
of the cloth in dummy propelling charge bags simulates that used in
“live” propelling charge bags.
84. Subcaliber Ammunition
a. General. Subcaliber ammunition is ammunition used in subcaliber
equipment (subcaliber gun, howitzer, or mortar) to simulate service­
weapon target practice. The subcaliber equipment is of smaller caliber
than that of the service weapon with which it is used and is arranged for
attachment to the service weapon as an “interior” (w/in bore) mount in
146
Figure 100. Target-practice shellfor 37-mm subcaliber gun.

some calibers of weapons or as an “exterior” mount on certain other

calibers of weapons. The use of subcaliber ammunition, being of low
cost as compared with the cost of the ammunition it simulates, makes
possible economies in training gun crews, avoids wear and tear on service
weapons incident to regular target practice (par. 82), and permits train­
ing in locations where range limitations exist.
b. Types. Subcaliber equipment for small-caliber service weapons gen­
erally uses small arms service cartridges. Subcaliber equipment for
medium- and some large-caliber service weapons uses 37-mm shell con­
taining a charge of black powder instead of high explosive. Subcaliber
equipment for 155-mm guns uses certain 75-mm service or target prac­
tice shell in 75-mm subcaliber guns. Subcaliber equipment for larger
weapons consists of a 75-mm howitzer adapted as a subcaliber weapon
and uses certain 75-mm ammunition. Special subcaliber equipment is
designed for 4.2-inch mortars. Representative type of subcaliber ammu­
nition is shown in figure 100.
Note. The same precautions will be observed in firing subcaliber ammunition as in
firing service and practice ammunition.

85. Blank Ammunition

a. General. Blank ammunition is used in certain artillery weapons for
a limited type of artillery firing practice, for maneuvers, for firing the
morning and evening “gun,” and for saluting. A representative type of
blank ammunition is shown in figure 101.
b. Complete Round. A complete round of blank ammunition consists of
a cartridge case, primer, charge of black powder, and a closing cup
sealed in the mouth of the case. The primer is fitted to the cartridge
case as in fixed or semifixed rounds of service ammunition. The black
powder charge ranges in weight from 0.87 to 2.0 pounds depending upon
its caliber and type. The blank cartridge contains no projectile.
c. Charge. The black powder charge for blank rounds consists of loose
147
RAPD 89316B

Figure 101. Blank ammunition for 75-mm guns and howitzers.

potassium- or sodium nitrate-type black powder in sewed cotton cloth

bags.
86. Propellant Temperature Indicators
Propellant temperature indicators (fig. 102), used in antiaircraft bat­
teries, enable taking the propellant temperatures for ammunition either
at battery or in storage at ammunition supply point (ASP). They con­
sist of a thermometer stuck into the propelling charge in a service car­
tridge case that, in turn, is packed in a fiber container. The thermom­
eter can be read through plastic lenses placed in the head of the
assembly. The assembly is then placed with an ammunition lot so that
the temperature may be noted. Since firing tables are based on the
temperature of the propellant at 70° F. at the time of firing, any devi­
ation from this temperature has to be considered in making firing data
corrections.
87. Care and Precautions in Handling
a. General. Reference is made to precautions in paragraph 12 for their
general applicability to the various phases of “handling” explosives and
ammunition (see also TM 9-1903).
h. Projectiles. Projectiles will be inspected at appropriate times par­
ticularly under conditions of abnormally high temperature and moisture,
as they contain high explosives which are subject to exudation, gases that
may result in injury to personnel if allowed to leak, or illuminants that are
particularly hygroscopic and subject to deterioration if allowed to come
in contact with moisture.
c. Propelling Charges. Propelling charges of all types will be protected
from moisture as they are composed of propellant that is hygroscopic.

148
Figure 102. Propellant temperature indicator with thermometer.

The cloth, cotton or silk, in which separate-loading propelling charges

are contained will be examined at appropriate periods for discoloration,
as these might indicate deterioration of the propellant.
d. Cartridge Case. Cartridge cases, which contain the propelling
charge in fixed, semifixed, and separated ammunition, are composed of
lightweight brass or steel that is easily dented, hence packages (inner
containers) and packings (shipping boxes) will be observed for evidence
of damage that might indicate corroded, deformed, or ruptured cases.
Such cases, if used, might put a weapon out of action for a considerable
period of time.
e. Fuges and Primers. Fuzes will be handled carefully, as they contain
amounts, even though small, of sensitive high explosive such as mercury
fulminate, lead azide, or lead styphnate.
Caution: No attempt will be made to disassemble any fuze at any time
without specific instructions from the Chief of Ordnance.
Primers contain black powder that is particularly hygroscopic, hence any
evidence of corrosion should be noted. In general, fuzes and primers
should be kept in hermetically sealed containers.
149
88. Precautions in Firing
a. Reference is made to TM 9-1903 and AR 385-63 for general pre­
cautions and regulations in firing ammunition.
b. Ammunition will be inspected to see that it is clean, free of grease,
and free of serious dents, bruises, or corrosion.
c. Semifixed propelling charges such as howitzer or mortar increments
become exposed briefly to the atmosphere and weather during prepara­
tion for firing. These should therefore be inspected for cleanliness or
damage and protected from moisture.
d. The U-shaped packing stop, which engages the fuze wrench slots for
the purpose of holding the round (fixed or semifixed) in place in its con­
tainer, must be removed and discarded before any attempt is made to
load the round into a weapon.
e. Ammunition with serious dents, burs, or other deformities will not
be used. If such ammunition is fired, a serious blowback or malfunction
might result.
f. Separately issued fuzes, such as those issued to be fitted in the field
to 90-mm and 120-mm projectiles or to separate-loading projectiles,
should not be removed from their hermetically sealed containers until
just prior to use. When screwing a fuze into the projectile, it should be
tightened with the appropriate fuze wrench and set (cut), when required,
with the appropriate fuze setter. Some fuze-projectile assemblies require
staking to prevent disassembly during fuze setting operations.
g. Complete rounds, particularly rounds with fuzes, will be handled
with care at all times. Explosive elements in fuzes and primers are par­
ticularly sensitive to shock and high temperature.
h. The safety wire will be withdrawn from the fuze just before firing
and at no other time. Be certain the bore-riding pin is in place in the
fuze at the time of dropping a shell into a mortar.
i. When loading mortars, the round is inserted into the muzzle of
mortar, cartridge end first. When the shell is released to slide down the
barrel, the hands must be instantly removed from in front of the muzzle.
j. All rounds employing a cartridge case with base-affixed primer must
be handled with the base up to prevent the accidental detonation of the
highly sensitive primer.
k. Do not break the moisture-resistant seal on the fiber container until
ammunition is to be used.
l. Duds will not be handled or moved. Because their fuzes are
armed, they will be destroyed in place as described in TM 9-1903.
m. Particular precautions must be taken with cartridges containing
electric primers, such as in 20-mm ammunition, as described in (1)
through (5) below.
(1) Live rounds should not be in gun chamber when electric leads
are exposed.
(2) Precaution must be taken where any conditions exist, such as
wearing of wool, synthetic fibers, or fur clothing, that may de-
150
j
Figure 103. Types offiber container.
152
M 3, 16 |N

igure 104. Metal containers for 81 -mm mortar shell.

1
velop static charges or where individuals have reported static
charges.
(3) Armorers handling belted ammunition should not wear rubber
soled shoes. Conductive or leather soled shoes should be worn.
(4) The quick movement of belted rounds across nonconductive sur­
faces should be avoided as such action may develop a static
charge.
(5) Aircraft should be grounded during ammunition loading
operations.

89. Packing and Marking

Fixed, semifixed, and separated artillery ammunition items' are packed
in moisture-resistant fiber containers in wooden boxes or placed in metal
containers (figs. 103 and 104). Crates may be used for additional pro­
tection for certain propellent containers (metal containers for propelling
charges), projectiles having windshields, and dummy projectiles. Fuzes
and primers are packed in hermetically sealed cans, similar to that
shown in figure 105, in a wooden box. Representative wooden boxes
are shown in figures 106 and 107. Separate-loading projectiles are
shipped boxed, crated, uncrated, or palletized. If shipped uncrated, a
grommet is around the rotating band and an eyebolt-lifting plug is in the
threaded fuze hole. Palletized shell are shown in figure 108. Airtight
steel propellent containers, formerly known as cartridge-storage cases (fig.
109), are used to pack separate-loading propelling charges; in packings
of recent design, one primer is packed in the propellent container with
each charge. Except training ammunition, which may be requisitioned
by components, mortar ammunition in the smaller calibers is packed as
complete rounds. Each round is packed in an individual fiber con­
tainer in metal container or wooden packing box. Representative mark­
ings on ammunition items are shown in illustrations of various types and

Figure 105. Metal containers for primers.

153
154
1CC SHIPPING N AM E

igure 106. Packing box for20-m m ammunition.

J
155
figure 107. Packing box for 76-mm ammunition.
RA PD 89384

Figure 108. Pallet for separate-loading shell.

described in paragraph 11. Representative markings on packing boxes

for shipment are shown in figures 106 and 107.

Section IV. BOMBS

90. General
a. A bomb is a type of ammunition designed to be dropped from an
aircraft in flight to inflict damage or to serve a special purpose such as
156
Figure 109. Metal container for propelling charge.

157
target identification or provision of a light source for photography. A
bomb consists essentially of a metal container filled with the active
charge, a device for stabilizing its flight, a mechanism for exploding the
bomb, and safety devices. The metal container, called the bomb body,
is usually streamlined with a rounded (ogival) nose and a tapered tail.
The stabilizing device (fin) (par. 95) is attached to the tail end of the
body and generally consists of sheet metal fin assembly or a parachute
unit. The mechanism for exploding the charge is called a fuze and is
generally placed in the nose or in the tail of the body, or both. Two or
more fuzes may be used in the same bomb for different effects or to in­
sure reliability of functioning. Safety devices are usually built into the
fuze and are held in place during storage and shipment by seal wires or
cotter pins. When the bomb is prepared for use, the seal wire and cot­
ter pins are replaced by an arming wire, which is not removed until the
bomb is dropped.
b. For reasons of safety, the components of a bomb are usually stored
and shipped separately and must be assembled prior to use. The com­
ponents of bombs (figs. 110 and 111) differ (depending on the particular
type and model), but in general, they consist of: unfuzed bomb body
containing the charge; fuze or fuzes; fin assembly (assembled to small
bombs as shipped); and arming wire assembly.
c. Bombs are installed in airplanes by means of suspension lugs on the
side of the body or suspension bands with lugs, arranged for horizontal
suspension of the bomb. Some bombs are carried in a rack in the bomb
bay of a bombing plane as shown in figure 112. Bombs are also carried
on external bomb racks. A cluster of several bombs may be suspended
in the carrying station, which may also be used for suspension of a single
bomb of larger size (par. 96). The cluster is arranged for dropping as a
unit (par. 96).
d. The functioning of bombs depends primarily upon the action of the
fuze (par. 93), which may be instantaneous, delay, time, or proximity.
The terms “instantaneous” and “delay” refer to the action at the instant
of fuze impact. “Time” refers to the time from the release of the bomb
to the instant of functioning of the fuze. “Proximity” refers to the char­
acteristics of functioning on approach to, but at some distance from, a
target.
e. Bomb fuzes, after being fitted to bombs, are prevented from arming
and consequently from functioning during handling by means of an arm­
ing wire (par. 94), which is normally withdrawn from the fuze by the
bomb’s release from the bombing plane. When it is necessary to remove
the arming wire to unfuze a bomb, instructions attached to the fuze
should be carefully followed. Provision is made for releasing the bomb
“safe” from the bombing plane when it is desired that the bomb land
without functioning. In this case the arming wire is released with the
bomb so that the arming wire is not withdrawn from the fuze, that is,
the fuze does not become armed.
153
j
ARMING WIRE

FIN LOCK NUT

filial/'
ui Figure 110. Components of bombs.
■o
s>-

Figure Hl. Components of bombs as received.

Figure 112. The complete round in bomb bay.

91. Classification
Bombs are classified according to filler as explosive, chemical, incendi­
ary, pyrotechnic, or inert. They are classified as to use as armor-pierc­
ing (AP), demolition, general-purpose (GP), light case (LC), fragmentation,
depth, semiarmor-piercing (SAP), gas, smoke, incendiary, photoflash, tar­
get identification (TI), leaflet, practice, and dummy. Leaflet bombs are

408374 0 -56 -11 161

light metal cases that may be filled with literature for release over a specific
territory. Practice bombs are usually inert-loaded except for a spotting
charge of black powder or smoke mixture. A sound device may also be
used for spotting. Dummy bombs are completely inert and are used for
training in loading a bombing plane.
Note. Incendiary and chemical bombs are the responsibility of the Chemical Corps
and are described in TM 3-400.

92. Types
a. High Explosive. High-explosive bombs are intended for the destruc­
tion of enemy buildings, bridges, military installations, and the like.
The destructive effect is produced by detonation (blast effect), by projec­
tion of fragments of the case (fragmentation), and by displacement of
earth and structures (mining). An explosive train of bombs is shown in
figure 113.
(1) General-purpose (GP) and demolition. General-purpose (fig. 114)
and demolition bombs are used for the majority of bombing
situations and can produce blast, fragmentation, or mining ef­
fect. The various models range in size from 100 to 12,000
pounds. The explosive charge averages 50 percent of the total
weight. The bombs are usually loaded with tritonal but may
be loaded with TNT, amatol, or COMP B. The bomb body is
cylindrical, has an ogival nose, and tapers conically to the base.
The bombs are fin-stabilized but the fin assembly of some sizes
of bombs may be replaced by an antiricochet device (par. 95c)
for low-altitude bombing. Bombs of the 2,000-pound size or
smaller are adapted for both nose and tail fuzes. Both fuzes
are generally used, as the secondary fuze is used as insurance
against malfunction. The 12,000-pound bombs do not use a
nose fuze, but are provided with three identical tail fuzes.
(2) Light case (LC). Light case bombs (fig. 115) and some demoli­
tion bombs are designed to carry a heavy charge to produce a
maximum blast effect. The explosive charge is 70 percent or
more of the total weight. The total weight is approximately
4,000 and 10,000 pounds. The bomb is similar in shape to the
GP 50 percent explosive-loaded demolition types but the case is
lighter and thinner. This type of bomb cannot be used for
penetration and must be used with VT, instantaneous and non­
delay fuzes to provide aboveground burst. In other respects,
LC bombs are similar to the GP bombs.
(3) Armor-piercing (AP). Armor-piercing bombs (fig. 116) are used
to pierce highly resistant targets, such as concrete bombproof
construction and the heavy deck armor of battleships. The
various models range in size from 1,000 to 1,600 pounds. The
case of the AP is very thick, especially at the nose. The per­
centage of explosive is approximately 15 percent of the total
162
TAIL EXPLOSIVE TRAIN

Figure 113. Explosive train.

163
Figure 114. General-purpose bomb—section.

Figure 115. Light case bomb—section.

Figure 116. Armor-piercing bomb—section.

weight. This type of bomb is loaded with explosive D, which

is sufficiently insensitive to withstand the force of impact with­
out exploding. The bomb is adapted for a tail fuze only,
which is of the delay type to permit deep penetration of the tar­
get before detonation.
(4) Semi-armor-piercing (SAP). Semi-armor-piercing bombs (fig. 117)
are used against reinforced concrete construction and lightly
armored shipping. The various models range in size from 500
164
Figure 117. Semi-armor-pierceng bomb—section.

Figure 118. Depth bomb—section.

to 2,000 pounds. The case of SAP bombs is intermediate in

thickness between that of AP and GP bombs. The percentage
of explosive is approximately 30 percent of the total weight.
This type of bomb is loaded with picratol. A delay tail fuze is
used with this type of bomb. Although some of these bombs
are adapted for a nose fuze, it is rarely used. The fuze hole is
ordinarily closed by an armor-piercing plug.
(5) Depth. The depth bomb (fig. 118) is a light case type of bomb
designed primarily for use against submarines. It averages 70
percent explosive and is loaded with HBX, HBX-1, or TNT.
The case is cylindrical and has a flat nose to reduce or prevent
ricochet when dropped from planes flying at low altitudes.
The depth bomb is fuzed with a hydrostatic tail fuze that func­
tions at a predetermined depth. A nose fuze that functions
with instantaneous action on impact may be used to produce a
surface burst, when the bomb is used against a surface target.
(6) Fragmentation.
(«) General. Fragmentation bombs (fig. 119) are designed for
165
&

FRAGMENTATION BOMB (FIN TYPE) RA PD I5007B

Figure 119. Fragmentation bombs, 20 and 23 pounds section.

high-velocity projection of fragments of a square steel bar
that is wound helically around the bomb. They are effective
against personnel and light materiel. The bombs are usually
loaded with COMP B or TNT and the explosive charge
averages 14 percent of the total weight. Fragmentation
bombs range in size from 4 to 260 pounds. All small and
medium sizes may be assembled in clusters by use of cluster
adapters (par. 96). The cluster is dropped from the airplane
as a unit. Withdrawal of the arming wire when the cluster
is dropped acts to release the bombs from the cluster. This
action is accomplished either by mechanical means directly
or by arming a mechanical time fuze that opens the cluster
after an interval.
(/>) Fin-stabilized. This type of fragmentation bomb is stabilized
by fins. This type is fitted with arming-vane type fuzes that
function instantaneously on impact. Proximity nose fuzes
may also be used to produce air burst. Bombs of the 220-
pound size or larger are adapted for both nose and tail fuzes.
The smaller bombs use a nose fuze only.
(c) Parachute-stabilized. This type of fragmentation bomb is fitted
with a parachute unit to stabilize the bomb and retard its
fall. It is used for low-altitude bombing, and the time in­
terval between release of the bomb and its functioning on
impact permits the airplane to clear the danger area. The
parachute-fragmentation bomb uses an arming-pin type of
nose fuze. The fuze has a delay in arming after the arming
wire is withdrawn by the opening of the parachute but func­
tions instantaneously on impact.
(d) “Butterfly wing”-stabilized. This type is the 4-pound “butter­
fly” bomb (fig. 120), which is a cylindrical bomb used only
in clusters. Metal “butterfly wings,” which encase the body,
are opened by spring action when the bomb is released from
the cluster. The wings are forced to the top of a cable ex­
tension and caused to rotate by the airstream. The wings
retard the fall of the bomb and, by turning the cable, with­
draw the fuze arming stem, thus arming the fuze. The fuze
is located transversely in the side of the cylindrical body.
The action of the fuze may be air-burst, instantaneous on
impact, delay after impact, or antidisturbance.
b. Pyrotechnic. Photoflash and target identification bombs contain
pyrotechnic material but are classified as bombs because of their simi­
larity to bombs in body, fuzing, and method of suspension. Photoflash
bombs also have an explosive effect but this is only incidental to their
purpose.
(1) Photoflash. Photoflash bombs (fig. 121) are thin-cased bombs
designed to burst in the air to produce a light of high intensity
167
168
r

Figure 121. Photoflash bomb—section.

and short duration for night photography. The bombs contain

a charge of photographic flash powder or of metal-alloy dust
representing approximately 45 or 75 percent, respectively, of
the total weight. The metal-dust type of bomb produces
greater candlepower and is more resistant to detonation by bul­
let or flak penetration. Photoflash bombs are equipped with
mechanical time nose fuzes of either the arming-pin or arming­
vane type to produce air burst. The bombs are fin-stabilized
and may also be equipped with a trail plate or trail angles to
alter the trajectory or angle of trail.
(2) Target identification (TI). There are two types of TI bombs, both
of which are fin-stabilized and provided with mechanical-time
nose fuzes to produce air burst.
(a) The ground-marker type (fig. 122) contains pyrotechnic can­
dles and is used to locate, illuminate, and mark targets at
night. The bomb functions in the air, the candles being ig­
nited and ejected from the bomb tail. The candles fall to
the ground and continue to burn for their prescribed time.
The several models of these bombs differ only in the color
and function (delay time, burning time, nonexploding, or ex­
ploding) of the pyrotechnic candles.
(b) The red smoke type is used to indicate a bomb release point
when ground targets are not discernible. The body contains
iron oxide (hematite) filler and a burster. The bomb func-

169
tions in the air, the burster rupturing the case and expelling
the filler to produce a persistent cloud of red smoke.
c. Leaflet. Leaflet bombs (fig. 123) are used to distribute literature
from aircraft. The bombs are similar to 100- and 500-pound aimable-
type cluster adapters (par. 96). The bombs are issued empty. The
bomb body is packed with leaflets and fuzed with a mechanical-time
nose fuze to compose the complete round. The fuze is set to open the
body in the air at an altitude to accomplish the most effective dispersion
of the leaflets.
d. Practice and Practice Target.
(1) Practice bombs (fig. 124) are used for target practice and are
available in sizes from 23 to 250 pounds to simulate service
bombs. Miniature practice bombs in 3- and 4.5-pound sizes
are also provided. Most practice bombs have a spotting
charge and fuze, others are completely inert. Some may be
fitted with a parachute, in which case the parachute serves for
spotting purposes. Some models of practice bombs require
170
1

Figure 124. Practice bombs—sections.

171
sand-loading to weight before use; others are constructed com­
pletely of reinforced concrete except for fin assembly and spot­
ting charge.
(2) Practice target bombs are of the 100-pound size and are used to
produce a colored target on snow covered ranges. The bomb
is fitted with a nose fuze and a burster to scatter the iron oxide
(hematite) filler, producing red coloration of the target area.
e. Dummy. Completely inert bombs and components are used for
training of ground crews in assembling, fuzing, unfuzing, and other han­
dling of bombs. Each type and weight of service bomb is represented
by a corresponding dummy bomb. Dummy bombs are made up from
the metal parts of service bombs, inert-loaded when necessary. Dummy
bombs, unlike practice bombs, are not expendable; they are not used for
bombing practice.

93. Fuzes
a. General. Bomb fuzes are devices used to initiate detonation of
bombs under the circumstances desired. The fuzes are classified accord­
ing to position as nose, tail, and body and according to function as time,
impact, hydrostatic, and proximity (VT). Fuzes are also classified ac­
cording to method of arming as arming-pin type and arming-vane type.

Figure 125. Method ofarming—arming-vane-typefuze.

172
b. Arming. Fuzes are so constructed that they cannot function while
they are unarmed. A fuze is considered armed when the next normally
expected event will initiate functioning of the fuze; that event may be
impact (impact fuzes), time train running to completion (mechanical­
time fuzes), or approach to the target (VT fuzes). As shipped, the fuzes
are in a safe (unarmed) condition. In an unarmed fuze, the firing pin
is mechanically restrained from initiating the explosive train of the fuze.
In a “detonator-safe” fuze, the explosive train is interrupted, since the
detonator is held out of line with the firing pin and booster lead until the
fuze arms.
(1) Arming-vane type fuzes (fig. 125). When the arming wire is with­
drawn on release of the bomb, the vane rotates in the airstream.
The rotation is transmitted, generally through a reduction gear
train, to a shaft or threaded stem in the fuze. In VT fuzes, a
shaft turns a rotor, bringing the detonator into line and also
connecting it in the electrical firing circuit. Mechanical arm­
ing delay devices can also be attached to certain VT fuzes to
increase the arming delay. The device has its own vane and
reduction gears. The device prevents rotation of the fuze vane
until a preset amount of air travel has been accomplished. In
other nose fuzes, the rotation unscrews an arming screw and re­
leases an arming stem, causing the detonator to move into line
in the detonator-safe type. Safety blocks are also ejected from
between the striker and the fuze body, thus freeing the firing
pin from restraint. In tail fuzes, the rotation unscrews an arm­
ing stem from an inertia-type firing pin or cocked (spring-
loaded) firing pin, thus releasing the firing pin to function at
preset time (mechanical-time fuzes) or on impact. A definite
number of turns of the vane is required to arm each model of
fuze. The speed of rotation of the vane under like conditions
depends on the angle of twist of the vane blades; hence differ­
ent vane models may be used with the same fuze model to pro­
duce the desired arming time. Anemometer wind vanes (w/cup­
shaped blades) are used to produce rotation of the vane in the
plane of the airstream. Such vanes are required for sidearm­
ing tail fuzes that are used on some bombs.
(2) Arming-pin-type fuzes (fig. 126). When the arming wire is with­
drawn on release of the bomb, the arming pin is ejected. The
ejection of the arming pin may arm the fuze directly. Usually,
this ejection initiates a powder train or clockwork mechanism
that arms the fuze after a predetermined time.
c. Functional Types of Fuzes.
(1) Mechanical time. Nose and tail mechanical-time fuzes (fig. 127)
function to explode the bomb a certain number of seconds after
release. Armed fuzes will also function on impact. The fuze
contains an arming pin as well as an arming vane. Ejection of
173
2
3 ARBOR IS THEN FREE- TIME MECHANISM
TO TURN, STARTING ROTATES ARBOR.
TIME MECHANISM FREEING SLIDER ‘PIN

SPRING MOVES SLIDER

TO ARMED POSITION.
ALINING DETONATOR
WITH FIRING PIN.

ARMING PIN
\ RETAINS ARBOR.
XARBOR RETAINS'
SLIDER.

2 FLAI'NG OUT ARMIN'

WIRE LETS ARMING PIN
FLY OUT. RA PD 15024B

Figure 126. Method of arming—arming-pin-type fuze.

Figure 127. Mechanical-time nose and tailfuzes.

the arming pin on withdrawal of the arming wire (which actu­

ally takes place about 0.2 second after release) initiates the ac­
tion of the mechanical-time (clockwork) mechanism. In
addition to mechanical arming actuated by the arming vane, a
“time arming” feature is incorporated in the time mechanism of
most models. Time arming means that the fuze is unarmed
(usually because the detonator is kept out of line) until the time
mechanism has run for a fixed time interval. The running
time of the mechanism is usually adjustable and can be set
when the complete round is assembled or as long as the fuze is
accessible. A typical time range is 5 to 92 seconds. One type
of body fuze has a mechanical-time mechanism that is set at
manufacture to function with a delay time of 10, 20, 30, 40, 50,
or 60 minutes.
(2) Impact. Nose and tail impact fuzes (fig. 128) begin their func­
tion when the bomb strikes a resistant material. Fuzes classed
instantaneous (nose) or nondelay (tail) act to explode the bomb
when the striker of the fuze hits the target or when the inertia
plunger strikes the fuze primer, respectively. The inherent de­
lay in functioning is about 0.0005 second for the instantaneous
and for the nondelay type. Impact fuzes classed as delay con­
tain an element that delays the explosion of the bomb until a

175
tr

NOSE FUZE

Figure 128. Impact nose and tailJuges — sections.

fixed time has elapsed after impact. The delay may be pro­
vided by a slow-burning delay charge, a clockwork mechanism,
or a chemical reaction. The slow-burning element is used in
nose or tail fuzes to provide short delay times (less than 1 sec.)
and in tail fuzes to provide medium delay times (4 to 15 sec.).
A chemical reaction is used in tail fuzes to provide long delay

176
times (10 min. up to 144 hr.). Antidisturbance fuzes detonate
the bomb only if the fuze is disturbed after impact.
(3) Hydrostatic. Hydrostatic fuzes (fig. 118) act under the influence
of water pressure to explode a bomb at a predetermined depth
below the surface. They are used in depth bombs for antisub­
marine warfare. Hydrostatic fuzes are usually tail fuzes of the
arming-vane type. Before assembly to the bomb, they can be
set for depths of 25, 50, 75, 100, or 125 feet.
(4) Proximity (VT). Standard VT bomb fuzes (fig. 129) are self-
contained electronically operated fuzes that function as auto­
matic time fuzes, without setting or adjustment, to detonate
the bomb as it approaches the target. They produce air bursts
at heights between 20 and 125 feet over average land. A VT
fuze is a nose fuze with a vane that arms the fuze mechanically
and electrically and also drives an electric generator. The gen­
erator furnishes power to charge a firing capacitor and to op­
erate a radio transmitting and receiving unit. In flight, the

408374 O - 56 - 12 177
fuze broadcasts a continuous radio signal. When this signal is
reflected from an object to the armed fuze, the reflected signal
interacts with the transmitted signal to produce beats. When
the beat reaches a predetermined intensity, it trips an electronic
switch that permits the firing capacitor to discharge through an
electric detonator, thus exploding the bomb. There are two
types of VT fuzes, the bar and the ring, which differ in be­
havior as well as appearance. Bar-type fuzes generally pro­
duce somewhat higher bursts than ring-type fuzes and are less
apt to show a variation in burst height as the bomb type is
varied. The bar-type fuzes give higher burst heights for steep
angles of approach to the target where the ring-type fuzes pro­
duce higher burst heights for shallow angles of approach.
d. Differences Between Nose and Tail Fuzes. In addition to the general
methods by which nose and tail fuzes are held unarmed (£>(1) above) and
the forces acting on the firing pin on impact (r(2) above), there are other
differences between nose and tail fuzes, which are due to their relative
positions on the bomb. The position of the vanes is reversed for the two
types; to adapt a nose fuze for use as a tail fuze, as has been done for some
mechanical-time fuzes, the pitch of the vane blades is reversed. Tail
fuzes are more protected than nose fuzes in that they are not subjected
to the striking force of the complete round on impact. For this reason,
178
the long-delay chemical fuzes are tail fuzes only. The arming vane of a
tail fuze on a fin-stabilized bomb must be positioned near the rear of the
fin assembly so as to project into the airstream. For this reason, the
vane is separated from the fuze body by a long arming stem. Series (fig.
130) of tail fuzes that differ only in the length of the arming stem are
provided for use with bombs of different sizes. Tail fuzes with arming
stems of special lengths are provided for use with conical fin assemblies
that are longer than the corresponding box-type fin assemblies. In the
case of fin-stabilized bombs, using side-arming tail fuzes, the arming vane
is located near the forward end of the fin assembly.
94. Arming Wire Assemblies
Arming wire assemblies are used to prevent arming of fuzes while
fuzed bombs or clusters are being loaded or carried in aircraft or to per­
mit the rounds to be dropped safe. An arming wire assembly consists of
a length of brass wire, to which a swivel loop is attached, and separate
Fahnestock clips. A single (1-branch) assembly, used for one fuze only,
has the swivel loop at one end. A double (2-branch) assembly, used for
two fuzes on the same bomb, has the swivel loop between the ends.
Multibranch assemblies are used for quick-opening adapters, which are
equipped with release mechanisms or time fuzes. The wire is threaded
through holes in the fuze arming pin or vane tab and usually held in

A-SET SCREW D-ARMING WIRE GUIDE

B-COUPLING TUBE ASSEMBLY E-FIN WEB
C-F1N ASSEMBLY F-FIN LOCK NUT RApD

Figure 131. ConicalJin assembly.

179
place by safety clips (Fahnestock). The swivel loop is attached to a
pawl on the shackle. Normally, the arming wire assembly is retained in
the aircraft when the round is dropped so that the wire is withdrawn
from the fuze permitting the fuze to arm. When the bomb or cluster is
dropped safe, the arming wire assembly is released at the same time and
prevents the fuze from arming. The models of arming assemblies au­
thorized for different rounds differ in number of branches and in the
diameter and length of the branches.
95. Fins
a. General. A fin assembly is usually used to stabilize a bomb or aim­
able cluster in flight. Some other means of stabilization, such as a para­
chute unit, may be required by the tactical use of the bomb.
b. Fin Assemblies. Fin assemblies are made of sheet metal. The box­
type assembly consists of a fin sleeve that fits over the tail of the bomb
and is secured by a fin locknut and fin blades fabricated to the sleeve
forming a square box-like assembly. Although more recent designs re­
quire the use of heavier gage steel to strengthen the assembly, box-type
fins are not strong enough for use on bombs dropped from high altitudes
or carried externally on high-speed aircraft. For this use, conical fin
assemblies (fig. 131) have been developed. The conical fin assembly
consists of an elongated fin cone (fin sleeve) and four streamlined blades
assembled perpendicularly to the cone. In some cases, a coupling tube
assembly and fin locknut is used to secure the assembly to the bomb. In
other cases, the fin assemblies are attached to the bomb by means of

Figure 132. Antiricochet device assembled to bomb-sectioned.

180

J
r

. CLUSTER, M!6A> F(
CLUSTER, M29A1 "WITH Qin
[00 BOMBS, FRAG., 4LB, M83
fuzes < bom a. ftrjL >< a®

AIMABLE

HOOK AND CABLE TYPE

RAPD 109455B

Figure 133. Types of cluster adapters.

CO
radial screws or by bolts. For some 100-pound and all larger bombs, the
fin assembly is packed and shipped separately from the bomb body.
The assembly is attached to the body when the complete round is
assembled.
c. Other Means of Stabilization. For low-altitude bombing, some bombs
are equipped with parachute units, in place of fin assemblies, to retard
the fall of the bomb. The unit consists of a closed metal case containing
the parachute and its attachment. The cover is removed by withdrawal
of the arming wire or by means of a hangwire when the bomb is released.
Tail fuzes are generally not used in parachute bombs. A modified (ane­
mometer vane) tail fuze and a fuze adapter are required for this use.
When an adapter and modified fuze are furnished with a parachute
unit, the complete kit is called an antiricochet device (fig. 132). The
means of stabilization used with the 4-pound “butterfly” fragmentation
bomb (fig. 120) is the metal “butterfly wing” assembly described in para­
graph 92<z(6)(d).
96. Clusters and Adapters
a. General. A cluster consists of several bombs that are suspended and
released from a carrying station in the aircraft intended for one bomb.
The mechanical devices required to accomplish this suspension are called
adapters (fig. 133). Adapters are of three types: quick-opening (frame),
aimable, and hook and cable.
b. Quick-Opening (Frame) Adapters. This type consists of a frame to
which several bombs are attached by means of straps, thus forming an
assembly that may be suspended and released as a unit. The straps are
fastened with clamps that may be released when the arming wire is with­
drawn or by the action of a time fuze to provide for delay opening. The
frame is also equipped with a fuze lock that prevents arming of the bomb
fuzes until after the bombs are released from the cluster.
c. Aimable Adapters. This type consists essentially of a streamlined
metal body to contain the clustered bombs, a fin assembly or other
means of stabilization, and a time fuze. The fuze actuates the opening
of the body to release the individual bombs from the adapter at the time
desired. Some models of aimable adapters can be equipped with a
spoiler ring at the nose and a drag plate over the rear end of the fin as­
sembly to alter the trajectory.
d. Hook and Cable Adapters. This type consists of a set of hook and
cable assemblies, by means of which several bombs or clusters may be
suspended from the same station. This type of adapter differs from the
other two types in that it serves only as a means of hanging more than
one bomb or more than one cluster of bombs to a shackle. Once the
hook and cable cluster is released from the plane, all the items (bombs
or clusters) fall freely. The items can be released safe since each item is
provided with its own arming wire.

182
97. Care and Precautions in Handling
The general precautions in a through h below will be observed in han­
dling bombs and components, in addition to the precautions in TM
9-1980.
a. Bombs and bomb components will be stored as shipped.
b. Complete rounds will not be assembled in advance of requirements,
and those rounds prepared for use but not used will be disassembled and
returned to storage.
c. Assembled rounds will be carried with sealing wires and safety pins
in place at all times up to the time of installation in the plane. The
arming wire will remain in place until the bomb is released or the safety
pins and sealing wire are replaced and secured.
d. Packings will not be opened until the items are required for use or
inspection. Partly used boxes will be resealed and marked and will be
used before other boxes are opened.
e. Packing will not be opened, repaired, or replaced within 100 feet of
stored explosives.
f. Fuzes should be protected against shock, moisture, and high tem­
perature. Boxes containing fuzes must not be subjected to any friction
or jarring.
g. No attempt will be made to disassemble any fuze without authority of the chief
of the technical service concerned.
h. Since most clusters of bombs, unlike other bombs, are stored and
shipped fuzed, they must be handled with extreme care. Boxed clusters
must be handled with the same care as boxed fuzes. When a box con­
taining a cluster is opened, the cluster must be inspected to insure that
the fuze safety devices are in place.
98. Packing and Marking
a. Packing. In general, bombs are shipped unfuzed with the fuze holes
closed by metal shipping plugs. Large bombs are shipped uncrated with
shipping bands that protect the suspension lugs. Some bombs, to which
protruding suspension lugs are not assembled during shipment, are
shipped without shipping bands. The very large bombs are shipped on
skids or pallets. The fin assemblies of all large bombs are shipped sepa­
rately in metal or wooden crates, cartons, or wooden boxes. Some
smaller bombs are shipped finned in metal crates. Small fragmentation
bombs are packed in wooden boxes, sometimes with fuzes in the same
box. Clusters of bombs are shipped fuzed in metal drums, wooden
boxes (usually metal-lined), or sealed containers. Fuzes are shipped in
individual sealed containers packed in quantity in wooden boxes. Mis­
cellaneous components such as arming delays, primer-detonators, adapter­
boosters, and vane assemblies are generally packed in wooden boxes.
b. Marking. Wherever appropriate, the color scheme used for painting
the bombs (par. 10a(2)) is used on the packing boxes or crates. All in-

183
co

GROUND IINCHES |
B—SIGNAL, FLASH AND SOUND, M74
C—SIGNAL, DISTRESS, 2 STAR, AN-M75
.(SIGNAL, GROUND, STAR AND SMOKE, M125 THROUGH M130 AND
(SIGNAL, DISTRESS, RED STAR, PARACHUTE MI3I

F—SIGNAL, GROUND, HIGH BURST RANGING, M27A1BI

G— SIGNAL, GROUND (GRENADE LAUNCHER TYPE)
N—FLARE, AIRPORT, M76

AIRCRAFT
4 (SIGNAL, AIRCRAFT, SINGLE STAR, DOUBLE STAR,
A JAND TRACER DOUBLE STAR

D CARTRIDGE, PHOTOFLASH, Ml 12
K
H—MARKER, SLICK, AN-M59
J__FLARE, AIRCRAFT, PARACHUTE, M9A1

K—FLARE, TOW-TARGET, M50

L—FLARE, TOWED, M77, M78, M79
M—FLARE, AIRCRAFT, PARACHUTE, M8A1
P—FLARE, AIRCRAFT, PARACHUTE, M26AI

Figure 134. Military pyrotechnics — types and comparative sizes.

INITIATOR PROPELLING DELAY EXPELLING PYROTECHNIC
CHARGE ELEMENT CHARGE COMPOSITION

RA PD 113308A

Figure 135. Representative ignition train for pyrotechnics.

formation for identification and directions for shipping are marked on

containers for bombs and components and on the bomb bodies when no
container is used.

Section V. PYROTECHNICS

99. General
a. Definition. Military pyrotechnics (fig. 134) are items of ammuni­
tion used in military operations for producing light for illumination,
smokes or lights for signaling, or sound to simulate battle noises and ef­
fects in training. For detailed information on military pyrotechnics, see
TM 9-1981. Illuminating and colored smoke grenades, illuminating
and colored smoke artillery shell, and photoflash and target-identifica­
tion bombs are described in other publications and referred to in para­
graph 102c.
b. Complete Round. Pyrotechnics are usually issued in the form of com­
plete rounds, each consisting of all the elements necessary for functioning.
Large aircraft pyrotechnics, as in the case of photoflash and target-identi­
fication bombs, are issued separately and fuzes therefor, also issued
separately, are fitted in the field. These fuzes are of the mechanical­
time, nose, delay-arming type (pars. 90-98).
c. Ignition Train. Pyrotechnics generally function by means of an
"ignition train” (fig. 135), similar to the “explosive train” of other am­
munition. The train is initiated by means of a primer, which may be of
the percussion, friction, or electric type. The flame produced on initia­
tion is transmitted successively to a propelling charge delay element,
expelling charge, and finally to the pyrotechnic composition. One or
more of the intermediate elements between initiator and pyrotechnic
composition may be omitted depending upon the requirements of the
pyrotechnic.
d. Pyrotechnic Compositions.
(1) In general, pyrotechnic compositions consist of physical mix­
tures of various combinations as described in (a) through (r)
below.
(a) Oxidizers such as chlorates, perchlorates, peroxides, chro­
mates, and nitrates that provide some oxygen for burning.
Pyrotechnic compositions may not always contain sufficient
185
oxygen for burning and, in such cases, must use oxygen from
the air.
(/>) Fuels, such as aluminum and magnesium powder, their alloys,
sulfur, lactose, and other easily oxidizable materials.
(c) Binders and waterproofing agents, such as asphalt, shellac, lin­
seed oil, resins, resinates, and paraffin.
(</) Organic dyes or inorganic salts are used to produce colored
smokes.
(e) Color intensifiers, such as polyvinyl chloride, hexachlor ben­
zene, and other organic chlorides. In some cases, a single
material may perform more than one of the functions in (a)
through (<f) above.
(2) Pyrotechnic smoke compositions are of two general types.
(а) Those that burn with practically no flame but with the forma­
tion of a dense colored smoke as a product of combustion.
(б) Those that burn at a temperature so low that an organic dye
((1) (a) above) in the composition will only volatilize rather
than burn and hence will color the smoke.
e. Identification. In addition to the means of identification as described
in paragraphs 4 through 13, signal types are marked with colored bands
or patches to indicate the color of the signal produced. The top of a
launcher-type ground signal is painted the color of the signal and is also
marked with two embossed letters for identification in the dark. The
first letter is the initial of the color. The second letter indicates the type,
“P” for parachute or “S” for star (fig. 13). Overage flares and those of
substitute composition, assigned to training, have a 2-inch blue band
stenciled around the body; they may also be stenciled “FOR TRAIN­
ING USE ONLY.” For the information of those installing the flare
M8A1 in airplanes, the word “FRONT” is stenciled on the front of the
case, and the location of suspension bands is indicated by black bands
painted on the case. Guide flares have a patch on the closing cover in­
dicating the color of the flare. Embossed points at the center of the
patch permit identification in the dark. One, two, or three embossed
points identify the T6E1 (white), T7E1 (red),orT8El (green), respectively.
f. Projection. Mechanical equipment, mounted in an airplane, or a
pyrotechnic pistol is usually required to launch or project aircraft pyro­
technics. Signals that are fired from the ground are projected as indi­
cated in (1) through (5) below.
(1) Pyrotechnic projector or pistol.
(2) Grenade launcher (FM 23-30) attached to a small-arms rifle or
carbine, each using a special blank cartridge. Only the caliber
.30 rifle grenade cartridge M3 is used when firing ground sig­
nals from rifles, and only the caliber .30 carbine grenade car­
tridge M6 is used when firing ground signals from carbines.
Caution: Neither regular blank cartridges nor bulleted car­
tridges will be used in connection with firing signals.
186
(3) Hand-held.
(4) Hand-held expendable launcher that forms part of the signal
assembly for rocket-assisted signals (par. 108fe(2)).
(5) Manually operated (lanyard-type) ground signal projector
mounted on a staff-like support that is anchored to the ground
by a spike.
(6) Some simulators burn in place; others are thrown by hand. The
white smoke puff charge is fired from a smoke puff discharger;
powder from the charge, which is ignited by a smoke puff per­
cussion cap, serves as the propellant. The gunflash simulator
is fired from a steel firing tube imbedded in earth or sand bags.

100. Classification
Pyrotechnics are classified according to purpose as illuminants, signals,
and simulators; and, according to use, as aircraft and ground.

101. V:sibility
a. Tne principal factors controlling the visibility of pyrotechnics are
design, position, and natural conditions of light and atmosphere.
(1) Factors of design include luminous intensity (candlepower); color
(hue and degree of color saturation); and degree of separation
of a composite signal.
(2) Factors of position include height at which the flare or signal
functions; distance of observer from signal; distance of flare
from objective to be illuminated; background; and relative
position of flare, objective, and observer.
(3) Natural conditions of light and atmosphere are influenced by
degree of natural illumination; color and brightness of the sky;
and clarity of the atmosphere as affected by presence of haze,
fog, dust, smoke, rain, or snow.

Table IV. Pyrotechnic Types and Candlepower

Type Candlepower

Trip flare or tow target________ 50,000.

Illuminating projectile____ 300,000 to 1,000,000.
Airport flare, fusees___________ 60,000.
Aircraft parachute____________ 60,000—750,000—900,000.
Reconnaissance and landing.- 800,000.
Photoflash cartridge___ ... _ . 120,000,000 peak—duration 0.03 second.
Photoflash bomb-.. 80,000,000 candle—second for optimum 0.040
second.*
Signals—white________________ 50,000 for 20 to 30 seconds.
green__ 5,000 for 20 to 30 seconds.
amber_______________ 4,000 for 20 to 30 seconds.
red__________________ 20,000 for 20 to 30 seconds.

*3,000,000,000 to 4,000,000,000 candlepower at peak.

187
h. A table of pyrotechnic technical data pertaining to specific items is
published in TM 9-1981. Tables of factors including candlepower of
specific items and optimum height, area illuminated, and distance for pyro­
technic suitable for battlefield illumination are published in TC 30 (1952),
pending revision of the pertinent field manual. Table IV shows candle­
power of various types.
102. Types
a. General. Types of pyrotechnics (fig. 134) consist of flares, signals,
photoflash cartridges, and items designed for various kinds of training in
the use of pyrotechnics.
b. Purposes. Flares are designed to provide a strong light for an appre­
ciable period to illuminate terrain for various air and ground tactical
operations. Types of flares consist of aircraft flares (projected from air­
craft), ground flares (operated on, or projected from, the ground), guide
flares, and ignition flares. Signals are designed for both aircraft and
ground use for various types of signaling in tactical and protective opera­
tions. Photoflash cartridges are designed for use in connection with
aerial photography at 500 to 8,500 feet during reconnaissance missions.
Pyrotechnic training items are designed to provide targets for antiaircraft
gunnery practice and to provide devices that simulate ammunition items
in order to accustom troops to combat conditions.
c. Pyrotechnic Compositions in Illuminating and Signaling Grenades, Artillery
Shell, and Bombs. Grenades using pyrotechnic compositions are designed
for illumination or signaling in nearby combat areas; for detailed infor­
mation pertaining to these grenades, see paragraphs 64 through 70 and
FM23-30. Artillery shell using pyrotechnic compositions are designed
for use in lighting and signaling in the area of distant objectives; for in­
formation pertaining to these shell, see paragraphs 71 through 89 and TM
9—1901. Photoflash bombs, which use pyrotechnic compositions, are de­
signed to produce light for high-altitude (up to 50,000 ft.) night photog­
raphy; for information pertaining to these bombs, see paragraphs 90
through 98 and TM 9-1980. Target-identification bombs, which use
pyrotechnic composition, are designed for use in identifying targets for
bombing groups; for information pertaining to these bombs, see para­
graphs 90 through 98 and TM 9-1980.
103. Aircraft Flares
Flares for aircraft use furnish illumination for reconnaissance, observa­
tion, bombardment, landing, and practice firing for antiaircraft guns.
These flares produce a white or yellow-white light of 60,000 to 1,000,000
candlepower for periods ranging from 1 to 3 minutes depending on the
design of the particular model. They are generally parachute supported
to retard their speed of fall and thus provide a longer interval of illumi­
nation. The flares have some form of delayed ignition to insure their
clearing the plane as they descend to a specified altitude before starting
188
——i5,.bSr
ALUMINUM (MARKING IN BLACK)

DESCRIPTIVE NOMENCLATURE
INCLUDING MODEL NUMBER ORDNANCE INSIGNIA

FLARE. AIRCRAFT
PARACHUTE. M9A'>

XMONTH AND YEAR OF MANUFACTURE

AMMUNITION LOT NUMBER
INCLUDING MANUFACTURER'S INITIALS
MODEL NUMBER AND TYPE OF AMMUNITION

AMMUNITION LOT NUMBER |

INCLUDING MANUFACTURER'S INITIALS!

RA PD 149605 —1.48 MAX—-1

Figure 136. Flare, aircraft, parachute, M9A1.

189
50 MAX

Figure 137. Flare, aircraft, parachute, M26A1.

CLAHF TOW Tarcft M5C

LOT '44u (
. MAY.1943 .
P. A. 1
......... 22 8 MAX- -........... -............................ ................
--- -- GRAY . ......... —.................. ........... .....
RARD 212769

Figure 138. Flare, tow-target, M50.

to burn. Flares intended for use in connection with bombardment are

provided with umbrella-type shades to shield the bombardier from the
glare. A representative aircraft flare is the parachute flare M9A1 (fig.
136), which is used for reconnaissance. It is fired from pyrotechnic pis­
tol AN-M8 or projector M9 and after a 2*/2-second delay, during which
it drops clear of the airplane, ejects a parachute and ignited candle that
burns about 1 minute at 60,000 candlepower. Another representative
type of aircraft flare is parachute flare M26A1 (fig. 137), used to illumi­
nate a target for night bombing. The flare is released from a rack in the
airplane; a variable time fuze may be set so that the flare will drop 300
to 12,000 feet where the flare ignites and burns up to 3'/2 minutes with
800,000 candlepower. “Towed” flares are used as assembly markers in
flight formations; the towed flares M77 (red), M78 (amber), and M79
(green) differ only in color, candlepower, and hence visibility. “Tow­
target” flares are towed by an airplane at the end of a steel cable and
provide a target for day and night antiaircraft practice firing. The M50
is shown in figure 138.
104. Ground Flares
Flares for ground use are designed for illumination of airplane land­
ings at emergency fields, for lighting airports in case of power failure, c>r
190
Figure 139. Flare, trip, parachute, M48.

191
Ill

Figure 140. Flare, trip, M49.

192
to warn of attempted infiltration by enemy troops. Certain ground flares
such as fusees may be used as recognition signals. Representative ground
flares are—
a. The airport flare M76, which is a 20-pound cylindrical charge of
illuminant (candle) encased in a zinc-sheathed box-board tube fitted with
means of ignition, which burns with a yellow flame visible for 5 to 7 min­
utes at a distance of 20 to 30 miles depending upon atmospheric condi­
tions.
b. The red fusee M72, which is a 20-minute “red-fire” candle for use
in outlining airport boundaries.
c. The parachute trip flare M48 (fig. 139), which outwardly resembles
the antipersonnel mine M2 series and is set to be actuated by, and thus
serve as a warning of the approach of, infiltrating enemy troops.
d. The trip flare M49 (fig. 140), which resembles an offensive hand gre­
nade and is used for booby trapping. For operation of booby traps, see
FM 20-32.

F ' - -----

MODEL OF FLARE
[Link],
u [Link] COLOR OF FLARE
<
co PA-E-144^ LOT NUMBER
Q£ > z
o
12-4D-? > MONTH AND
< <- < YEAR LOADED

OS
< > WATERPROOF
5
' TAPE

I MALE CONNECTOR
I (SHOWN 90 OUT
i OF POSITION)
SCREW HOLES FUZING BLOCK
RA PD 116888A

Figure 141. Flare, guide, 1 minute, T6E1 (white).

408374 O -56 -14 193

GRAY (MARKING IN BLACK)

-------------- 8.25 MAX----------------

------------------------------- ■------ GRAY (MARKING IN BLACK)---------------- ■---------- *-

................ -........ . ..... . .... g. MAX—----- - ----------------------------------

jeon ' -j _; _

RA PD 116906

Figure 142. Flare, igniting, Ml 13, 90-second, and flare, igniting, Ml 14, 45-second.

105. Guide Flares

Guide flares are electrically ignited and are intended for use with
bombs. The guide flares T6E1 (white) (fig. 141), T7E1 (red), and T8E1
(green) are similar, except for color and candlepower of light produced
and marking. They burn for 45 to 60 seconds and produce 650,000,
700,000, and 900,000 candlepower, respectively.
106. Igniting Flares
Igniting flares are a special type of electrically ignited flare used to ignite
fuel-air mixtures in ram-jet engines of guided missiles. The flares con­
tain a pyrotechnic composition that releases sufficient heat to maintain
ignition of the fuel-air mixtures for a length of time dependent upon the
model of flare used. The igniting flare Ml 13 (fig. 142) is issued with
nominal burning times of 45 and 90 seconds. The igniting flare Ml 14
has a nominal burning time of 45 seconds. Igniting flares Ml32 through
M135 have burning times of 90, 16, 10, and 20 seconds, respectively.
107. Tracking Flares
Tracking flares are a special type of flare for use in the tracking of guided
missiles. The tracking flares 75-second Ml36 (T131) and the 95-second
M137 (T132) have nominal burning times as indicated, with 70,000 and
150,000 candlepower output, respectively.
108. Signals
Pyrotechnic signals are designed to produce: light of various intensities,
duration, and color; smoke of various colors and densities; sound of vari­
ous degrees of loudness; or any combination of these. Signals may con­
sist of a single parachute-supported “star” or a number of free-falling
194
YELLOW
t w - SIGNAL, AIRCRAFT, AN-M4I■’ A1
DOUBLESTAR
i W iJm
•

i 0
MAR. >94.?

SIGNAL, AIRCRAFT, DOUBLE-STAR, AN-M42A1

SIGNAL, AIRCRAFT, TRACER, DOUBLE-STAR, AN-MS3A1

RAPO 108J90A

Figure 143. Aircraft signals.

stars or clusters of various colors. Smoke signals are usually of the slow-
burning type designed to leave trails of smoke. For complete information
on signals, see TM 9-1981. For a guide to the employment of pyrotech­
nic illuminating devices, see TC 30 (1952), pending revision of the
pertinent field manual.
a. Tactical Aircraft Signals. Aircraft signals (fig. 143) used directly in

195
1

Figure 144. Signal, distress, two star, red, AN-M75 (T49).

connection with combat operations were originally intended for signaling

air-to-air or air-to-ground, but since the introduction of pyrotechnic pis­
tol AN-M8 and the hand pyrotechnic projector M9, aircraft signals have
been used by ground troops for ground-to-ground and ground-to-air sig­
naling. Single-star signals, double-star signals, and tracer-double-star
signals contain green, red, or yellow candles of pyrotechnic composition.
Stars may be distinguished at distances up to about 5 miles at night and
2 to 3 miles in daylight. Total burning time is 7 to 13 seconds for both
single- and double-star signals. For the tracer-double-star signals, the
tracer burns for 2'/2 to 4 seconds and each star burns for 3 to 4% seconds.
b. Distress Signals. Distress signals for daytime use produce smoke, those
for night use produce a light or stars, and those for either day or night
produce both smoke and light. Signals, flares, other pyrotechnics or
smoke grenades may also be used for distress signaling. Signals intended
primarily for distress signaling are hand-held self-contained units.
(1) A representative two-star distress signal is the AN-M75 (fig.
144) , which ejects two red stars, one after the other. It is used
at sea from boats or life rafts. The stars, which are projected
to a height of 100 to 250 feet, burn for 4 to 6 seconds and can
be seen 2]/2 to 3 miles on a clear day and from 12 to 15 miles
on a clear night.
(2) Another representative type is the parachute signal M131 (fig.
145) , which is a ground-type rocket-propelled signal fired from
the hand-held expendable launcher, which forms an integral
part of the signal, as issued. When fired, this signal reaches an
altitude of 1,500 feet and produces a parachute-supported sin­
gle red star that burns for 30 seconds and is identifiable at dis­
tances up to 30 miles.
(3) The hand smoke distress signal AN-MK 1 Mod 1 (fig. 146) is
for daytime use. When ignited, the signal burns for approxi­
mately 18 seconds while being held in the hand, producing a
brilliant orange smoke.
(4) The distress signal AN-MK 13 Mod 0 represents the “day and
night” type.
196
Df’/TRES? ar?
FA«ACHU ft T Mi3i t footh

INSTRUCTIONS TO REMOVE SIGNAL

Hold container firmly in one hand, grasp pull ring and tear
strip, and break seal around entire circumference. Remove
cap-

-.. • ;...... • ■ ; — 9-3/4 JN--- :................. ..........

SIGNAL AS ISSUED

RO I A T I .'A, 4K

r—/
, i.-|no; [Link]’, am /
V-J.T AWA r0 RIO/,' ST/.K/R.
SIGNAL READY FOR FIRING
(CONTAINER AND CLOSING COVERS REMOVED) RA PD I 170508
197

Figure 145. Signal, distress, red star, parachute, M131 (T66E1).

PAPER CAP

Figure 146. Signal, distress, smoke, hand, AN-MK 1 MOD 1.

198
c. Drift Signals, Markers, and “Lights.”
(1) These pyrotechnic devices are used by aircraft over water as an
aid to navigation by providing a stationary reference point for
determination of drift of an airplane. They are also used to
mark the location of a submarine or other object tor the atten­
tion of surface vessels, for determining the wind direction before
landing an airplane, or to mark the location of the surface for
emergency landing at night. The signals contain a pyrotech­
nic candle that ignites on impact with the surface of the water
and floats, nose down, emitting flame and smoke from the tail.
One type of marker produces a slick on the water surface.
The other types, which produce smoke and flame, are called
“night drift signals” or “aircraft float lights.” Drift signals and
markers are thrown overboard from an aircraft.
(2) The slick marker AN-M59, which is for daytime use, contains a
2'/4-pound cylinder of uramine, a soluble dye salt, in a brittle
plastic case. The marker, although not a pyrotechnic, has a
somewhat similar effect. It produces a colored film or slick on
the surface when the case is shattered by impact with water.
The yellowish green fluorescent slick produced by the uramine
is approximately 20 feet in diameter. The slick persists for at
least 2 hours and can be seen at a range of 10 miles from an
altitude of 3,000 feet.
(3) The night drift signal AN-MK 4 (fig. 147) is a torpedo-shaped
item consisting of a hemispherical metal nose that contains a
water impact fuze, a wooden body, and a metal tail fin assem­
bly. The body contains one single-unit candle that produces
flame and white smoke while burning. The signal burns for
180 to 210 seconds and produces 800 candlepower. The flame
can be seen on a clear night at a distance of 9 to 11 miles and
during the day its visibility is 6 to 7 miles.
(4) The night drift signal AN-MK 5 Mod 1 (fig. 147) is similar to
the AN-MK 4 ((3) above) except that it has a flat nose and a
longer body. The body contains a three-unit candle that
burns for 720 to 900 seconds, producing 650 candlepower.
The effects and visibility are similar to those of the AN-MK 4.
(5) The aircraft float light AN-MK 6 Mod 2 (fig. 148) provides a
long-burning surface marker for night or day use. A pull-type
igniter is located in the tail of the body. The “light” may be
launched from surface vessels as well as aircraft. The candles
burn successively, producing flame and dense grayish-white
smoke for 1 hour.
d. Ground Signals.
(1) Flash and sound signals are intended to simulate airbursts of artil­
lery fire for training troops. The flash and sound signal M74
(fig. 149) is fired from the pyrotechnic pistol AN-M8. On
199
Figure 147. Signal, drift, night, AN-MK 4 and signal, drift, night, AJ\-MK 5 MOD 1.

200
Figure 148. Light, float, aircraft, AN-MK 6 MOD 2.

201
being fired, a percussion primer ignites a propelling charge that
ignites a delay fuse. An inner case containing a bursting
charge is propelled approximately 150 feet before it bursts with
a bright flash and loud noise.
Caution: The hand pyrotechnic projector M9 will not be
used to fire flash and sound signal M74 because of the danger
of a malfunction.
(2) High burst ranging signals are used to simulate the air burst of an
artillery shell in ranging practice.
(a) SIGNAL, ground, high burst ranging, M27 (fig. 150) is fired
from ground signal projector M1A1. The signal assembly
rises to a height of approximately 650 feet before the signal
bursts, producing a puff of smoke.
(/>) SIGNAL, ground, high burst ranging, M27A1B1 (fig. 151)
is a signal M27 modified to adapt it for projections from a
grenade launcher attached to a caliber .30 rifle or carbine.
The signal rises to a height of approximately 700 feet before
it bursts. The burst is accompanied by a flash, a puff of
gray smoke, and a noise that can be heard for a distance of
at least 2,000 yards. In daytime, the flash and smoke can
be seen at distances up to 3,500 yards.
(3) Grenade-launcher-type ground signals (fig. 13) are projected by
means of grenade launchers attached to a caliber .30 rifle or
carbine, using special blank cartridge, which is the standard
grenade cartridge. A propelling charge in the signal supple­
ments the cartridge, supplied with the signal, to attain the re­
quired altitude. The signal rises to a height of 600 to 700 feet
where the signal functions according to type.
(a) The parachute-supported star ground signal produces a single
202
M5CRIPT1 VE NOMENCLATUSe
INCLUDING MODEL NUMBER

ORDNANCE INSIGNIA

SIGNAL. GROUND.

HIGH BURST RANGING, M27

7803
-NOV 1344

MANUFACTURER'S INITIALS

— DATE MANUFACTURED

■. .. .. ammunition lot number

ALUMINUM (MARKING IN BLACK ( —

... -........ 3.82 MAX ................... -.. —

RA PD 1 49606

Figure 150. Signal, ground, high burst ranging, M27.

203
SIGNAL, G S O U N D
WHITE STAR. PARACHUTE
T 73
to Ol'tN THIS CCHTAINEH

IDENTIFY INl,
ILFTKh
I ■'I r-Kjr..-
metal signal container
Or MEFAL CONTAINER
FIRING CAP
ASSEMBLY
(REMOVED
FROM SIGNAL)
9 83 IN (APRX)

b'JGN AX ,, GROUND
WHITE STAR, PARACHUTE
T73

TO FIRE THIS SIGNAL.

> '• •' • in the loft hand. t><’ . ,p.i hard .

■«;i th the- thumb friref >u>' • i lt» -’ilijxi im’n, w'rit

signal without container RAED 149700

Figure 152. Signal, ground, white star, parachute, M127 (T73).

K>
o
Ul
star that burns from 20 to 30 seconds. The different models
produce amber, green, red, or white stars. Candlepower
and visibility vary according to the color of the star.
(b) The cluster-type star ground signal produces five freely falling
stars, all of one color, with a burning time of 4 to 10 seconds.
The different cluster models produce stars of the same colors
as the single-star parachute models. The parachute and the
cluster type signals are similar in appearance and design.
(c) Smoke ground signals produce six freely falling smoke pellets
of the same color. Each smoke pellet leaves a stream of
colored smoke that extends approximately 250 feet. The
burning time is 4 to 8 seconds. The different models pro­
duce colored smoke: red (M62), yellow (M64), green (M65),
and violet (M66). Violet smoke is used for training or
demonstrations only.
(</) SIGNAL, ground, high burst ranging, M27A1B1, which is a
launcher-type ground signal, is described under “high burst
ranging signals” in (2)(6) above.
(4) Rocket-propelled, ground signals are hand-held, fin-stabilized signals
that have the launching mechanism integral with the signal.
An example of this type is the parachute signal described in
6(2) above. The signals are composed of three main units, an
aluminum rocket barrel, a firing cap with firing pin, and the
signal, which includes signal body, rocket motor, and folding-
fin stabilizing device. The signals rise to a height of 650 to 700
feet.
(а) Parachute star signals produce a parachute-supported star.
SIGNAL, ground, red, parachute, Ml26 (T72) produces a
red star that burns for a minimum of 50 seconds. SIGNAL,
white, parachute, M127 (T73) (fig. 152) produces a white
star that burns for a minimum of 25 seconds. Since the star
produces a light of 50,000 candlepower, the signal is effective
for battlefield illumination.
(б) Cluster star signals produce five free-falling stars. SIGNAL,
ground, green star, cluster, Ml25 (T71) produces green stars
that burn 4 to 8 seconds.
(c) Smoke parachute signals produce a single parachute-sup­
ported smoke pellet. The Ml28 (T74) produces green
smoke and the Ml29 (T75) produces red smoke. Both sig­
nals burn for a minimum of 40 seconds.
(d) Smoke streamer signals emit colored smoke through ports in
the base of the case. SIGNAL, yellow smoke, streamer,
Ml30 (T76) emits yellow smoke, beginning within approxi­
mately 50 feet of the point of firing and continuing through­
out its flight. Green and red smoke streamer signals are
being developed.

206
J
ALUMINUM (MARKING IN BLACK)'
1.57 M A X

Figure 153. Cartridge, photoflash, Ml 12 (T12E4), 4-second delay.

O
o
00

CAP PERCUSSION SMOKE PUFF

MAX
a

TT~ CHARGES, WHITE SMOKE FUFF

F O R L> IS L H /\ R Ci E R
1 1 lLor
fell DIRECTIONS
s LLTTFAK DRUMHEAD WITH FINGER, THEN HOI ."Uto.
i SCHARGE OVER PRIMING HOL E IN CUP OF DISCHARGE^B
f fulHII ‘HimCIHIF P(.;WDIk HA1 POURED IN TO IN ■
| T'‘ HIM IfRITION THEN PUSH CHARGE ALL THE WAI R
..rWDOWN IN DISAHARCER BEING SURE POWDFR PRIM
..Lo-AG'-
agiBl
CONTAINER FOR 5 CHARGE, SMOKE PUFF
RA PD 26737

Figure 154. Charge, smoke puff, white.

408374 O
-
5b
-
13

Figure 155. Simulator, gunflash, MHO, fiber container and firing tube.
109. Photoflash Cartridges
These cartridges are used in connection with aerial photography
during reconnaissance missions and are fired from electrically powered
projectors. Practice photoflash cartridges are fired from the same pro­
jector.
a. A service photoflash cartridge consists of a photoflash charge and
delay fuze assembled in a case that, in turn, is assembled in an electri­
cally primed cartridge case together with a small propelling charge.
(1) CARTRIDGE, photoflash, Ml 12 (T12E4) (fig. 153) is provided
for use at altitudes of 500 to 3,500 feet. It contains 7 ounces
of photoflash powder and has a peak light emission of 120 mil­
lion candlepower. A pyrotechnic delay fuze in the ignition
train delays ignition of the photoflash powder for 1, 2, or 4 sec­
onds dependent upon the particular type fired.
(2) CARTRIDGE, photoflash, Ml23 (T89) contains 1.75 pounds of
photoflash powder and has a peak light emission of 260 million
candlepower. Cartridges with delays of 2, 4, and 6 seconds are
provided.
b. A practice photoflash cartridge consists of an inert solid unit that is
assembled in an electrically primed cartridge case together with a small
propelling charge.
(1) CARTRIDGE, photoflash, practice, Ml21 simulates the Ml 12
(<z( 1) above) and is used as a practice round in the same pro­
jector.
(2) CARTRIDGE, photoflash, practice, M124 simulates the M123
(a(2) above) and is used as a practice round for use in projectors
for the cartridge Ml23.
110. Training Pyrotechnics.
a. Flares used primarily for training purposes are FLARE, tow-target,

RA PD 116910

Figure 156. Simulator, shell burst, ground, M115 (T77)

210
3.56

F~'sjirfVTATbit ’
BOOBY TRAP
WHISTLING M»9

RA PD 131036

Figure 157. Simulator, booby trap, flash, Ml 17 (T80); illuminating, Ml 18 (T81); and
whistling, Ml 19 (T82).

M50, and FLARE, aircraft, parachute, M26 or M26A1, blue band.

The “blue band” flares have a blue band painted around the body for
identification.
b. Signals used primarily for training purposes are SIGNAL, flash and
sound, M74 (par. 108</(l)), and SIGNAL, ground, high burst ranging,
M27 or M27A1B1 (par. 108rf(2)(«) and (6)).
c. Photoflash cartridges used for training purposes are CARTRIDGE,
photoflash, practice, M121 and M124 (par. 1096(1) and (2)).
d. Simulators are pyrotechnic devices designed to imitate the actual
battle sounds, flashes, and lights of service items of ammunition. They
are used in the training of troops for conditioning without being sub­
jected to the hazards of handling live ammunition. The details of pur­
pose, description, functioning, instructions, and precautions are given in
TM 9-1981. Training pyrotechnics are to be handled with the same
precautions as prescribed for their service counterparts. Representative
types of simulators are mentioned in (1) through (8) below.
211
(1) CHARGE, smoke puff (fig. 154), with CAP, percussion, smoke,
simulates the appearance of the burst of artillery shell.
(2) FIRECRACKER, M80, simulates the sound of an exploding
booby trap or land mine and the firing of a rifle or machine­
gun.
(3) SIMULATOR, gunflash, Ml 10 (fig. 155) simulates the flash
and noise accompanying the firing of an artillery weapon or
rocket.
(4) SIMULATOR, shell burst, ground, Ml 15 (fig. 156) simulates
battle noises and effects such as whistle, flash, and report.
(5) SIMULATOR, hand grenade, Ml 16 simulates flash and report
of a grenade explosion.
(6) SIMULATOR, booby trap, flash, Ml 17 (fig. 157) simulates a
trip wire-actuated land mine or booby trap with accompanying
flash and report.
(7) SIMULATOR, booby trap, illuminating, Ml 18 (fig. 157) simu­
lates a trip wire land mine or booby trap with 30-second flame
and report.
(8) SIMULATOR, booby trap, whistling, Ml 19 (fig. 157) simu­
lates a trip wire land mine or booby trap with whistle, flash,
and report.
111. Care and Precautions in Handling
a. General. Due consideration should be given to the observance of
appropriate safety precautions in handling pyrotechnics ammunition.
Pyrotechnic compositions are particularly susceptible to deterioration by
moisture and are of an especially hazardous nature, being more readily
ignited than most types of high explosives. Information concerning the
care to be exercised in handling pyrotechnics will be found in TM 9-1903
and TM 9-1981.
b. Types of Pyrotechnics. The specific precautions in (1) through (4)
below apply to the several types of pyrotechnics.
(1) Flares. Care should be exercised to avoid damage to fiber cases
and rip cords located outside the casing of certain types of
flares. Before the lead wires of electrically ignited flares are
connected, it must be assured that there is no electrical energy
in the electrical circuit.
(2) Signals. Signals with dented, deformed, or cracked barrels or
with loose closing caps will not be used. Signals will be
guarded against a blow on the primer, because such a blow
may ignite the signal.
(3) Photoflash cartridge. The shunt cap must not be removed from
the cartridge until just prior to loading the cartridge into the
projector.
(4) Simulators. Protective or safety devices should not be removed

212
from simulators until just before use. The gunflash simulator
contains an explosive filler similar to that of a photoflash bomb
and requires the same care in handling. The electric squib
used to fire the simulator requires the same care as an electric
blasting cap. When handling gasoline, used to fill the simu­
lator, the precautions of AR 850-20 will be observed. All
simulators that have been filled with gasoline will be fired or, if
not fired, will be destroyed in accordance with TM 9-1903.
112. Precautions in Firing
a. Detailed information concerning safety precautions to be observed
in firing pyrotechnics will be found in TM 9-1981. For regulations in
firing ammunition in training and combat, see AR 385-63.
b. General safety precautions for firing pyrotechnics are described in
(1) through (3) below.
(1) When firing pyrotechnics, extreme care should be taken to fire
them in such a manner that burning material or burned out
signals will not fall on friendly personnel or into boxes of pyro­
technics or other ammunition. Care should also be exercised
when firing through trees or other obstructions.
(2) Projected pyrotechnics (except rocket-propelled ground signals)
may cause heavy recoil when fired.
(3) The shell burst simulator projects burning paper fragments to a
distance of 10 yards. It can ignite dry leaves and grass. The
flash booby trap simulator is dangerous for personnel within 6
feet at time of functioning. The illuminating booby trap simu­
lator produces a flame that will ignite wood or other combusti­
ble material with which it comes in direct contact.
113. Packing and Marking
a. Packing. In general, pyrotechnic compositions are hygroscopic, and
unless they are hermetically sealed, special precautions in packing must
be observed. Hence pyrotechnics are packed in fiber containers or car­
tons, metal containers, or without inner packing, dependent upon the
watertightness of the item casing. The items, either with or without
inner packing containers, are packed in wooden boxes of such size and
weight as to be easily handled by one man.
b. Marking. In addition to descriptive nomenclature, quantity, am­
munition lot number, and month and year loaded, packages offered for
shipment are marked with the Interstate Commerce Commission (ICC)
shipping name or classification of the article, volume and gross weight,
and the Ordnance Corps insignia, or more recently, a stamp showing an
eagle within a circle. The Ammunition Identification Code symbol is
included in the marking when applicable. Packing boxes that contain
“blue band” flares, authorized for training only, have a blue band
painted around the box near one end.

213
214

Figure 158. Representative types of rockets.

Section VI. ROCKETS

114. General
A rocket is a projectile that is propelled by the reaction from the dis­
charge of a jet of gas to the rear. The gas is produced by the burning of
a propelling charge within the rocket. A military rocket, certain types
of which are designated “free flight” to distinguish them from “guided”
rockets (missiles), consists of a head and a motor. The sizes of rockets
range in general from P/2 inches to a foot or more in diameter. Motors
may have the same diameter as the head or may have a smaller diameter
than the head. The head contains an explosive or chemical charge and
a fuze; the head is similar in function to a bomb or an artillery shell.
The motor consists of a tube closed at one end and constricted near the
other end to form one or more nozzles. Motors are of two types, the
solid propelling charge type and the liquid propelling charge type. To
stabilize a rocket in flight, fins may be attached to the motor, or the
“nozzle” may consist of a group of nozzles canted at an angle to cause
the rocket to rotate. The weapon used in firing a rocket is designated a
launcher, since it serves only to give the rocket its initial direction and
does not project the rocket as a conventional artillery piece projects a
shell. The advantages of rocket ammunition are: it imparts no recoil to
the weapon; it does not require a rifled barrel; the forces of setback are
spread over a relatively long period of acceleration rather than concen­
trated in a very short time as in a gun, with the result that light-case mis­
siles of high capacity with fuzes of more fragile construction can be used;
more fire power can be delivered in a given short time using multiple
rocket launchers than with conventional artillery and/or mortar fire; and
the lighter weight rocket launchers can be moved over rough terrain
more quickly to new positions without the need of heavy moving equip­
ment. The disadvantages are that protection is required against the
blast of hot gas from the rear of the rocket and that dispersion is greater
than that of shell of similar caliber. Representative types of military
rockets are illustrated in figure 158. For detailed information and data
on rockets, see TM 9-1950.

115. Classification
a. Use. Rockets are classified according to use (source of launching)
as ground and aircraft.
b. Purpose. They are classified according to purpose as service, prac­
tice, target, drill, or proof. Service rockets are used for effect in combat;
practice rockets are used for target practice; target rockets are used as
moving aerial targets for practice in firing automatic antiaircraft weap­
ons; drill rockets are used for training in handling; and proof rockets are
used for testing automatic launching installations.
c. Filler. Rockets are classified according to filler in the head as high-
explosive, chemical, inert head, or inert. High-explosive (usually TNT

215
or COMP B) rockets are for blast or fragmentation effect. High-explo­
sive antitank (HE, AT) rockets, which contain a shaped charge, are used
for penetration of armored targets. Chemical rockets contain a gas for
toxic or harassing effect (toxic gases in sublethal concentrations) or a
smoke-producing agent for laying a smoke screen. Inert head rockets
are used for target practice; the motor contains a propellent charge simi­
lar to that of the high-explosive and chemical rockets. Inert rockets are
completely inert, both head and motor; they are used for training in
handling.
116. Ground Type Rockets
a. General. Ground type rockets of certain types are used by the Army
and certain other types are used by the Navy. Calibers currently stand­
ardized and in authorized use range from 3.25 to 11.75 inches. Other
calibers are currently under development. The 3.5-inch ground type
rocket is fired, at relatively short ranges, from shoulder-fired launchers,
commonly known as “bazookas.” The 3.25-inch ground type is a target
rocket fired from a special launcher and used as a moving aerial target
for practice in firing antiaircraft weapons. The 4.5-inch rockets used by
the Army are the spin-stabilized type used in field operations for ranges
up to 10,000 yards and are usually fired from multiple-tube-type launch­
ers. The 4.5-inch rockets used by the Navy and consisting of Navy
components are of the shroud-fin-stabilized type, commonly known as
the beach barrage type and are fired from Navy launchers. The motors
of solid-propelling-charge-type rockets usually contain double-base pro­
pellant in single or multiple stick form together with a black powder
igniter and an electric squib. The motors of liquid-propelling-charge-
type rockets, which are constructed along the same general lines as those
of the solid-propelling-charge-type, usually contain one or more acids,
anilines, alcohols, or other agents and appropriate oxidizers together with
means of ignition.
b. 3.25-Inch Rocket. This rocket (fig. 158) is designed to provide a fast­
flying target for the training of gun crews operating automatic antiair­
craft guns. The target rocket M2A2 has a long motor with a yellow
light flare at the nose to provide a night target. The rocket M2A1 is
used for daytime firing and has a distinguishable oversize 3-bladed ply­
wood fin. This rocket is fired electrically by igniter M22 from target
rocket projector Ml. The rocket has a range of 2,350 yards and a
maximum velocity of 645 feet per second. Its flare burns from 20 to 30
seconds.
c. 3.5-Inch Rockets. These rockets (fig. 159) represent the types used in
the 3.5-inch shoulder-type launchers M20A1 and M20A1B1 that have
the contactor latch group assembly, which indexes the rocket in the
launcher and does away with the lead-in squib wires used on earlier
models. These rockets also represent the types used in the 3.5-inch tri­
pod mounted repeating launcher M25. The high-explosive antitank

216
Figure 159. Rocket, HE, AT, 3.5-inch, M28A2.

(HE, AT) rocket M28A2 has the conventional electrically ignited solid
propellant motor with fixed fin and uses the base detonating fuze
M404A1 with waterproofing safety band. The rocket M28A2 has a
velocity of 320 feet per second, will penetrate upwards of 10'/2 inches of
armor-plate, and has a maximum range of 850 yards. The smoke (WP)
rocket M30 (T127E3) has the same general shape, weight, and ballistics
as the HE, AT rocket M28A2 and uses the same type motor and det­
onating fuze; the head is filled with white phosphorus for producing
screening smoke. The practice rocket M29A2 is the same as the HE,
AT rocket M28A2 except that it has cast iron inert head and dummy
fuze.
d. 4.5-Inch Rockets. These rockets are of three types, the fin-stabilized,
the spin-stabilized, and the drill.
(1) The fin-stabilized type is represented by the Navy barrage-type
rockets of which there are the “high capacity” model that
has TNT-filled head designated Mk 3 Mod 0 (fig. 158), the
smoke (FS)-filled head designated Mk 7 Mod 0, and the smoke
(WP)-filled head designated Mk 10 Mod 0.
(2) The spin-stabilized type is represented by the high-explosive
(COMP B) rockets T160E5 and M16A2 (fig. 160); the practice
rockets T161E5 and M17A2; the smoke rocket T162; and the
chemical rockets T164E1, T165E1, and T166E1. The rockets
T160E5—T166 series have longer heads than the M16—Ml7
series, with a nonalloy-type steel motor. This motor has two
bourrelets; is loaded with new-type propellant M16 (T6); and
contains igniter T14E2 with the squib M1A1. The rockets
M16A2 and M17A2 have the older-type head and alloy-steel
motor. The high-explosive rockets T160E5 and M16A2 use
the fuze M81A1, which is an assembly of the M48A3 fuze and
the M24 booster, or the VT fuze M402A1. The heads of these

217
------------------------- 27.81 IN--------------------------
OLIVE DRAB (MARKING IN YELLOW)

> °
[ SAFE TEMPERATURE LIMITS
-20T TO 120-F . z.H

n» m
ZINC PLATED PORTION
STEEL CONTACT RING
END VIEW WITH NOZZLE CLOSURE REMOVED

IGNITER LEADS
-CENTRAL VENT
NOZZLE-INCLINED AT ANGLE TO AXIS OF ROCKET

-ZINC PLATED- _____ OLIVE DRAB______

(MARKING IN YELLOW)

SAFE TEMPERATURE LIMITS

-65’F TO I4O°F

AMMUNITION/
LOT NUMBERS TYPE OF ROCKET
BOURRELET CALIBER AND
DATE LOADED MODEL OF ROCKET
CONTACT RING
FRONT BOURRELET ■—KIND OF FILLER
17.82 IN (DEEP CAVITY ROCKET
HHEAD CONTAINING A
ENO VIEW WITH NOZZLE CLOSURE REMOVED (SUPPLEMENTARY CHARGE
------------------ 12.37 IN------------------
IGNITER LEADS
NOZZLE-INCLINED AT ANGLE TO AXIS OF ROCKET

RA PD 167609

Figure 160. Rocket, HE, 4.5-inch, M16A2, and rocket, HE, 4.5-inch, T160E5.

rockets contain supplementary bursting charges which must be

removed when using VT fuzes. These rockets are usually fired
from 4.5-inch multiple tube launchers of the T66 series (24
tubes) or M21 (25 tubes) types.
Caution: The fuze M48 series with any other booster than the
M24 or any fuzes M51 series will not be used in 4.5-inch rockets
because of their relatively low setback forces which are insuffi­
cient to arm boosters other than the M24.
(3) The drill rocket M24 is used for training in handling and opera­
tion of rockets Ml6 series and T160 in multiple (25 tubes)
launcher, M21 (T123), or in multiple (24 tubes) launchers of
the T66 series. This drill rocket is made up of the same metal
parts as rockets of the M16 series. The motor is “loaded” with
wooden sticks simulating sticks of propellant. The head,
which is inert loaded, is fitted with dummy fuze M73. To
simulate the ignition of a series rocket Ml6, a light glows in
the nozzle of the drill rocket when the firing switch connected
to the launcher is closed.

218
117. Aircraft-Type Rockets
a. General. Several types of Navy rockets are used by the Air Force
for forward firing from aircraft fitted with Navy type post (zero length)
or rail launchers. One type of Navy rocket (5.0-inch high-velocity air­
craft rocket (HVAR)), after replacing the Navy fin by a special Army
fin, is used by the Air Force for forward firing from aircraft fitted with
the retractable jettisoning launcher.
b. 2.25-Inch Rockets. The 2.25-inch forward firing subcaliber aircraft
rockets (SCAR-Navy) (fig. 161), which have a 2.25-inch solid head and
a 2.25-inch service motor, are used as practice ammunition to simulate
the action of the 3.5-inch and 5.0-inch Navy aircraft rockets used by the
Air Force. The trajectory and velocity of the 2.25-inch rocket, which is
composed of the Mk 3 Mod 2 solid head and the Mk 11 motor, approxi­
mate those of the 3.5-inch aircraft service rocket and the 5.0-inch high-
velocity aircraft rocket (HVAR). The trajectory and velocity of the
2.25-inch rocket, which consists of the Mk 3 Mod 2 head and the Mk 13
(mods) motor, approximate those of the 5.0-inch aircraft rocket (AR).
c. 3.5-Inch Rockets. The 3.5-inch aircraft rockets (Navy) are fin-stabi­
lized, using 3.5-inch head and a 3.25-inch motor (fig. 162). These
rockets are used on Navy or Air Force aircraft in forward firing against
light armored vehicles and for penetrating submarines and other light-
armored vessels. These have a velocity of 1,140 feet per second. The
head is a 20-pound solid steel ogival-nose shot. When fired at 20° (or
less) from the horizontal, this rocket has a lethal underwater range of
approximately 60 to 120 feet, depending upon the bluntness of particular
model of head used. Types of head include the armor-piercing and
drill, which have no fuzes, and the chemical (smoke), which has the nose
fuze Mk 155 Mod 0. The motor consists of a 3.25-inch steel tube con­
taining a single inhibited cruciform grain weighing 8’/2 pounds. Inhibi­
tors, sometimes called deterrents, consist of certain types of combustible
plastic material that are coated or cemented on parts of a propellent
grain to control the rate of burning. At the rear of the motor is the noz­
zle, which is sealed with a waterproof closure. The motor, which is
shipped separately, is provided with front and rear shipping caps to pro-
: tect it during storage and shipment.
/ d. 5.0-Inch Aircraft Rockets. The 5.0-inch aircraft rockets (Navy-AR)
J are fin-stabilized, using the 3.25-inch motor (fig. 163). The head of the
; service rocket is filled with TNT and equipped with both nose and base
< fuzes. The motor is the same type as that used with the 3.5-inch rocket
i (c above). The service rocket, which has a velocity of 715 feet per sec-
i ond, is used in Navy or Air Force aircraft fitted with Navy-type post
(launchers against light shipping, enemy troops and bivouac areas, and
(light-armored vehicles. Certain model heads are arranged for VT fuzes
I for air-to-surface firing. The target practice rocket has an inert head
that may be fitted with a dummy nose fuze. The drill rocket is com­
pletely inert.

219
220

Figure 161. 2.25-inch subcaliber aircraft rocket with MK 6 adapter on the MK 5 post launcher.
A
221

Figure 162. 3.5-inch aircraft rockets on Navy post launcher.

222

Figure 163. 5.0-inch aircraft rockets on Navy post launchers.

A—5.0-INCH HIGH VELOCITY AIRCRAFT ROCKETS ON POST LAUNCHERS—
AS USED BY THE NAVY

B—5.0-INCH HIGH VELOCITY AIRCRAFT ROCKETS ON RETRACTABLE

JETTISONING LAUNCHERS—AS USED BY THE AIR FORCE
RAPD 167610

Figure 164. 5.0-inch high-velocity aircraft rockets (Navy-HVAR).

e. 5.0-Inch High-velocity Aircraft Rockets. The 5.0-inch high-velocity

aircraft rockets (Navy-HVAR) are used for forward firing from Navy or
Air Force aircraft against heavy tanks, gun emplacements, bridges, and
supply concentrations. This rocket uses a 5.0-inch motor, which con­
tains approximately 24 pounds of propellant. This propellant imparts
a velocity to the rocket of 1,360 feet per second, which is nearly double
that of the 5.0-inch aircraft rocket (AR) that has the 3.25-inch motor (d
above). The heads used in the service rounds are: the TNT-filled head
(Mk 6 Mod 1) fitted with a nose fuze and a base fuze; the COMP B-
filled shaped-charge head Mk 25 Mod 1 fitted with a nose fuze (com­
plete round consisting of the Mk 25 Mod 1 head and the Mk 10 Mod 5
motor (with JPN cruciform grain) is designated Mk 32 Mod 1); and the
TNT-filled head (Mk 6 Mod 4), which is deep-cavitized to receive the
VT fuze M403 (Navy Model Mk 172 Mod 0) for plane-to-ground (air-
to-surface) firing. Head, motor, and fuze are shipped each in separate

223
ALUMINUM STRIP
IGNITER
PLUG M3

------------- -..... ............... ..

IGNITER WIRE ASSEMBLY

CONNECTORS SHORTING
Cl IP
rnr . rs
lfNCH£H J

Figure 165. Kit, modification, M34, for 5.0-inch high-velocity aircraft rocket (Navy-HVARj

containers in a packing box. The head used in the target practice

round is the same type as that of the TNT service head except that it
is plaster-filled and that it may have a conical nose plug and omits the
base fuze.
f. Modification of 5.0-Inch High-velocity Aircraft Rocket (Navy-HVAR).
When used by the Air Force, this rocket is modified by removing the
Navy fin and replacing it with the Army fin that adapts the rocket for
use on the retractable jettisoning launcher with which certain Air Force
aircraft are equipped. Aircraft so equipped are also equipped with
bomb-arming type controls from which arming wires extend through
nose fuze holes provided. The rockets as used on Navy aircraft post
launchers are shown in A, figure 164. The rockets as modified for use
on Air Force aircraft equipped with retractable jettisoning launchers

224
Figure 166. Intermediate connector being inserted into sockets of double-hung 5.0-inch high-
velocity aircraft rockets preparatory to plugging igniter plug M3 into the socket of the connector.

are shown in B, figure 164. The modification is accomplished by the

use of the modification kit M34 (fig. 165). In order to locate the rocket
lug band M9 in the proper position for installation on a particular air­
craft equipped with retractable jettisoning launchers, rocket modification
tool kit M35 is used. When rockets are “double-hung,” that is, one
hung below another as shown in B, figure 164, an intermediate connec­
tor must be used as a precautionary measure to short circuit the upper
rocket and thus prevent its being fired until the lower rocket is fired.
This intermediate connector is installed as shown in figure 166. Then
the igniter plug M3 is inserted in the proper socket as indicated on the
diagram on the rocket fin to complete the final preparation for firing.
For further information on modification and preparation of this rocket,
see TM 9-1950 and specific instructions furnished with modification kit
M34.
g. 11.75-Inch Rocket. This Navy-designed rocket (fig. 158) is used by
the Air Force in forward firing from aircraft against heavy shipping and
408374 0-56-15
225
large ground targets. The complete round weighs 1,283 pounds (maxi­
mum) and has a velocity of 830 feet per second. The round consists of
a TNT-filled head (plaster-filled or empty for target practice head) fitted
with three base fuzes and a fin-stabilized motor containing a 146-pound
charge consisting of four large cruciform grains of propellant.

118. Igniter Circuit Continuity Testing

Where requirements call for the application of electrical energy to the
igniter circuit of a rocket for testing its continuity such as during manu­
facture, renovation, or preparation for shipment, the testing devices used
must be approved by the Chief of Ordnance. Testing operations will be
conducted with due consideration to the safety of personnel. Areas se­
lected for these operations should be remote from sources of electrical
currents, which might result in accidental ignition of the rocket. Con­
tinuity testing of circuits in rockets in ground launchers immediately
prior to firing or in rockets positioned on aircraft launchers immediately
prior to takeoff will not be done except under authority of, and with test­
ing equipment approved by, the chief of the technical service concerned.

119. Care and Precautions in Handling

General precautions pertaining to all ammunition (par. 12) will be ob­
served. In addition, since some of the explosive components of rockets
have different characteristics from those of other types of ammunition,
the considerations in a through /below should be observed.
a. The composition of solid propellants used in rocket motors is usually
designated “double-base,” a mixture of nitrocellulose and nitroglycerin,
which is somewhat more susceptible to deterioration especially under ex­
tremes of temperature and humidity than other types of propellants such
as those used in artillery ammunition. Therefore, rockets should be kept
in a dry, cool place if possible, never in the direct rays of the sun. They
should not be kept where temperatures are beyond the limits marked on
the rockets and measures should be taken to see that no moisture enters
fuze or motor. Nozzle closures of rockets that have been subjected to
wide temperature fluctuations should be examined for evidence of loose­
ness that may have permitted the entrance of moisture into the motor
where it would damage the propellant and affect rocket accuracy. Ice
should not be allowed to accumulate on any part of the motor, as such
accumulation might cause erratic flight.
b. Assembled rockets (complete rounds) are similar to rounds of fixed
or semifixed artillery ammunition with two significant exceptions: the
first exception is that the propellant (since it contains a proportion of the
high explosive, nitroglycerin) will detonate if the head is accidentally
detonated. This means that the explosive hazard of a rocket is double
that of fixed or semifixed artillery shell having about the same weight of
high explosive and propellant. The second exception is that in the event
of fire, rockets may be propelled over wide areas, therefore, unlike artil­

226
lery ammunition, the range of the rocket must be considered in estab­
lishing danger areas (see TM 9-1903).
c. A rocket motor that is closed at the forward end with a closure hav­
ing substantially the same strength as the motor body (tube) will be
treated as a rocket, because upon accidental ignition such motor would
tend to “takeoff” in the direction in which it is pointed.
d. A rocket complete round should never be placed on the tail, as
this may damage fins or electrical connections. If it is ever necessary to
stand a round on end, it should be pointed nose downward so that on
any accidental ignition it would have a tendency to bury itself in the
ground.
e. At the time of manufacture, rocket heads, motors, and fuzes are
made as nearly waterproof as practicable. Some relati vely delicate items
such as VT fuzes, however, are packed in hermetically sealed containers.
To insure best performance from VT fuzes, for example, they should not
be removed from their hermetically sealed containers until just prior to
assembly to a rocket in preparation for firing.
f. Care should be exercised to prevent ignition of rockets, due to ex­
traneous electrical currents, such as static and induction by electromag­
netic radiation from such sources as high-amperage circuits and trans­
mitters.
120. Precautions in Firing
a. The propellant in most types of rockets burns normally for a short
time after leaving the launcher depending upon the operating tempera­
ture. In some cases of very high-operating temperatures, the burning of
the propellant may be completed before the rocket leaves the launcher.
At low-operating temperatures burning may continue after the rocket has
left the launcher and a phenomenon known as “after burning” may oc­
cur. With all rockets at all temperatures a blast from the rear of the
launcher known as “backblast” occurs. Personnel should not be per­
mitted in the “danger area” (the triangular area directly to the rear of
the rocket) in which this backblast occurs unless protected by adequate
shelter. See TM 9-1950 for danger area of rockets. In particular, eyes
must be protected when firing a rocket at any temperature. Face and
hand protection are mandatory when firing shoulder-launched rockets at
any temperatures below freezing. To avoid injury by possible acciden­
tal ignition of rockets during loading, care should be exercised to see that
the loader does not stand directly behind launcher and rocket.
b. Safe firing temperature limits are marked on each rocket. Firing
at temperatures above the “safe limit” may produce dangerously high
pressures within the motor. Firing at temperatures below the “safe
limit” may cause erratic flight and duds or other malfunctions. Dents
in the motor or bent fins may also cause erratic flight.
c. When firing from launchers Ml8, M20, and M25 series (bazooka
type), care should be taken by the loader to see that the yoke of the con­

227
tactor latches are properly engaged in the unpainted notches or grooves
of the rocket fin assemblies, because if the latch is engaged forward of its
proper place, the rocket may be prevented from being expelled from the
launchers, in which case injury to personnel may result.
d. Care should be exercised in Bring through a screen of brush or
trees, since impact with a branch may deflect the rocket or cause it to
detonate.
e. Misfires or hangfires may be encountered especially under extreme
weather conditions or other adverse circumstances. All practicable pre­
cautions such as protection and inspection, particularly in the case of ex­
posed electric lead wires and connections, should be taken to prevent
such malfunction. It should be noted particularly that misfires cannot
be immediately distinguished from hangfires and that certain periods of
waiting before proceeding with firing are prescribed. References should
be made in this connection to AR 385-63.
Caution: During intervals of hangfire (if any such occur) and while
making an examination of firing circuits incident to such hangfire, the
launcher should be kept trained on the target and personnel should be
kept clear of the blast area.
f. In the case of rockets the components of which are issued sepa­
rately, such rockets will not be assembled into complete rounds in
amounts greater than immediate requirements. Any such round assem­
bled but not used will be returned to its original condition, packings, and
markings.
g. Safety devices will be removed as specified in preparation for firing
but at no other time.
h. No attempt will be made to disassemble any fuze or to remove a
base fuze.
i. Rocket duds, which are rockets that have been fired but the head of
which has failed to explode, must be regarded as being liable to explode
at any time. They will not be moved but will be destroyed in place by
authorized personnel (see TM 9-1903).
j. Instruction sheets are furnished for rockets and kits where operating
details are sufficiently extensive to warrant such sheets.
121. Packing and Marking
Small rockets, that is, 3.5-inch, are packed as assembled complete
rounds in sealed fiber or metal containers that are packed in turn in
wooden boxes. Medium caliber rockets, 4.5-inch, are packed fuzed or
unfuzed as required in fiber containers that are in turn packed in metal
containers or wooden boxes (fig. 167). Rockets of the Navy type are
shipped with head and motor unassembled in one box or components
may be shipped separately. Certain point-detonating fuzes are shipped
assembled to rockets or separately in hermetically sealed containers in
wooden boxes. VT fuzes are packed in hermetically sealed containers
(fig. 168) in metal packing boxes (fig. 169). Base fuzes in small caliber

228
OUTER METAL CONTAINER INNER FIBER ROCKET WITH
SHOWING ROCKET AND INNER CONTAINER nos£ plug
CONTAINER IN FLACE

Figure 167. Packing—outer metal and inner fiber containers for 4.5-inch rocket.

rockets are integral. Base fuzes (Navy type) are shipped assembled to
rocket heads and are not to he removed from the heads. In the case of as­
sembled heads and motors, packing boxes are marked to indicate the
“nose end” because storage requirements are that these assemblies must
be stored in such a position that if the assembled rocket is propelled as a
229
Figure 168. Hermetically sealed container for V'Ffuze.

Figure 169. Metal packing box for VTfuzes.

result of accidental ignition of the propellant, it will be propelled in a di­

rection that will do the least damage (dwg 20-4-613). Dimensions and
weights of shipping boxes and other packing and shipping data are pub­
lished in Department of the Army Supply Manual ORD 3 SNL S-9.
230
Section VII. JATOS

122. General
a. Terminology. The term JATO is derived from the initial letters of
Jet Assisted Take-Off, indicating the first of several uses for which
JATOS have been developed. A JATO, like a rocket, is a device that
produces thrust. JATOS, however, do not have a warhead as rockets
do. The thrust of a JATO results from the reaction of the products of
combustion of a propellant being accelerated to a very high velocity in
the nozzle.
b. Complete Round. The complete round consists essentially of a com­
bustion chamber (body), a propellant contained in the chamber, means
for ignition, and one or more nozzles to control the escape of the prod­
ucts of combustion as the propellant burns. For a typical JATO (fig.
170), the essential components (fig. 171) consist of a chamber (body),
nozzle, nozzle closure, propellent grains, trap, and igniter assembly.
The combustion chamber is usually a hollow metal cylinder closed at the
front end and fitted with a nozzle at the other end. The propellant
usually consists of one or more grains in the solid state. Some surfaces
of the grain may be coated or covered with sheets of an inhibitor, a
slower burning material, to control the burning rate. In some JATOS,
resonance rods are included, which aid in controlling the burning rate by
dampening pressure waves resulting from the rapid burning of the pro­
pellant. The rods are usually suspended from the head end of the
JATO. A trap, grid-like in form and located on the approach side of
the nozzle, may be used to prevent unburned portions of the propellant
from being ejected. Ignition is by means of an electrically fired igniter
(par. 125). The nozzle is usually of the convergent-divergent type, the
streamlined shape providing for nonturbulence and relatively frictionless
flow of the escaping gases. The throat (constricted portion) of the noz­
zle may be lined with a refractory substance, such as graphite. to prevent

Figure I/O. Typical JATO.

231
232

Figure 171. Components of a typical JA TO.

k.
the action of the hot gases from changing the throat dimensions. A
small change in throat area affects the functioning of the JATO by alter­
ing the rate at which the gases escape. Nozzle closures or seals prevent
moisture from entering the JATO and, in some cases, aid ignition of the
propellant by causing pressure to be built up within the chamber when
the igniter is fired. Special safety devices such as pressure release valves
limit the pressures and hence prevent rupturing the chamber. Means
are generally provided for attaching the JATO securely to the unit with
which it is used.
c. Uses. JATOS are used to assist the takeoff of airplanes under un­
usual conditions by providing additional power for a short time either in
the case of a heavily loaded plane or a relatively short runway. JATOS
are also used to assist in propelling missiles. A JATO that functions
only during the acceleration period of the missile is used as a “booster
unit.” A JATO that propells a missile after the end of the acceleration
period is used as a “sustaining unit.” Another use of the JATO is to
carry linear explosive charges into position on minefields for mine clear­
ing purposes. Some JATOS can be reloaded with propellant and ig­
niters, after firing, and reused.
d. Identification. JATOS are completely identified by the standard
nomenclature and the ammunition lot number (batch number) that are
marked on all packings and on the item itself. The standard nomen­
clature consists of the basic noun JATO, the principal characteristics
(type and physical state of propellant and duration and magnitude of
thrust), and the model designation. In JATOS where the characteris­
tics are classified, only the term JATO and model designation are used
in the nomenclature. The symbols that indicate the principal charac­
teristics are explained in paragraph 124. The model designation for
JATOS of Army and Air Force responsibility uses the prefix T, or more
recently XM, for development items and M for standard items. The
model designation for JATOS of Navy responsibility uses the prefix X
for development items and Mk for standard items.
123. Classification
a. A JATO may be defined as a complete self-contained auxiliary
rocket-type propulsion unit having a definite burning time and thrust
and used for applying thrust to some structure or apparatus.
b. JATOS are classified according to the type and physical state of the
propellant used and duration and magnitude of thrust as explained in
paragraph 124.
124. Types
JATOS are identified as to type and physical state of propellant and
duration and magnitude of thrust by a symbol composed of numerals
and letters separated by dashes in the form: 2-CS-16000. The first
numeral in the symbol indicates the duration of the thrust in seconds;

233
the two letters, the type and physical state of the propellant in accord­
ance with the significance shown below; the second numeral, the nominal
thrust in pounds.

Letter Type of propellant,

A................. Acid with fuel or asphalt with perchlorate.
B................. Ball or chopped double base.
C................. Composite (picrate-nitrate).
D................. Double base, cast (may contain composite strands or particles).
E................. Extruded double base.
F................. Furfuryl alcohol with oxidizer (includes all alcohols higher than
ethyl).
H................. Hydride fuels.
K................. Perchlorates, cast with binder fuel other than asphalt.
N................. Nitrates and nitrO-compounds other than those designated above.
O................. Liquid oxygen with alcohol or hydrocarbons.
Letter Physical state of propellant
L................. Liquids.
P................. Plastic compositions (which can be deformed under moderate stress).
S................. Solids (which are not readily deformed at ordinary temperatures).

Thus for the example 2-CS-16000, the burning time is of 2 seconds du­
ration, the propellant is composite (picrate-nitrate) and in a solid state,
and the thrust produced is 16,000 pounds.
125. Igniters
The igniter assembly typically consists of one or more electric squibs
and an igniting charge of black powder or pyrotechnic composition
housed in a container. Leads from the squibs are passed from the ig­
niter housing to an external point where they can be attached to the fir­
ing circuit. The squib contains a heat-sensitive composition that is fired
by the heat generated in a wire by an electric current. The squib ig­
nites the black powder that, in turn, ignites the JATO propellant, either
directly or by means of a booster charge of sheet powder. When more
than one squib is provided in an igniter, the squibs are usually wired in
parallel, so that insurance against misfire is provided. For safety during
handling, storage, and shipment, the igniter leads are shorted to prevent
accidental ignition by stray or induced currents or other sources of electri­
cal energy.

126. Igniter Circuit Continuity Testing

Where requirements call for the application of electrical energy to the
igniter circuit of a JATO for testing its continuity such as during manu­
facture, renovation, or preparation for shipment, the testing devices used
must be approved by the Chief of Ordnance. Testing operations will
be conducted behind appropriate barriers, in areas that have been shown
by tests to be free of sources of electrical energy that might initiate the
unit under test and with due consideration to the safety of personnel and
equipment. Continuity testing of circuits in JATOS immediately prior to
234
firing will not be done except under authority of, and with testing equip­
ment approved by, the chief of the technical service concerned.
127. Care and Precautions in Handling
a. General. In order to insure that the JATO will remain in service­
able condition and to provide protection to personnel and materiel, the
general precautions in b through e below and the precautions specified
in TM 9-1955 should be observed.
b. Mechanical Shock. The JATO or packings that contain JATOS
should not be handled roughly. Such handling at low temperatures
may result in damage to JATO components, in particular to the JATO
propellant, which, if cracked and broken, can cause dangerous pressures
to be built up within the JATO when fired.
c. Temperature.
(1) JATOS will not be stored where temperatures range beyond
storage limits specified for each unit. JATOS should not be
subjected to temperatures beyond the storage limits during ship­
ment.
(2) JATOS should not be subjected to rapid and extreme tempera­
ture changes, since such exposure may cause the propellant to
crack or break, thus causing dangerous pressures to be devel­
oped in the unit when fired.
d. Moisture. Since explosives are adversely affected by moisture,
JATOS and, particularly, separately packed igniters should not be re­
moved from their packings nor should moisture-resistant seals be broken
until the unit is to be used.
e. Storage. JATOS should be stored in a dry, relatively cool location.
Due consideration must be given to the temperature limitations in c
above.
128. Precautions in Firing
a. Preparation for Firing.
(1) JATOS, which are shipped with some components not assem­
bled, should not be assembled in advance of anticipated require­
ments. Those assembled for use but not used will be disassem­
bled and each component will be returned to its original
condition and packings. Care should be taken to insure that
separately packed igniters are repacked in a moistureproof
manner.
(2) Safety devices (shorting wires, clips, and receptacles) will not be
removed except as required for testing and preparatory to firing.
(3) No JATO or component thereof, as issued, will be disassembled
except as specifically authorized by the chief of the technical
service concerned.
(4) Extreme care should be exercised during the installation of the
JATO to insure completeness of mounting and attachment. A

235
JATO improperly or insecurely installed may break loose upon
being fired and will travel at a high velocity in an uncontrolled
and unpredictable flight.
(5) Safe firing temperature limits are marked on each JATO.
Firing at temperatures above the “safe limit” may produce
dangerously high pressures within the chamber. Firing at tem­
peratures below the safe limit may cause erratic flight and duds
or may produce dangerously high chamber pressures caused by
cracks in the propellant that expose greater areas to burning.
(6) The firing circuit must be open (switch off) when the igniter
leads or plugs are connected into the circuit. The leads or
plugs should be connected into the firing circuit as the last op­
eration in preparation for firing.
(7) The JATO will not be fired until all personnel and materiel are
clear of the danger area (b below) or protected by adequate
shelter.
b. Danger Area. When a JATO is fired, a blast of hot gases and flame
from the rear of the JATO known as “backblast” occurs. The blast is
attended by the discharge at high velocity of small missiles such as frag­
ments of wiring, plugs, closures, and unburned propellant. The area in
which blast and missiles occur is known as 'the danger area.
c. Misfires and Hangfires. Misfires or hangfires may be encountered
especially under extreme weather conditions or other adverse circum­
stances. All practicable precautions such as protection against entry of
moisture into the JATO or igniter and inspection, particularly in the
case of exposed electric lead wires and connections, should be taken to
prevent such malfunction. It should be noted particularly that misfires
cannot be immediately distinguished from hangfires and that certain
periods of waiting before proceeding with firing are prescribed. The
specific time interval to be observed for each JATO is given in TM 9
1955 series. If subsequent examination reveals that the failure to fire
was due to a faulty firing mechanism, the defect may be corrected and
the JATO may be reinstalled and fired. If the examination reveals no
defect in the firing mechanism or electrical circuit, the JATO is consid­
ered as faulty. The safety devices must be replaced on the JATO and
the JATO must be removed from the item to which it is attached and
kept segregated until disposed of. During hangfire intervals and subse­
quent examination of the firing circuit, personnel should keep clear of
the danger area (b above).
129. Packing and Marking
a. Packing. JATOS are generally shipped completely assembled; how­
ever, certain igniter assemblies and propelling charges (refills) are shipped
separately. The JATO, dependent upon size and weight, may either be
packed for shipment in a wooden box, wooden crate, or on a pallet.
The specific packing data for each JATO and separately issued compo­

236
nents are published in Department of the Army Supply Manual ORD 3
SNL S-9.
b. Marking. In addition to the usual identification marking, packing
boxes are marked to indicate the “nose end” in order that the boxes may
be stored in such a position that minimum damage would result should
the JATOS be accidentally initiated. For further information on pack­
ing and marking, see TM 9-1903.

Section VIII. LAND MINES

130. General
A land mine is an encased explosive or other material, intended for
placement on the ground or beneath the surface of the ground, and is
designed to destroy or damage vehicles, or to wound, kill, or otherwise
incapacitate personnel, or to contaminate strategic areas. It may be ini­
tiated by the action of its victim, by passage of time, or by controlled
means. Land mines, their components, and ammunition for simulated
booby traps and land mine fire are listed in Department of the Army Sup­
ply Manual ORD 3 SNL R-7. For technical information on land
mines, see TM 9-1940. For tactical information on land mines, see FM
20-32.
131. Classification
a. Use. Land mines are classified according to the use for which they
are designed as antipersonnel or antitank. An antipersonnel mine is a
mine designed to kill or disable personnel. An antitank mine is a mine
designed to immobilize or destroy tanks or other vehicles.
b. Purpose. Land mines are classified according to purpose as service
or practice. Service mines currently being issued are filled with high ex­
plosives. Practice mines are classified as “practice” or “inert.” A prac­
tice mine is a replica of a service mine, having the same features and
weight as the mine it represents. It is constructed to emit a puff of
smoke or make a noise to simulate detonation. An inert mine is an inert
replica of a service mine, used for instructional purposes. A service mine
taken out of the production line before it is filled with explosives is a
variety of inert mine known as an empty mine. No phony mines are
currently being manufactured; however, an improvised object used to
simulate a mine is known as a phony mine.
c. Identification.
(1) In the case of service antitank mines, the designation HE (high
explosive) appears in the nomenclature. Practice mines are
marked PRACTICE, INERT, or EMPTY. Nomenclature is
marked on the items and on the packing boxes.
(2) Mines filled with high explosives are painted olive drab with
marking in yellow. Practice mines are painted blue with

237
marking in white. Inert mines are painted black with mark­
ing in white.
132. Antipersonnel Mines
a. General. Antipersonnel service mines are used primarily to produce
casualties to enemy foot troops. They consist of a small amount of high
explosive, generally less than 1 pound, in a metallic or nonmetallic con­
tainer fitted with a fuze arranged for activation by pressure or release of
pressure, by pull on a trip wire, or by release of tension (by cutting) of a
taut trip wire. Antipersonnel practice mines are issued for practice and
training purposes. The practice mines and associated fuzes are com­
pletely inert or contain small quantities of explosive (usually black pow­
der) or smoke or noisemaking composition to simulate the functioning of
a service mine.
b. Antipersonnel Service Mines.
(1) Bounding type. The mine M2A4 (fig. 172) and earlier models of
the M2 series consist of a short 21/2-inch tube (projector) with
attached fuze of the “firing device” type. The complete assem­
bly weighs 5 pounds. When initiated by pressure on any of the
prongs of the fuze or pull on a trip wire attached to the release
pin ring, the mine projects, by means of a small propelling
charge of black powder, a shell filled with 0.34 pound of TNT
to a height of about 6 feet where it explodes. For use against
enemy personnel, it is laid just below the surface of the ground.
It has an effective radius of about 10 yards and is dangerous at
100 yards. The mine and fuze are painted olive drab, except
for the mine base, which is painted yellow.
(2) Bounding-fragmentation type. The mine Ml6 (T6) (fig. 173) con­
sists of a cylindrical cast-iron shell containing high-explosive
detonators, boosters, and bursting charge with axial fuze well.
As shipped, a hexagonal shipping plug closes the fuze well.
When laid, the mine is fitted with a combination (pressure or
pull) type fuze (M605). The mine is completely waterproof
and can be readily detected with the use of magnetic mine de­
tectors. When initiated by pressure (8 to 20 lb.) on either of
the three prongs of the fuze or by pull of 3 to 8 pounds on a trip
wire attached to the release pin ring on the fuze, the mine pro­
pelling charge projects cast-iron shell upward from the mine
body to a height of 2 to 4 feet, where it explodes. The mine is
laid just below the surface of the ground. It has a casualty
radius of about 35 yards and is dangerous at 200 yards. The
mine and fuze are painted olive drab with markings in yellow.
(3) Blast type. The two-part plastic case of this mine (fig. 174) is
cylindrical, approximately 2% inches in diameter and IV2 inches
high. The upper part of the case contains an integral fuze. A
belleville spring of reinforced plastic, to which the firing pin is
238
LOCKING'
SAFETY

I COUPLING
I BASE
BARKING IN BLACK)

OGNITER
/CHARGE

(BURSTING
j CHARGE
C LO W - <4*------------- OLIVE

BOOSTER
DETONATOR

RELAY
—JL
IGNITER CHARGE
DELAY CHARGE

Figure 172. Mine, antipersonnel, M2A4, and fuze, mine, combination, M6A1.

attached, fits into a recess in the lower part of the upper case.
The lower case contains the relatively small but powerful high-
explosive charge of tetryl and a detonator well. The mine is
designed for laying just below the level of the ground. It is in-

239
240

’ POSITIVE
SAFETY pin
iREASOVE LASTS

PRESSURL SPRING

LOCKING.
SAFETY PINTS

*
■ OB
INNER.
CASING.
— i PF RSI 1i SSI ON
siu | ILGi ii.
Will . FRAGMELSTAJION
'.SHELL iPODYi
DELAY;
CHARGE. :. FRAGMENT AT ION
/ ’.. . , ......
- .(BURSTING CHARGE!
RELAY,. BOOSTER CHARGE
CHARGEi
j »

OUTER.
. .
FLASH!
IGNITER1
CHARGEI

Figure 173. Mine, antipersonnel, M16, and fuze, mine, antipersonnel, M(/)5.
I
408374 O
-5 6 -1 6

"SAFE" POSITION

(DETONATOR
/HOLDER

"ARMED" POSITION
TOP
SAFETY CLIP
(STEEL)
PRESSURE PLATE
(LOADER'S LOT
FIRING PIN (STEEL) (NUMBER
BELLEVILLE SPRING
(DATE (MONTH AND
/YEAR) LOADED
FUZE PARTITION BOTTOM
ASSEMBLY

DETONATOR

TETRYL CHARGE

DETONATOR HOLDER RAPD 149688A

CARRYING CORD
CROSS SECTION
241

Figure 174. Mme, antipersonnel, MM, M14 — integral fuge—top, bottom, and cross section—detonator assembled.
Figure 17:). Mine, antipersonnel, practice, MS (T4), and fuze, mine, combination, MIO (T14)
or MIOAl, practice.

242
tended to produce nonlethal casualties to enemy foot troops.
When the mine is armed, that is, with the pointer turned from
“S” (safe) to “A” (armed) and the safety clip removed, a load
of 20 to 35 pounds on the pressure plate on the top of the mine
causes the fuze to function, releasing the belleville spring that
drives the firing pin into the detonator, thus exploding the main
charge. As shipped, the lower part of the mine case contains a
safety plug instead of the detonator and the mine is set safe, so
that a slotted plastic sleeve restrains the downward movement
of the pressure plate that is also restrained by a safety fork.
c. Antipersonnel Practice Mines.
(1) Bounding type. Inert mines M2 and M2A1 with inert fuzes simu­
late the appearance of the “bounding” type antipersonnel serv­
ice mines M2 series except in color and marking. The practice
mine M8 (fig. 175) simulates the service mine M2A4. The
metal parts of the M8 are the same as those used for the service
mine M2A4 except for the projectile, which is made of card­
board, and the igniter, which contains a delay element to pro­
vide for a delay functioning of the mine 4 seconds after func­
tioning of the fuze. The projectile contains a spotting charge
assembly that resembles a shotgun shell with a delay element in
place of the primer. The spotting charge, when initiated by
the delay element, blows off the top of the projectile and the
mine cap with a loud report and accompanying smoke. In
order that the mine M8 may be used several times, the follow­
ing replacement parts are issued:
(a) Cap, mine (cover).
(ft) Igniter and primer assembly.
(c) Projectile.
(d) Propelling charge.
(<?) Spotting charge.
(2) Bounding-fragmentation type. The practice mine T34 is used to
simulate the MINE, antipersonnel, NM, Ml4.
133. Antitank Mines
a. General. Antitank service mines are metallic or nonmetallic mines
consisting of three types, the plate-shaped heavy, the square-shaped non­
metallic heavy, and rectangular-shaped light. There are three weights
of the heavy mine—the 30-pound mine M15 and the 20-pound mine M6
series and the 28-pound nonmetallic mine. The light type (M7 series)
weighs about 5 pounds. A light antitank mine requires a pressure of 140
to 240 pounds to initiate the fuze, but a heavy antitank mine requires a
pressure of 300 to 500 pounds. Heavy antitank mines are usually not
dangerous to foot troops unless they attempt to run across them. The
light mine is intended for use against light tanks or vehicles. A group of
two or more light mines can be used against heavy tanks. By use of sec­

243
ondary fuze wells and suitable firing devices, antitank mines can be
adapted to antipersonnel use. High-explosive antitank mines are painted
olive drab with marking in yellow. Fuze boosters for main and second­
ary fuzes and booster Ml20 are incorporated in the light antitank mines
M6 series heavy or M7 series, which are loaded with TNT, and used with
the mechanical pressure-type fuze M603. The arming plug M4 is fitted
with an open wound coil spring for positioning the fuze M603 in the
mines M6 series and M15 (T27). Boosters, other than booster Ml20,
are not required in the mine M15, which is loaded with Composition B.
The activator Ml, which has a %-inch thread and can be used with anti­
tank mines M6 series and M15 (T27) for secondary fuzing for booby-trap­
ping (par. 135) (equipping with an antilift device), is essentially a deto­
nator-booster that adapts the mine for any standard firing device. A
firing device in conjunction with an activator constitutes a secondary fuze.
Antipersonnel and antitank mine and fuze technical data, details of con­
struction, and indicated methods of handling of individual mines are
covered in TM 9-1940. Methods of performance and use are covered
in FM 20-32.
b. Antitank Service Mines.
(1) Heavy (M15 type). This mine (fig. 176) is a high-capacity mine
intended for use against heavy tanks. The complete mine,
which is designated Ml5, consists of a high-explosive-loaded
mine body fitted with booster Ml20 and fuze M603 (T17E2)
(fig. 182). The antitank mine fuze M603 functions when the
pressure plate depresses, thereby reversing the belleville springs,
causing the firing pin to be driven into the high-explosive deto­
nator. Activator Ml in conjunction with a firing device (with­
out blasting cap) may be fitted to the mine in either the side or
bottom activator wells, or both, as secondary fuzes, if required.
Secondary fuzes are used for booby-trapping the mine (par.
135). The complete mine assembly weighs 30 pounds includ­
ing the explosive charge of 22 pounds of Composition B. The
mine has a plate-shaped body 13 inches in diameter and approx­
imately 5 inches high. Assembled to the top of the body is a
circular pressure plate 71/2 inches in diameter, containing an
arming plug in the center that covers the main fuze well. The
pressure plate is supported internally against external pressure
by a set of circular belleville springs. The arming plug has a
setting knob that is turned from “S” (safe position) to “A”
(armed position) when the mine is laid. Do not remove the
fuze retainer spray from the arming plug. When preparing to
lay the mine, the arming plug is unscrewed, the fuze (M603),
which will be found in separate hermetically sealed container in
the mine box, is inserted in the fuze well after removing the
safety clip, the arming plug set at “S” is screwed back into the
pressure plate, the mine is laid just beneath the surface of the
244
P. A PL

figure 176. Mine, antitank, HE, heavy, M15 (T27 J—cross section with fuze M603 installed.
245
ground, the setting knob is turned from “S” to “A,” and the
mine is then covered and concealed with dirt or other substance.
As the mine is waterproof, it may be laid in swampy as well as
dry ground. A force of 300 to 400 pounds is required to initiate
the mine.
(2) Heavy (M6 series). This heavy antitank mine (fig. 177) is known
as a high-capacity type but the increase in weight and protec­
tion of modern tanks has necessitated the development of a
more powerful mine ((1) above). The “heavy” mine of the M6
series is practically the same as the M15 except that it is about
one-third less in thickness and has an explosive charge of 12
pounds of TNT as compared with 22 pounds of Composition B
in the Ml5. Activator Ml is used with this mine in the same
manner as with the M15. Older types of the M6 series were
fitted with the old-style reversible arming plug M3 and the
chemical fuzes M600 or M601 with integral boosters but these
have been superseded by the M4 setting knob-type arming plug
and the antitank mine fuze M603 (fig. 182) without booster.
All antitank mines are now shipped with booster Ml20 installed
in the bottom of the main fuze well. In some cases where a
more powerful antitank defense is desired than is obtainable
from a single mine M6 series, a special 8-pound cast TNT
block is used in connection with the mine to augment its power.
The mines M6 series, which were formerly packed in metal
crate M153A1, are now packed in a wooden box.
(3) Heavy nonmetallic (Ml9 type). The recently developed mine Ml9
is a heavy, blast-type mine constructed of plastic material. The
mine is 13 inches square by 3 inches high and contains 21
pounds of cast Composition B explosive. The mine M19 is
fitted with fuze M606, which is also constructed of a plastic
material and is pressure actuated requiring 350 to 500 pounds
for functioning. The total weight of mine is approximately 28
pounds. This mine is fitted with side and bottom wells suit­
able for attaching either metallic or nonmetallic firing devices
for booby-trapping purposes. This mine will cause severe dam­
age to medium and heavy tanks and cannot be detected at any
depth of burial with small metals detectors.
(4) Light. The light antitank mine (M7 series) (fig. 178) consists of
a 3.6-pound explosive charge of tetrytol in a quart-size rectan­
gular metal body intended for use against light tanks and vehi­
cles. A group of two or more light mines can be used against
heavy tanks. By use of secondary fuze wells and suitable firing
devices, antitank mines can be adapted to antipersonnel use.
The complete round consists of the loaded mine body, pressure
plate, and fuze, and weighs 5 pounds. Cover for MINE, anti­
tank, HE, M7 and M7A1, and practice, M10 (fig. 181), is a

246
Figure 177. Mine, antitank, HE, heavy, M6A2, andfuze, mine, AT, M603 (T17E2).
FUZE M603

Figure 178. Mine, antitank, HE, light, M7A2, andfuze, mine, antitank, M603 (T17E2).

cloth sack of moisture-resistant mildew-proof fabric. This cover

is provided for use with light antitank service and practice
mines to keep such dirt, stones, or sand as would prevent func­
tioning from working between the mine body and the pressure
plate. Some limited standard antitank mines M7 series do not
have secondary fuze wells; this mine cannot be used with a sec­
ondary (firing device-type) fuze. Activator Ml is hot used with
antitank mines M7 series, as secondary fuze well will not accom­
modate activator Ml. Hence, if it is desired to booby-trap
this mine, a secondary fuze may be made up of any standard
firing device with a nonelectric blasting cap and installed in the
secondary fuze well. As shipped, this mine has a carrying han­
dle installed in the secondary fuze well. The main fuze well
is in the center of the top surface of the body. The mine pres­
sure plate, which may be slid into the “armed” position over
the fuze, has a steel pad on its under surface that is in position
to exert pressure on the pressure plate of the fuze when the mine
pressure plate is in the armed position. Earlier models of the
series light antitank mines M7 have all been modified by the
incorporation of booster Ml20 so the FUZE, mine, antitank,
M603 can be used. The MINE, antitank, HE, light, M7A2
uses the FUZE, mine, antitank, M603 (fig. 182).
c. Antitank Practice Mines.
(1) General. Antitank practice mines are issued for practice and
training purposes. Antitank practice mines and associated
fuzes are completely inert or contain small quantities of explo­
sive (usually black powder) or smoke-producing or noise-making
composition that make either a smoke puff or a loud report or
248
(M A R K IN G IN W H IT E)
BLACK
4
CARRYING HANDL?
CARRYING POSITION
TOP VIEW

BOTTOM ACTIVATION WILL

BOTTOM VIEW RAPO 116893A

Figure 179. Mine, antitank, heavy, M6, empty—lop view showing arming plug in unarmed
(safe) position and bottom view showing marking.
249
250

13.16 IN MAX
FUZE
ARMING PLUG RETAINER
SPRING BELLEVILLE
SPRING ASSY

3.54 IN
MAX

ACTIVATOR ACTIVATOR
FUZE, MINE, ANTITANK,
PRACTICE, Ml = /PRACTICE, Ml
PRACTICE, M604
FRICTION TYPE
FIRING DEVICE SAND FILLER (LOADED IN FIELD) RAPD 116938B

Figure 180. Mine, antitank, heavy, practice, M12 (T8E1), with fuze, mine, antitank practice, M604.
both to simulate the functioning of a service mine. Inert mines
used for practice and training are painted black and marked
“INERT” in white. Practice mines are painted blue with
markings in white. Practice fuzes are identified by marking
either on the item or, if that is not practicable, by marking on
the packing container. As firing devices, which are used in
both practice and service mines, have a primer in the coupling
base, they are painted olive drab, except the pull-friction firing
device M2, which is black plastic. Special safety rules to be
observed in connection with the use of practice mines are given
in TM 9-1940. Both activator Ml, inert, and practice activa­
tor Ml, which are made of black plastic, are used in training in
activation (par. 135). Activator Ml, inert, which is marked
“INERT,” has a black booster cup and %-inch outer thread.
It is used only with inert mines of the M6 series and the inert
Ml5. Practice activator Ml has a blue booster cup containing
a charge of smoke composition and an n/i6-inch outer thread.
It is used only with the heavy practice mine Ml2, which has a
mating n/i6-inch threaded activator well.
(2) Heavy. MINE, antitank, heavy, M6, empty (fig. 179), is com­
pletely inert and is used with an inert main fuze and an inert
activator Ml to simulate the high-explosive heavy antitank mine
of the M6 series for training. The inert mine M6 is also issued
without fuze or activator to be used in practice with inert fuze
M603 and inert activator Ml. MINE, antitank, heavy, prac­
tice, Ml2 (T8E1) (fig. 180) is used for practice in handling and
laying high-explosive heavy antitank service mines of the M6
type. Except for the smoke charge contained in the practice
fuze (M604), or practice activator Ml with firing device when
used as a secondary fuze, the mine Ml2 round is inerRthe mine
body being loaded with an inert substance. The weight of a
vehicle passing over the mine causes functioning of the main
fuze, which emits a smoke puff followed by a loud report.
MINE, antitank, practice, heavy, M20 is used to provide a
practice mine for the standard mine Ml5. It is identical in
size, shape, method of arming, and method of use as the stand­
ard MINE, antitank, HE, heavy. Ml5. By filling the body of
the mine M20 with sand, through the opening provided in the
mine body, the weight of the mine M15 can be duplicated.
The practice mine M20 uses the FUZE, mine, antitank, prac­
tice, M604 and functions the same as the practice mine M12.
The practice mine M20 is provided with side and bottom fuze
wells suitable for attaching practice activator Ml. Booby-
trapping may be accomplished by fitting a practice activator Ml
with any standard firing device in one or both of the activator
wells provided for the purpose. When initiated, the practice

251
Figure 181. Mine, antitank, light, practice, MIO (T9), with, fuze, mine, antitank, practice, M604.

FUZE PRESSURE PLATE

ALUMINUM FUZE CASE

DETONATOR DETONATOR
[inches^
RAPD I31064A

Figure 182. Fuze, mine, antitank, M603 (T17E2)--showing bottom, top, and cross section.

activator emits a puff of smoke. It is to be noted that the acti­

vator Ml is usable only with the mines M6 series and M15, and
that the practice activator Ml is usable only with the practice
mine Ml2.
Caution: Activator Ml (service) should not be used with inert
mines.
252
RELEASE PIN
RELEASE PIN RING

LOCK I
SAFETY I anchor
CORD

LOADING SPRING

FIRING PIN SPRING

BODY

SAFETY PIN FOR'

POSITIVE SAFETY­
REMOVE LAST I
FIRING PIN

PERCUSSION!
PRIMERS

COUPLING!
BASE

WATER PROOFING)
MATERIAL

CARDBOARD!
PROTECTOR TUBE!

83 C

Figure 183. Firing device, pull type, Ml.

(3) Light. MINE, antitank, light, M7, inert, without fuze, and
MINE, antitank, light, M7A1, inert, with fuze, mine, chemical,
AT, M600 or M601 inert, are used to simulate high-explosive
light antitank mines of the M7 series. MINE, antitank, light,
practice, MIO (T9) (fig. 181) is used for training personnel in
the proper methods of handling and laying high-explosive light
antitank mines of the M7 type. Except for the smoke charge
contained in the practice fuze (M604), the practice mine MIO
is inert. The weight of a vehicle passing over the mine causes

253
the practice fuze to function, emitting a puff of smoke followed
by a loud report. A standard firing device, which includes a
primer but which should not be fitted with a blasting cap in this
case, may be used in the secondary fuze well for simulating
booby-trapping (par. 135).
d. Fuzes for Antitank Mines. The main fuze used with both the heavy
and the light type antitank service mines is the M603 (fig. 182). The
fuze used with the mine Ml9 is the M606. The fuze used with both the
heavy and light antitank practice mines is the M604 (figs. 180 and 181).
The M604 has an integral smoke charge and is the size of the fuze M603
and booster Ml20 combined. Hence no booster is used in the main fuze
wells of the practice antitank mines MIO light and M12 heavy. An inert
fuze M603 may be used with the inert heavy mines M15 or M6 series or
the light mines M7 series fitted with inert booster M120. A secondary
fuze for the heavy service mines Ml5 or M6 series consists of any stand­
ard firing device, for example, the pull-type shown in figure 183 and
activator, Ml (fig. 184). A secondary fuze for the heavy antitank prac­
tice mine M12 consists of any standard firing device and activator, prac­
tice, Ml (fig. 185). A secondary fuze for the light service mines M7 series

Figure 184. Activator, Ml.

254
can be made of any standard firing device fitted with a blasting cap. A
secondary fuze for the light practice mine MIO can be made of any
standard firing device without blasting cap. An inert firing device and
activator, Ml, inert, may be used with an inert mine M15 or M6 series
or an inert secondary fuze. An inert firing device and an inert blasting
cap may be used with an inert mine M7 series or an inert secondary fuze.

0 75 THREAD FOR SERVICE

ACTIVATOR, Ml, INERT

Figure 185. Activator, practice, Ml .for use in practice mine, M12, and activator, Ml, inert, for
use in antitank mine M6, inert.

255
134. Chemical Mines
a. General. Chemical land mines are used by defending forces to con­
taminate important areas with blister gas. The mines are exploded either
by remote control or by trip action, spreading blister gas to hinder and
inflict casualties upon the enemy.
h. Description. The standard chemical land mine is a rectangular
1-gallon container (common varnish or syrup can). Two copper wires
are soldered to one side for fastening a burster. When filled with blister
gas, the can weighs about 11 pounds. For additional information about
chemical land mines, see TM 3-300.
135. Booby-Trapping and Improvisation
a. Booby-Trapping Antitank Mines. A booby-trapping (equipped with
antiremoval device) antitank mine (fig. 186) is one that, in addition to its
main fuze, is fitted with one or more secondary fuzes that are intended
to act as an antilift device and to cause the mine to explode when
an attempt is made by the enemy to remove it. In the case of a heavy
type service or practice antitank mine, a secondary fuze consists of a firing
device and the appropriate activator (par. 133d). In the case of a light
type service or practice antitank mine, a secondary fuze consists of a fir­
ing device fitted with a nonelectric blasting cap. Secondary fuzes may
be fitted to an antitank mine or to another mine or explosive charge laid
close beneath or beside it. The mines or charges and firing devices in
such an arrangement are connected by wires and laid in a manner that,
upon the enemy’s attempt, by his prescribed method of “safe” removal,

Figure 186. Installation of a hoobytrapped antitank mine.

256
to remove the mine his suspicion of the presence of the other mines or
charges will not be aroused but the whole arrangement will explode.
b. Improvisation. All types of land mines are subject to a variety of uses
as improvised mines; in combination with each other, with all types of
explosive charges and firing devices, with bombs or artillery shell, with
fougasses, or with dummy mines.
c. Special Training Required. Laying antipersonnel mines and installing
the many possible types of antiremoval devices, booby-trapping, and im­
provisations are specialized operations that are performed only by well
trained troops.

136. Care and Precautions in Handling

a. General instructions for care and precautions (par. 12) for all types
of ammunition will be as indicated in b through g below. See also AR
385-63 for additional safety precautions.
b. All types of mines must be handled with appropriate care at all
times. As fuzes, primers, detonators, activators, and firing devices con­
tain explosives that are particularly sensitive, boxes containing mines that
usually also contain these sensitive items must be protected against shock,
friction, and high temperatures and grounded to prevent accumulation of
static electricity whenever practicable.
c. Mines are waterproofed for laying in the ground that at times may
become wet. However, mines and components in their packings should
be protected against moisture until used. When it is necessary to leave
a stack of packed mines in the open, they should be raised on dunnage
and covered with a double thickness of paulin, leaving enough space all
around the stack for circulation of air. Paulins should be supported in
such manner as to provide 12 inches of space between top of stack of mines
and the paulins.
d. Packing boxes containing mines or components should not be opened
within 100 feet of any kind of magazine, either for long-term or for tempo­
rary storage, or at any ammunition dump. In unpacking and repacking
operations, safety (nonsparking) tools, those made of copper or wood, if
available, should be used.
e. Safety pins, safety forks, safety clips, and similar devices, which are
designed to prevent initiation of a mine while being handled, must be
left in place until the latest moment practicable before “arming” and
restored when “disarming,” as prescribed in TM 9-1940 and FM 20-32.
f. Mines in general will function satisfactorily at temperatures of —40°
to 160° F. If mines are laid in wet places where the temperature fluc­
tuates above and below freezing, provision should be made for drainage
to prevent water from accumulating around and over mines where it
might subsequently freeze and neutralize them.
g. For purposes of effective training, all rules, regulations, and precau­
tions that pertain to high-explosive-filled service mines should be observed
in connection with the employment of all inert mines used for training in

408374 0-56-17 257

handling and all practice mines used for simulating actual service condi­
tions.
137. Packing and Marking
a. Antipersonnel Mines. The bounding antipersonnel mine is packed
complete with fuze and spool of steel wire in a juteboard or double kraft-
lined board carton. Six such cartons are packed into a wooden box,
which is stained light brown with marking in yellow or, more recently,
unstained with marking in black (fig. 187). The cast-iron fragmentation
antipersonnel mine is packed four mines, four fuzes in individual con­
tainers, and four spools of wire per wooden box, or six mines, six fuzes
in individual containers, and six spools of wire per wooden box. Non-
metallic antipersonnel mines are packed 90 mines in a carton with 90
detonators in a set-up box and 6 wrenches per wooden box. The prac­
tice antipersonnel mine M8 is packed 2 mine bodies and 2 fuzes, with 20
replacement parts, per wooden box (fig. 188). The box has markings in
black, a blue center band and blue vertical end cleats or, more recently,
is unpainted with markings in black.
b. Antitank Mines. The mine M15 series, with one fuze and one acti­
vator each in an individual metal container, are packed one per wooden
box (fig. 189). The mine M6 series, with one fuze and one activator each
in an individual metal container, are packed two each per wooden box.

Figure 187. Packing box for antipersonnel mine M2A4.

258
L

RA PD 116931

Figure 188. Packing box for antipersonnel practice mine M8 and replacement parts.

Figure 189. Mine, antitank, HE, heavy, M15 (T27)—as shipped.

259
Figure 190. Metal packing box M156 for 8 mine, anti­
tank, HE, M7A1, and 8 fuze, mine, antitank, M603,
or 12 mine, antitank, light, practice, MIO, without fuze.

Inert mines M6 without fuze and without activator are packed 2 per
wooden box. The mines M7 series are packed 8 mines and 8 fuzes in a
metal box (fig. 190) or 12 mines and 12 fuzes in a wooden box. Wooden
boxes containing high-explosive mines are stained light brown with mark­
ing in yellow or, more recently, unstained with marking in black. Metal
boxes are painted olive drab with marking in yellow. Inert mines M7
without fuzes are packed 8 or 12 per metal box. The practice mines MIO
(light) are packed 10 mines with 20 practice fuzes (smoke-puff type) in
individual metal containers per metal box, which is painted olive drab
with marking in yellow. The practice mines Ml 2 (heavy) without fuze
are packed two per wooden box. Wooden boxes containing practice
mines are painted with a blue band around the center of each box and blue
cleats on the ends of each box. Both service and practice activators are
also packed, each in an individual metal container, 180 such containers
in a wooden box.

Section IX. DEMOLITION MATERIALS

138. General
a. The term “demolition materials” refers to a variety of explosive
charges of different sizes and shapes, explosive initiating devices designed
for use with such charges, explosive and nonexplosive mechanical devices,
and apparatus such as instruments, tools, and equipment used with the

260
charges for performing various military demolition functions. These
functions include such operations as destruction of earthworks, fortifica­
tions, railroads, dams, bridges, and buildings, and excavation for construc­
tion projects and clearing obstacles and minefields. Certain demolition
materials are grouped into “kits” and “sets” for the convenience of espe­
cially designated military units in performing prescribed kinds of demoli­
tion work or missions and training therefor.
b. Demolition materials, components, auxiliary items, and “kits” and
“sets” for service use and packing data are listed in Department of the
Army Supply Manual ORD 3 SNL R-7. Inert items and simulated
service items for training and packing data are listed in Department of
the Army Supply Manual ORD 3 SNL R-6. For complete technical
information on military demolition material, see TM 9-1946. For com­
plete information on military explosives, see TM 9-1910. For tactical
information pertaining to demolition material, see FM 5-25 and FM
20-32.
139. Classification
Demolition materials are classified as to composition as explosive or
nonexplosive, as to use as service or training, and as to type as explosive
charges, priming and initiating material, demolition equipment sets, and
mine-clearing devices. Types of demolition material are as described in
a through d below.
a. Explosive Charges. These consist of high explosives in various sizes
and shapes used as the main charge in conjunction with appropriate det­
onating devices, as in the case of “demolition blocks” or commercial
dynamite “sticks” for general demolition, or used in the form of charges
for special mechanical apparatus, such as mine-clearing devices.
b. Priming and Initiating Materials. These consist of explosive fuse, cord,
and firing devices, together with instruments and explosive, electric, and
mechanical accessories used to initiate demolition charges.
c. Demolition Equipment Sets. These sets are made up of selected explo­
sive and nonexplosive items with containers and carrying attachments for
the efficient performance of particularly designated demolition tasks.
Demolition training kits are made up of inert items for use in training.
Certain sets and kits are designed for a particular kind of demolition
operation such as mine-field-clearing or for preparing excavations.
d. Mine-Clearing Devices. These are long, narrow, flexible explosive de­
vices used for breaching minefields.
(1) The antipersonnel mine-clearing detonating cable is used for
clearing narrow lanes through antipersonnel minefields and
is propelled by a jet propulsion unit operating on the rocket
principle.
(2) Demolition snakes, which are used for breaching antitank mine­
fields, are designed to be either pushed or towed by tanks.

261
BLOCK. TNT BLOCK, TNT 1-LB

CHARGE, CRATERING

CARTRIDGE,
DYNAMITE
BLOCK, DEMOLITION, M3

RA PD 167587A BLOCK, DEMOLITION, M5AI

Figure 191. Explosive demolition charges.

140. Types
a. Explosive Charges.
(1) Demolition blocks (fig. 191) are 11 by 2 by 2, or slightly larger,
rectangular blocks composed of explosives, usually of the COMP
C-series, which are more effective than TNT in cutting steel.
These blocks are also used in demolition work.
(a) BLOCK, demolition, chain, Ml consists of eight special demo­
lition blocks cast on a 16-foot length of detonating cord with
8 inches of cord between adjacent blocks. Each block is a
paper-wrapped 2//-pound charge of 75/25 tetrytol with a
cylindrical tetryl pellet cast in each end. The detonating
cord is detonated by blasting cap or detonator.
(/>) BLOCK, demolition, M2 is similar in size to one of the eight
blocks of BLOCK, demolition, chain, Ml. It has a threaded
detonator well in each end to receive any standard firing de­
vice with blasting cap attached.
(r) BLOCK, demolition, M3 (2'/4-lb COMP C-2), BLOCK, dem­
olition, M3 (2'/4-lb COMP C-3), BLOCK, demolition, M5

262
(21/2-lb COMP C-3), and BLOCK, demolition, M5A1 (2‘/2-lb
COMP C-4) are all blocks of plastic explosive. Any of these
can be molded by hand at temperatures between —20° and
125° F. and packed into close contact with irregular objects
to produce high-demolition efficiency. Below —20° F., the
explosives become brittle but are not otherwise affected.
Being insoluble in water, blocks of composition C-2, C-3, or
C-4 are suitable for underwater demolition. Initiation may
i be by detonating cord tied in a double knot with explosive
formed into a ball around the knot. The block M5A1 is
safer for use in closed spaces than block M3 or M5 because
of less danger from poisonous gases from the explosion of
COMP C-4.
(2) Nitrostarch explosive is used in general demolitions especially for
cutting and breaching. Its use is similar to that of TNT but it
is more sensitive to flame, friction, and impact. It is also less
water resistant and should be detonated promptly if used under
water. Nitrostarch is issued in the form of a 1-pound package,
which is made up of four ‘/r-pound packages each containing
three square blocks. Each block has a central hole. The
blocks are arranged to form continuous “cap wells” through the
1-pound package, which is primed by passing detonating cord
through one cap well and back through the well at the diago­
nally opposite corner and tying a knot in the end of the cord to
keep it in place. The cord may be detonated at the opposite
end by the 8-second delay detonator M2, the 15-second delay
detonator Ml, or by a blasting cap, which, in turn, may be
detonated by time blasting fuse initiated by fuse lighter.
(3) Trinitrotoluene (TNT) is a powerful high explosive used in gen­
eral demolitions primarily for cutting and breaching. It is rel­
atively insensitive to shock. Although it may not be exploded
by the impact of a single rifle bullet, it would probably be ex­
ploded by concentrated rifle or machine gun fire. TNT can
be burned in the open in small quantities without exploding.
If an attempt is made to destroy it by burning when confined
or if a large quantity in the open is ignited, the mass of TNT
will explode. TNT is insoluble in water and therefore can be
used in underwater charges. EXPLOSIVE, TNT, '/2-pound
block, is in a yellow container 1% inches square and 3% inches
long. One end of the block may have a threaded or an un­
threaded cap well, depending on the date of manufacture, into
which a special blasting cap or detonator can be inserted for
initiating. EXPLOSIVE, TNT, 1-pound block, is in an olive­
drab container 7 inches long and has a threaded cap well.
Blocks with threaded cap wells will receive: 8- or 15-second de­
lay detonation; electric or nonelectric blasting caps with prim­

263
ing adapter; or nonelectric blasting cap crimped to any standard
firing device.
(4) Shaped charges used in military demolition consist of cylindrical
blocks of high explosive having a conical or hemispherical metal -
or glass-lined cavity in one end and a blasting cap well at the
other end. Detonation of the charge travels from the cap well
to the cavity where the detonation wave is “focused” to produce
a high-speed penetrating or cutting jet that will blast boreholes
in steel, concrete, and similar material. Maximum penetration
of a shaped charge is obtained when it is exploded at a certain
characteristic distance, called “stand-off,” from its target. The
stand-off is provided for by a fiber sleeve or metal legs support­
ing the charge at time of firing. See TM 9-1946 for precau­
tions in use of shaped charges. CHARGE, shaped, 15-pound,
M2A3 contains approximately 11 ’/2 pounds of 50/50 pentolite
in a moisture-resisting fiber container. Charges of later manu­
facture contain COMP B with a 50/50 pentolite booster. The
top of the charge has a threaded cap well for receiving a blast­
ing cap and adapter or any standard firing device. A cylindri­
cal fiber base slips on the end of the charge to hold the charge
at the proper stand-off distance. The cavity liner is a cone of
high-density glass. This charge will pierce 36 inches of rein­
forced concrete or in a wall of greater thickness will produce a
hole 30 inches deep and 2 to 3 inches in diameter. CHARGE,
shaped, 40-pound, M3 (T3) consists of approximately 30 pounds
of 50/50 pentolite, or COMP B with a pentolite booster in
charges of later manufacture, in a metal container. The top of
the charge has a threaded cap well for receiving a blasting cap
and adapter or any standard firing device. A metal tripod for
gaging stand-off distance is shipped unassembled with the
charge. CONTAINER, charge, cavity, Mk 2 consists of a
sheet-metal body, a sheet-metal cone, and wire legs. The body
is a small hollow cylinder. The cone fits into one end of the
body to shape the charge of COMP C3 with which the container
is to be packed. The three legs attached to the cone end of the
body provide proper stand-off distance. The loaded container
is intended to open thin-skinned explosive-filled ammunition or
charges by initiating low-order detonation for destruction pur­
poses. The charge is detonated by a nonelectric or electric
special blasting cap.
(5) The explosive cratering charge is a 40-pound charge of ammo­
nium nitrate in a cylindrical metal container. The central sec­
tion of the charge of ammonium nitrate consists of a booster. A
cap well and detonating cord tunnel for blasting caps or deto­
nating cord are attached to the container opposite the booster.
The charge is used for blasting craters in roads and for similar
264
demolitions. It is suitable for blasting frozen ground but not
for cutting steel.
(6) Dynamite, the most common commercial high explosive, may be
one of several types such as straight dynamite, ammonia dyna­
mite, ammonia gelatin dynamite, and gelatin dynamite. These
types are produced in various grades designated by a weight­
strength marking given in percentage. The percentage desig­
nation of straight dynamite is the percent by weight of nitro­
glycerin it contains. In types other than straight dynamite, the
percentage indicates equal strength, weight for weight, with
straight dynamite containing that percent of nitroglycerin.
Since straight dynamite consists of nitroglycerin absorbed in a
porous material that contains other energy-producing ingredi­
ents, increasing the percent of nitroglycerin decreases the
amount of other energy-producing ingredients. Hence the
actual blasting power of the dynamite does not increase directly
with an increase in the percentage designation. Fifty to sixty
percent straight dynamite is roughly equivalent to TNT and
may be substituted for it. This dynamite does not resist water
as well as TNT but may be used under water if fired within 24
hours after submersion. In ammonia dynamite, part of the ni­
troglycerin is replaced by ammonium nitrate. This change in
composition results in less poisonous fumes, less fragmentation,
and less water resistance than for straight dynamite of the same
strength. Ammonia dynamite is not satisfactory for under­
water use. Ammonia gelatin dynamite is a plastic dynamite
that has an explosive base of nitrocotton dissolved in nitro­
glycerin with ammonium nitrate added. It produces less
poisonous fumes than straight dynamite, which it equals in
water resistance. Gelatin dynamite is a plastic dynamite that
has an explosive base of nitrocotton dissolved in nitroglycerin
and which is insoluble in water. Its high velocity, when con­
fined, produces a quick, shattering action. It is used for sub­
marine blasting and blasting in extremely hard rock. Dyna­
mite is exploded by a No. 6 or larger commercial blasting cap,
or by Ordnance Corps special blasting caps. Dynamite is
normally issued in paraffin-treated paper cartridges (also called
“sticks”) packed 50 pounds per wooden box. The standard
cartridge size is IV4 diameter by 8 long. The number of car­
tridges per box varies in inverse proportion to the density of the
particular type and grade of dynamite, for example, a cartridge
of 40 percent dynamite 114 by 8 weighs approximately V2
pound..
(7) The bangalore torpedo (fig. 192), which is made up of high-
explosive-filled steel tubes that may be used singly or joined in
multiple lengths with connecting sleeves, is used for blasting a

265
266
Figure 192. 1 orpedo, bangalore. M l A l.
ASSEMBLED
LUG
ACTIVATOR BUSHING AMMUNITION BUSHING
1

BLASTING CAP
BUSHING BOOSTER CUP
.... I
INCHES. COMPONENTS RAPD 205653A

Figure 19.3. Destructor, high-explosive, universal, MIO.

path through wire entanglements or other obstructions. The

individual tubes, called loading assemblies, may be used as ex­
plosive charges for other demolition purposes. TORPEDO,
bangalore, Ml Al consists of 10 loading assemblies, 10 connect­
ing sleeves (new type), and 1 nose sleeve. The loading assem­
bly is a 5-foot-long steel tube filled with amatol, with about
4 inches of TNT at each end. Total weight of explosive in
each tube is about 9 pounds. Each end of the tube contains a
threaded well to accommodate a detonator or any standard
firing device with blasting cap crimped thereto. An Army
special blasting cap or a commercial No. 8 (or stronger) cap is
required. A firing device may be fitted with an 8- or 15-sec-
ond-delay detonator, concussion detonator, or Army special
blasting cap to initiate the entire bangalore torpedo. Detona­
tion may also be accomplished by a detonator or four turns of
detonating cord wrapped around one end. The connecting
sleeve is a short tube into which the ends of two loading assem­
blies can fit and be held by three spring clips. The nose sleeve,
which is held in place by a spring clip, has a rounded point for
ease in pushing the torpedo through obstacles.
(8) The universal high-explosive destructor MIO (fig. 193) is a high-
explosive charge initiated by means of blasting caps or mine
actuators and standard firing devices. The destructor MIO is
essentially an adapter-booster, with a threaded bushing that

267
CARDBOARD PROTECTIVE COVER
SALT DELAY TABLET
SAFETY PIN

SALT BARREL/ SNAP DIAPHRAGM

PLUG/ PROTECTIVE GRILL

SPACER---------
SAFETY BALL
SHIPPING/ [Syr
PLUGi=pl}-

FIRING

POSITIONING SPRING
CATCH SPRING
RUBBER DIAPHRAGM END VIEW WITH
AS SHIPPED DIAPHRAGM COVER
AND DIAPHRAGM
REMOVED TO SHOW
CATCH SPRING
ASSEMBLY

PERCUSSION PRIMER
“Uv-Tjfsft----------- --
BASE GASKET
COUPLING BASE
AND BLASTING
CAP ASSEMBLY—
AS SHIPPED

Figure 194. Detonator, concussion type, Ml.

safety pin and ring

Figure 195. Detonator, 8-second delay, M2.

will fit 1.5-, 1.7-, and 2-inch standard right hand threaded fuze
cavities. It is used in preparing loaded projectiles and bombs
as improvised mines, booby traps, and demolition charges. It
is also used by disposal units to destroy deteriorated or aban­
doned ammunition. The destructor is composed of a plastic
closing plug, standard priming adapter, blasting cap bushing,
activator bushing, two booster cups (containing tetryl pellets),
and an ammunition bushing. The booster cavities of bombs
and large projectiles should be filled to the full depth by adding
booster cups to the destructor MIO as required.
b. Priming and Initiating Components, Accessories and Tools.
(1) Detonators are of the concussion type or of the friction-igniter
type.
(a) DETONATOR, concussion type, Ml (fig. 194) is a mechan­
ical firing device that is actuated by a concussion wave of a
nearby blast. A concussion wave strong enough to overcome
the snap diaphragm causes the detonator, when armed, to
function. These detonators can be used to fire several
charges simultaneously without interconnecting the charges
with wires or detonating cord. A single charge fired in
water or in air will detonate all charges equipped with con­
cussion detonators within range of the main charge or each
269
Figure 196. Lighter, fuse, weatherproof, M2.

other. For safety while arming the device in water, blue

and yellow water-soluble time-delay salt tablets are supplied
with the detonator. The blue tablet gives a delay of ap­
proximately 3*/2 minutes and the yellow a delay of approx­
imately 7 minutes. See TM 9-1946 for operating range of
concussion detonators.
(b) Friction-igniter, delay-type detonators are devices for detonat­
ing explosive charges after a definite period of delay. The
initiating mechanism (a pull wire coated with friction mate­
rial set in a flash compound), delay system, and detonator
are all integral parts of the unit. These detonators are used
for delay firing of demolition charges, particularly during
assault demolitions. The detonators are also used to fire
underwater charges. The standard detonators of this type
are DETONATOR, 8-second delay, M2 (fig. 195), and
DETONATOR, 15-second delay, Ml, which are almost
identical in overall appearance and in functioning except for
time of delay. These detonators can be identified in dark­
ness, since the 8-second delay has a “T” type pull pin handle
and the 15-second delay has a circular pull ring.
(2) Fuse lighters are used to ignite safety fuse or time blasting fuse.
(a) LIGHTER, fuse, friction type, Ml is a paper tube containing
friction powder. Barbs inside the open end of the fuse
lighter permit the fuse to be inserted but prevent its removal
except by force. A pull on the loop or handle at the closed

270
Figure 197. Fuse. safety.

end of the friction-type lighter mechanically ignites the fric­

tion compound that, in turn, fires the powder train in the
fuse.
(/>) LIGHTER, fuse, weatherproof, M2 (fig. 196) consists of a
barrel that holds the firing mechanism and a coupling base
that contains a percussion cap primer and has a pronged
fuse retainer. Plastic sealing material is used to waterproof
the joint of fuse and fuse lighter. When a release pin is
pulled, a firing pin strikes a percussion cap primer that, in
turn, ignites the fuse. The lighter will ignite the fuse under
all weather conditions, even under water.
(3) FUSE, safety, M700 (fig. 197) is in the form of a 0.20-inch diam­
eter cord consisting of a flammable cord tightly wrapped with
waterproofing materials. When ignited by ordinary match or
by a weatherproof fuse lighter, it transmits a flame to a non­
electric blasting cap that may be installed in an explosive
charge. This fuse is limited standard for use in general demo­
litions, both on land and under water. The burning rate of
fuse is approximately 40 seconds per foot, however, the burning
time should be tested by timing the burning of a 1-foot length
of fuse, after cutting off a minimum of 3 inches on the end to
remove powder that may have absorbed moisture. The dark

271
JIJTER COVER

WATERPROOF ING 'e(ET< EE

E RA PD E3W82

SECTIONED END OF CORD

RA PD 212805

Figure 199. Cord, detonating, waterproof.

green cover is smooth with abrasive marking at 18-inch (1 min­

ute) intervals. FUSE, blasting, time (commercial) (fig. 198),
which is in the form of a ’A-inch diameter cord consisting of a
black powder core wrapped with several layers of fabric and
waterproofing materials, is used for similar purposes but is not
reliably waterproof. This is the ordinary commercial-type
safety fuse. FUSE, blasting, time, is authorized for issue only
for use in the continental United States.
(4) Waterproof detonating cord (fig. 199) consists of an explosive
core of PETN contained in a braided seamless cotton tube.
On the outside of this tube is a layer of asphalt on which is a
layer of rayon. The outer covering is a continuous extruded
272
PRESSURE-RELEASE
RAPD 167588

Figure 200. Firing devices.

coating of polyethylene plastic, which is colorless and smooth to

the touch. The outside diameter of the cord is 0.200 inch.
This waterproof detonating cord is the standard cord for gen­
eral use in military demolitions, both on land and under water.
(5) Detonating cord (primacord) consists of a flexible tube filled
with PETN in the approximate amount of 40 grains per foot
(approximately 5.7 lb per 1,000 ft). This cord is a limited
standard item and will be used for training purposes only as
soon as sufficient supply of waterproof detonating cord becomes
available. It is ordinarily used to transmit a detonation from a
primed or from a delay detonator to a charge of high explosive
or from one charge of high explosive to another without requir­
ing the use of a second cap.
(6) Firing devices (fig. 200) are of two general types, the tubular
type and the box type. The coupling base, fitted to all types,
has the standard thread and nipple and always contains a per­
cussion cap primer. The coupling base may be of the remov­
able type or the type that is not to be removed (as in the pull-
friction and delay types), depending on the particular model
of firing device. All firing devices may be used interchange­
ably as appropriate for the particular task to be accomplished.
Firing devices may be used with heavy antitank mines and
activators, with light antitank mines and blasting caps, and
with improvised explosive charges and primed blasting caps.
When a firing device is used with a service activator or a prac­
tice activator (see TM 9-1940), no blasting cap or black pow­
der igniter charge is needed. When used directly with light

408374 0 -56 -18

273
F
antitank service mines or with demolition blocks, a firing device
requires a crimped-on blasting cap.
(a) The tubular-type firing devices, consisting generally of head,
case, coupling base, and percussion cap primer are arranged
for actuation by pressure, pull or release of pull, or chemical
action, according to the design of the particular model.
1. FIRING DEVICE, delay type, Ml is a chemical device
used for firing a delay-action mine or demolition block.
Delay action is initiated by crushing a glass capsule, filled
with corrosive liquid, that is contained in a thin-walled
portion of the case. An identification and safety strip,
colored to indicate the delay time of the device, is visible
through an inspection hole in the coupling base. The
nominal delay time (at 75° F.) and corresponding colors
are: 9 minutes, black; 15 minutes, red; 1 hour, white; 21/2
hours, green; 5’/2 hours, yellow; and 11V2 hours, blue.
The nominal delay time is subject to temperature correc­
tion in accordance with a table furnished with the firing
device.
2. FIRING DEVICE, pressure type, M1A1 is actuated by
pressure and is used in setting up booby traps. When a
safety pin between the firing pin and primer has been re­
moved, a pressure of 20 pounds on the pressure cap acts to
release the spring-loaded firing pin that fires the primer.
3. FIRING DEVICE, pull-friction type, M2, which contains a
friction initiated primer, is actuated by a pull wire and is
used in setting up booby traps. The body is plastic and
the base is nonremovable. A coated wire, to which a
spring and pull ring are attached, passes through the body,
through the friction compound, and into a nipple on the
base. A direc) pull of 3 to 11 pounds on the trip wire
(pull wire) stretches the spring and draws the coated wire
through the friction compound thereby igniting it. Once
fired, the device cannot be reused.
4. FIRING DEVICE, pull-release type, M3 is a mechanical
device actuated by either an increase (pull) or a decrease
(release) of tension in a taut trip wire and is used with
antipersonnel mines M3 or in setting up booby traps. A
direct pull of 6 to 10 pounds on the trip wire or release of
tension, such as cutting or detaching the trip wire, act in
different ways to release the spring-loaded firing pin that
fires the primer.
5. FIRING DEVICE, pull type, Ml is a mechanical device
actuated by a pull on a trip wire and is used with anti­
personnel mines M3 for activation of antitank mines and
in setting up booby traps. A direct pull of 3 to 5 pounds
274

J
on the trip wire releases the spring-loaded firing pin that
fires the primer.
(b) The box-type firing devices, consisting of a rectangular steel
body and primed coupling base, are actuated by release of
pressure.
1. FIRING DEVICE, pressure-release type, M5 is a mechan­
ical device used to activate antitank mines equipped with
supplementary fuze wells (cap wells) and for general
booby-trap installations with charges having a threaded
well. A release plate will release the spring-loaded firing
pin, which fires the primer, when a restraining load of at
least 5 pounds is displaced more than five-eighths of an
inch. This firing device may be reused.
2. FIRING DEVICE, release type, Ml is actuated when a re­
straining weight is removed from it and is used in setting
up booby traps. A restraining weight of at least 2 pounds
is applied on the top face of the latch at the time of instal­
lation. After the safety pin has been removed, displace­
ment of the restraining weight releases the latch, allowing
a spring lever to actuate the firing pin that strikes the
primer.
(c) Inert firing devices used for training purposes are to be em­
ployed in exactly the same manner and with the same care and
precautions as are the explosive items comprising the firing de­
vices simulated, hence it is essential that personnel in train­
ing be fully conversant with all procedures and instructions
given in this manual pertaining to the explosive firing
devices. For descriptions of individual service firing devices,
see TM 9-1946.
(7) Percussion cap primers produce a small flame when struck by a
firing pin to initiate a blasting cap or igniter charge.
PRIMER, percussion, M27; PRIMER, percussion cap, M2;
and the similar PRIMER, percussion cap, improved No. 3 con­
sist of a flanged copper or gilding metal cup with a hole in the
bottom of the cup. The primers contain an inner inverted
cup, an initiating charge, and an anvil. Firing devices are is­
sued with this type of primer installed in the coupling base.
Coupling bases of newer manufacture are fitted with percussion
primer M27. Coupling bases of earlier manufacture were
fitted with percussion cap primer M2. The primer is also
issued separately for repriming firing devices used with regular
practice mines or with improvised practice mines or booby
traps.
(8) Blasting caps (figs. 201 and 202), used for initiating explosives,
are of the Army nonelectric and electric types and the commer­
cial nonelectric and electric types. The Army types consist of
275
connecting caps
IN A FIRING CIRCUIT

A-METAL SHELL - SENDS OF LEAD WIRES

B..DETONATING CHARGE flN IGNI" , RRGE
C..INTERMEDIATE CHARGE G. PLUG (AS
D..IGNITING CHARGE H. FILLING MATERIAL
- /PLATINUM WIRE OR 'BRIDGE" WHICH I.. INSULATED LEAD WIRES
. IIS HEATED BY THE El ECTRIC CURRENT

CAP, BLASTING, TETRYL, ELECTRIC

EXTERIORS AND CROSS SECTION

C..CRIMP - /TIME BLASTING FUSE

/(SAFETY FUSE)

CAP, BLASTING, NON-ELECTRIC-CRIMPED TO TIME

BLASTING FUSE (SAFETY FUSEJ-CROSS SECTION RA PD H6877A

Figure 201. Blasting caps.

276
Figure 202. Blasting caps (nonelectric).

a thin tubular metallic shell of noncorrosive metal about 2'/2

inches long and *4 inch in diameter filled with a sensitive high
explosive. In priming, the caps are inserted into the cap wells
of demolition explosives. The electric type has wires for
attachment to a blasting machine and the nonelectric type may
be crimped to any standard firing device. The nonelectric
caps may also be crimped to safety fuse (time blasting fuse)
fitted with a fuse lighter or crimped to detonating cord fitted
with a delay detonator. Special Army caps, both electric and
nonelectric, loaded with pentaerythrite tetranitrate (PETN) are
used to detonate the less sensitive military explosives, such as
TNT and ammonium nitrate. Commercial caps, principally
the No. 6 and No. 8, may be used to detonate the more sensi­
tive explosives, such as dynamite, gelatine dynamite, or nitro­
starch. The No. 8 cap is more powerful and more expensive
than the No. 6 cap. For description of wiring and electric wir­
ing circuits, see FM 5-25.
(9) Accessories are issued for use with priming and initiating ma­
terial.
(а) ADAPTER, priming, M1A4 is a small hollow plastic hexag­
onal-head cylinder that is threaded on one end. The
adapter simplifies the priming of military explosives having
threaded cap wells. The adapter is used with electric blasting
cap, with nonelectric blasting cap and safety fuse, and with
detonating cord.
(б) ADAPTER, priming, M1A3 and earlier models are similar to
adapter M1A4 except their external shape is round. The
adapter M1A3 is now limited standard and is mandatory for
277
1

Figure 203. Demolition equipment set No. 1.

278

1
use in training until present supply is exhausted.
(c) CLIP, cord, detonating, Ml is a small metal device used to
join detonating cord.
(d) Waterproof blasting cap sealing compound is used to mojs-
tureproof the connection between a nonelectric blasting cap
and safety fuse and to moistureproof dynamite primers. The
compound does not make a permanent waterproof seal.
(e) Single-conductor No. 20 AWG annunciator wire is issued for
making connections between electric blasting caps or between
cap and bring wire.
(f) Firing wire for electric firing of charges consists of two-con­
ductor No. 18 AWG vinyl polymer- or rubber-covered wire
or of two-conductor No. 20 AWG vinyl polymer-covered
wire. The wire is earned on 506-foot or 1,000-foot firing
wire reels.
(10) Instruments and tools are issued for use with priming and ini­
tiating material.
(а) The blasting galvanometer is used to test electrical firing wire
circuits. It contains an electromagnet, a small special silver
chloride dry cell, a scale, and indicator needle.
(б) Blasting machines are small electric generators that produce
current for firing electric blasting caps. There are two types
in Army use, the 10-cap twisting-handle type and the 30-,
50-, and 100-cap push-down-handle (rack-bar) type. The

A—3 box, cap, 10-cap capacity, infantry

B—5 firing device, pull-friction type. M2
C—30 clip, cord, detonating, Ml
D—5 firing device, pressure type. Ml Al
E—10 detonator (five 15-sec. delay, Ml, and five 8-sec. delay. M2)
F—1 chest, demolition squad
G — 1 reel, wire, firing, 500 ft, RL-39A, w/2 carrying straps, w/winding device, w/o
spool, w/o wire, and 1 spool, DR-8A, empty, reel, wire, firing, 500 ft
H — 1 block, demolition, chain, Ml (eight 2J4-lb block strung on cord, detonating)
J—1 wire, firing, 2-conductor, vinyl-polymer covered, 500-ft roll, No. 18 awg
K—2 wire, annunciator, single-conductor, cotton covered, 200-ft roll, No. 20 awg
L—1 fuse, safety, M700, or fuse, blasting, time (50-ft coil)
M—30 adapter, priming, Ml A4. or adapter, priming. Ml A3 or adapter priming, M1A2
N—30 cap, blasting, special, nonelectric (type I 01 PETN))
P—1 knife, pocket, general purpose. 74-K-65 (stored, issued, and reviewed by Quarter­
master Corps)
Q— 8 block, demolition, M3 (comp C3) (2/i-lb block)
R—8 block, demolition, M2 (2/s-lb block)
S—3 cord, detonating (PETN) (100-ft spool)
T—1 twine, hemp, No. 18, 4-oz. ball
U—1 machine, blasting. 10-cap capacity, class A
W—3 tape, friction, general use. grade A, Ki-in wide, ’/2-lb roll
X — 1 galvanometer, blasting (w/lcathc.r case and carrying strap)
Y—30 explosive, TNT, 1-lb block
Z—40 lighter, fuse, weatherproof. M2
AA—25 cap, blasting, special, electric (type II 02 PETN))
BB—2 crimper, cap (w/fusc cutter), M2
CC—1 pliers, lineman’s, side-cutting, length 8 in. 2 destructor, high-explosive, universal.
M10 (T20)
Figure 203 — Continued.
279
a. WEATHERPROOF, M2 J C 1 AS CARRYING
r / 7 7 r7Cc F'E^UkE TYPE. Ml Al QUIP,WENT '
M3 * N/fqnS, TIME (25-FT com
D....-Clip, CORO, DETONATING Ml L ' LAST NG, SPECIAL
t - i ’ f Nl-lT C JI (PETNi
iFRICTION TYPF M2 M PDNATOR 5-StC DELAY, Ml
■ MIA4 OR
, N, GENERAL USE,
F. .. ! tK, PRIMING, EXPLOSIVE < IDTH 3/4-IN, 8 OZ ROLL
... PRIMING, ' I ' TE, FOR DEMOLITION
■LB CAN, Ml T
J USE CUTTER M2 < CAP CAPACITY
H... CORD, DETONATING (100 FT SPOOL)
RA PD I31O2IAImi

Figure 204. Demolition equipment set No. 5.

280
E

XCAP CAPACITY. CLASS A W/tXTRA HANDLE

>

TN)
03

PRIMING.
C ilMING MIA2
0 ING. W/LEATHER CASE
JCTOR. VINYL-POLYMER COVERED
L A'G
F MOLITION EQUIPMENT
RAPE) 1310226

Figure 205. Demolition equipment set F'o. 7.

capacity of a blasting machine is the number of electric blast­

ing caps properly connected in series that it will fire if oper­
ated correctly.
(c) Blasting machine testing rheostats of two types are used in the
Army in connection with testing blasting machines. The
types of rheostats are the six-post and the nine-post.
1. RHEOSTAT, blasting machine, testing, 6-post, consists of a
series of coils of electrical resistance wire in a rectangular
block-type case. The terminals of the resistance coils are
connected to the internal ends of six brass binding posts

281
282

EXPLOSIVE ITEMS

NONEXPLOSIVE ITEMS-... —..... -

Figure 206. Rod, earth, blast-driven, MI3.

that extend through the top of the case. Numbers on the
side of the case between adjacent pairs of binding posts in­
dicate the number of caps in series having the same
resistance as the internal resistance coil connected to that
particular pair of posts. The number of caps in series
having a resistance equal to that between any pair of posts
is obtained by adding the figures between the pair selected.
This rheostat may be used to test a blasting machine from
5- to 100-cap capacity.
2. RHEOSTAT, blasting machine, testing, 9-post, is similar to
the 6-post rheostat except that it is longer and has nine
binding posts and correspondingly larger capacity. It
may be used to test a blasting machine from 5- to 310-cap
capacity.
(d) Cap crimpers are designed to squeeze the shell of the non­
electric cap tightly enough around safety fuse or detonating
cord to prevent it from being pulled off easily and still not
interfere with the burning of the powder train in the fuse.
The standard cap crimper is CRIMPER, cap (with fuse cut­
ter), M2, which has a narrow jaw that crimps a water-re­
sistant groove.
c. Demolition Equipment, Sets and Kits.
(1) Demolition equipment sets (figs. 203-205) contain explosive and
nonexplosive items for the performance of particularly desig­
nated demolition tasks. Complete lists of the components of
specific demolition equipment sets are published in Department
of the Army Supply Manual ORD 3 SNL R-7. The sets are
designated as follows:
(a) DEMOLITION EQUIPMENT set No. 1, engineer squad.
(b) DEMOLITION EQUIPMENT set No. 2, engineer platoon.
(c) DEMOLITION EQUIPMENT set No. 5, individual.
(</) DEMOLITION EQUIPMENT set No. 7, electrical.
(2) The blast-driven earth rod set is used for making holes as deep
as 6 feet and several inches in diameter in earth or soft shale.
It is not usable in rock or other hard material. The assembled
A—1 chest N—2 tape, friction, general use. black.
B—1 chamber, firing 11-in \vd. 8-oz roll
C—1 plate, base, extractor, assy P—100 point
D—1 rod, extension Q- 2 box, cap, 50-cap capacity, engineer
E—1 extractor, rod R 1 tripod
F — 1 rod, handles and starting S—100 charge, propelling, Ml 2 (Tl)
G—1 rod, inserting («/primer, M44)
H — 2 rod, intermediate T- - 100 cap. blasting, special, nonelectric
J—2 rod, main, long (type I (JI [Link]))
K — 100 adapter, firing, explosive. \11 A3 I-— 2 fuse, safety. M700, or fuse, blasting
or M1A4 time. 50-ft coil
L—1 crimper, cap, M2 (w/fuse cutter) V—200 lighter, fuse, weatherproof. M2
M — 1 box, cap, 10-cap capacity, infantry W—100 charge, springing
Figure 206 —Continued

283
Figure 207. Kit, demolition, M37—in haversack.

CORO. CUP.
DETONATING detonating adapter
TYPE B CORD
BOOSTER
... ,/w...

.t
■ vi

BOOSTER charge
20 IN APRX- ------------------ -20 IN APRX-------------------------
62 IN MAX
RA PD 149677

Figure 208. Priming assembly, demolition, M15.

hole-making unit of ROD, earth, blast-driven, Ml3 (fig. 206)

consists of a 6-foot steel rod, a detachable point that fits the
lower end of the rod, and a cylindrical firing chamber that
screws on the upper end. Propelling charge Ml2, when
placed in the firing chamber and exploded by primer M44,
which is attached to a piece of time blasting fuse and a fuse
lighter, drives the rod into the earth. A tripod with adjustable
legs is used to hold the rod steady for firing. A removable han­
dle, an extractor that grips and lifts the rod, and an extension that
can be used to lengthen the rod are used to pull the rod from the
earth. A forked inserting rod is furnished for inserting det­
onating cord charges into the hole made by the rod. The

284
.J
A—26 explosive, TNT, I-lb block, inert T—100 cap, blasting, special, electric
B—8 block demolition, chain, Ml, inert (type II (J 2 PETN)), inert
C—16 block, demolition, M3, inert U—100 cap, blasting, tetryl, nonelectric,
D—12 block, demolition, %-lb, inert inert
E—1 torpedo, bangalore, Ml Al, inert V—30 lighter, fuse, weatherproof, M2,
F— 1 charge, shaped, 15-lb, M2 A3, inert inert
G—1 charge, shaped, 40-lb, M3, inert W—2 crimper, cap, M2 (w/fuse cutter)
H—2 detonator, 15-sec delay, Ml, inert X—1 machine, blasting, 10-cap capacity
J—2 detonator, 8-sec delay, M2, inert (class A)
K—2 detonator, concussion-type, Ml, Y—1 galvanometer, blasting, complete
inert Z—2 tape, friction, general use, black,
L—50 adapter, priming, explosive, M1A3 H-in wd, 8-oz roll
M—50 clip, cord, detonating, Ml AA—1 wire, firing, 2-conductor, vinyl-
N—10 firing device, pressure-type, Ml, polymer covered, 250-ft roll, No 20
inert awg, training
P —10 firing device, pull-friction-type, BB—1 wire, annunciator, single-conduc­
M2, inert tor, cotton covered, 50-ft roll, No
Q—5 firing device, pressure-release-typc, 20 awg, training
M5, inert CC—1 knife, pocket, general purpose
R—4 cord, detonating, inert (100-ft spool) DD—2 twine, hemp, No 18, 4-oz ball
S—3 fuse, time blasting, inert (100-ft EE—1 chest, demolition squad
spool)
Figure 209. Demolition training kit T38.

diameter of the hole may be expanded from top to bottom, as,

for example, when making a post hole, by using one or more
springing charges or detonating cord, stranded.
(3) Demolition kit M37 (fig. 207) consists of eight demolition blocks
285
M5A1, eight demolition block hook assemblies, and two demo­
lition priming assemblies Ml5. Demolition block M5A1 is de­
scribed in a(l)(c) above. The priming assembly Ml5 (fig. 208)
consists of a length (approximately 5 ft) of detonating cord, two
hexagonal-shaped plastic adapters, each holding a booster, and
two detonating cord clips. The adapters that are attached to
the cord, one at each end, are threaded to fit the cap well of
demolition blocks and light antitank mines. Each booster con­
tains a charge of 13.5 grains of RDX. The clips, which are in
place on the cord about 20 inches from either end of the assem­
bly, are for making junctions on main lines of detonating cord
in a demolition system. The demolition kit M37, together
with main lines and their initiators, is used to form a demolition
system with one or more demolition blocks M5A1 as the main
explosive charge.
(4) Demolition training kits consist of inert items only. KIT, dem­
olition, training, T38 (inert) (fig. 209), and KIT, demolition,
training, T39 (inert) are provided for the training of personnel

RA RD 131039

Figure 210. Cable, detonating, mine clearing, antipersonnel, Ml—being laid over mine field by
jet propulsion unit.

286
Figure 211. Snake, demolition, M3—being pushed by medium tank.

in the use of demolition materials. Inerted items used for train­

ing are to be employed in exactly the same manner and with
the same care and precautions as their explosive counterparts
used in service. See TM 9-1946 for details concerning dem­
olition training kits.
d. Mine-Clearing Devices.
(1) The antipersonnel mine clearing detonating cable is a flexible
linear charge used to clear narrow lanes in antipersonnel mine
fields. CABLE, detonating, mine clearing, antipersonnel, Ml
(fig. 210) is a nylon-covered cable 170 feet long and about 1

287
1ST FUZE SHIELD,
330 BOLT HOLE
FROM TAIL

20 FUZE SHIELD,

Figure 212. Snake, demolition, M3—longitudinal section at fuze, bullet impact, Ml Al.

inch in diameter, which weighs 63 pounds and contains 46

pounds of oil-soaked PETN. This charge consists of 19 strands
of special detonating cord, each strand containing approximately
100 grains of PETN per foot. Regular detonating cord should
not be used as a substitute. One end of the cable has a cable
grip with loops for anchoring the cable to a stake driven in the
ground. This end contains a booster charge and a threaded
cap well for inserting a 15-second delay detonator for explod­
ing the cable. In the carrying case, the cable is coiled around
a cone, which is removed before the unit is fired. The cable is
projected across the minefield by a JATO, where it is exploded
by the detonator in the anchored end. A launcher, which is a
folding stand of aluminum angles, is used to hold the JATO in
position for firing. The cable is issued either with or without
the JATO. In the latter case, the JATO is requisitioned sep­
arately. One LIGHTER, fuse, M2 is provided for igniting the
JATO. The entire assembly is contained in a carrying case,
which is a cylindrical aluminum can with removable lids, pro­
vided with carrying handles on both ends. The loaded case
weighs 92 pounds.
(2) Demolition snakes (figs. 211 and 212) are used principally to

288
breach minefields. They may also be used to breach bands of
log posts, steel rails, antitank ditches, and some small concrete
obstacles. A demolition snake consists of sections made up of
two parallel linear explosive charges encased between corru­
gated metal plates, bolted together to form a rigid assembly
that can be towed or pushed by a light or medium tank. The
snake is exploded by action of a bullet impact fuze that is ac­
tuated by fire from a machine gun on the tank. Complete lists
of the components of specific models of demolition snakes are
furnished in Department of the Army Supply Manual ORD
3 SNL R-7.
(a) SNAKE, demolition, M2, and SNAKE, demolition, M2A1,
which are similar except in total explosive load and in minor
details, are earlier models. CHARGE, snake, demolition,
M2 is used in the snake M2. The charge used in the snake
M2A1 is the same as that used in SNAKE, demolition, M3
described in (b) below. The corrugated plates used for both
snakes M2 and M2A1 are steel. The plates for the demoli­
tion snake M3 are of aluminum.
(b) SNAKE, demolition, M3 is 14 inches wide, 5 inches high, and
400 feet long when assembled. It weighs approximately
9,000 pounds, including 4,500 pounds of explosives. Corru­
gated aluminum plates 9 feet long, fastened with steel bolts,
washers, and nuts, form the body of the snake. A pear-
shaped aluminum nose, attached to the forward end of the
snake in such a way that the nose can swivel slightly, aids in
guiding the snake over and around obstructions. Other
components and accessories adapt the snake for pulling or
pushing by a tank. One hundred twenty-eight CHARGE,
for snake, demolition, M2 Al and M3 are issued with each
SNAKE, demolition, M3. The charge is elliptical in shape,
encased in sheet aluminum, is 5 feet long and weighs 40
pounds, including approximately 35 pounds of explosive.
The explosive is 80/20 amatol with a booster charge of crys­
talline TNT in each end. One end contains a cap well to
receive a blasting cap when the explosive cartridges are used
individually for general demolition work. The explosive
charges are loaded in 320 feet of the 400-foot snake, giving
an explosive weight of 14-pounds per loaded foot. Dirt-
filled tamping bags are placed adjacent to the charges, ex­
tending 10 feet toward the nose of the snake and 20 feet
toward the rear, to prevent the charges from shifting. Load­
ing assemblies for bangalore torpedoes may be used as an
alternative explosive charge. Two FUZE, bullet impact,
Ml are supplied with each demolition snake.

408374 0 -56 - 19
289
141. Care and Precautions in Handling
a. General. Due consideration should be given to the observance of
appropriate safety precautions in handling demolition material.
b. Types of Explosive Charges and Groups. Information concerning the
care to be exercised in handling demolition materials will be found in
TM 9-1903, TM 9-1946, FM 5-25, and in AR 385-63.
(1) Demolition charges must be handled in accordance with the
sensitivity of the explosive comprising the charge. For com­
plete information on characteristics of explosives, see TM
9-1910.
(2) Demolition blocks of plastic explosive must not be exposed to
open flame as they ignite easily and burn with intense heat. If
burned in large quantities, they may explode. Dynamites must
be handled with caution because they may be exploded by
flame, sparks, friction, and sharp blows, including impact from
bullets or shell fragments. They are more sensitive than other
explosives used in demolition or blasting.
(3) Priming components such as safety fuse (time blasting fuse) and
detonating cord are sensitive to flame. They should be stored
separately from explosive charges or blasting caps.
(4) Initiating components such as detonators, blasting caps, and
primers must be protected from shock and high temperature
since they contain sensitive explosive elements. Blasting caps
will be stored separately from dynamite.
142. Precautions in Firing
a. Detailed information concerning safety precautions to be observed
in firing demolition charges will be found in TM 9-1946 and FM 5-25.
b. General safety precautions in firing are in (1) and (2) below.
(1) General.
(a) Lightning and other sources of extraneous electricity consti­
tute definite hazards when firing charges either electrically or
nonelectrically. A strike or a near miss by lightning is al­
most certain to detonate either type of circuits. For this
reason, blasting operations should be suspended and person­
nel moved to a safe distance upon approach of an electrical
storm. Other possible sources of static electricity, such as
moving belts, escaping steam, and operating machinery,
should be considered and eliminated before connecting up
charges, especially when working with electric circuits.
Radio transmitters and power lines also produce electrical
energy and any electric blasting within 1 mile of a broad­
casting or high-power short-wave station or within one-quar­
ter mile of all other radio transmitters must be considered a
potential hazard. Nonelectric and detonating cord systems
are recommended in such locations.

290
(/>) The ammonium nitrate cratering charge, nitrostarch and TNT
charges, some demolition blocks, and some dynamites are
dangerous to use in inclosed spaces because poisonous fumes
result from the explosion.
(c) For demolitions in wet surroundings or under water, only
those charges and priming and initiating components that are
recommended for such use should be employed.
(d) Safety-distance requirements for preparation of primers and
demolition charges must be observed (see TM 9-1946).
(<?) Dual-firing systems should be used, whenever practicable, in
order to increase the likelihood of a successful operation and
to minimize the danger of unexploded charges (see FM 5-25).
(/) Primed explosive charges should not be forced into a drill hole
(bore hole). Charges should be tamped only with blunt
wooden tamping sticks.
(2) Priming.
(а) Electric.
1. All caps used in a circuit will be of the same manufacture.
2. Caps will be tested with an approved galvanometer before
priming.
3. Caps will be short-circuited by means of the accompanying
shunt or by twisting the bore ends of the wires together
until ready to be connected into the circuit.
4. Only after all caps have been connected in the circuit will
the final connection be made to the firing wire.
5. The ends of the firing wire at the charge will be kept twisted
together until ready to tie into the cap circuit. The blast­
ing machine ends of the wire will be kept twisted together
until after the warning signals are given preparatory to
connecting the blasting machine.
6. The blasting machine or an essential component thereof will
be kept under guard at all times during preparation of the
charge until ready to fire.
7. The cap lead wires will not be pulled or tampered with.
8. Only the batteries issued for the galvanometer will be used
in the galvanometer.
9. In the event of a misfire in an electric circuit, the leading
wires must be disconnected from the source of power be­
fore leaving the firing point to investigate. Investigation
should be delayed long enough to insure that the misfired
charge is not burning.
(б) Nonelectric.
1. When crimping caps, crimp near open end, pointing it out
and away from the body, using only the issued cap
crimpers.
2. Caps will be removed from the cap box with the fingertips.

291
The only materials to be inserted into the end of caps will
be time fuse, detonating cord, or standard fuse base.
They will not be forced.
3. Charges will be placed on the ground or on the material to
be demolished before lighting their fuses.
4. Prime explosives only when planning to detonate them im­
mediately, and never store primers after they are assembled.
5. Wait at least 30 minutes after the expected time of detonation
before investigating any nonelectric misfires.
6. Test time fuse by burning and timing a short length before
using. Before using, cut off and discard 2 or 3 inches of
the end of the roll to eliminate any absorbed moisture.
7. When using a fuse lighter with less than 1 foot of time fuse,
tape the cap-fuse connection to prevent the flash of the
fuse lighter from spitting directly into the cap.

143. Packing and Marking

a. Packing.
(1) Explosive charges. The chain demolition block is packed one
chain per haversack, two haversacks per wooden box. Demoli­
tion blocks are packed eight per haversack, two haversacks per
wooden box. An exception are the demolition blocks M5 and
M5A1, which are packed 24 per plastic bag, 1 bag per wooden
box. Nitrostarch and TNT explosives are packed 50 pounds
per wooden box. The ammonium nitrate cratering charge is
packed one per wooden box. Shaped charges are packed in
wooden boxes. From one to eight charges are packed per box,
according to the weight of the charge. Dynamite is usually
packed 50 pounds per commercial wooden box. High-explo­
sive destructors are packed 1 per fiber container and 50 con­
tainers per wooden box.
(2) Priming and initiating components, accessories, and tools. Concussion­
type detonators are packed in individual metal containers, 50
containers per wooden box. Delay-type detonators are packed
10 per package, 5 packages per inner package, 4 packages (200
detonator) per wooden box. Weatherproof fuse lighters are
packed 5 per waterproof carton, 30 cartons per wooden box.
Time blasting fuse is packed in 50-foot coils, 2 coils per pack­
age, 5 packages per sealed metal can, 8 cans (4,000 feet of
fuse) per wooden box. The 2-coil packages are also packed
either 30 or 60 per wooden box. Detonating cord is issued in
spools of 50, 100, 500, or 1,000 feet. The 50-foot spools are
packed 100 per wooden box; 100-foot spools, 50 per wooden
box; 500-foot spools, 8 per wooden box. Firing devices are
packed 5 or 10 devices per inner box. Trip wires are packed
with pull-type firing devices. Inner boxes are packed in
292
wooden boxes that contain from 150 to 250 devices. Primers
are packed 5,000 or 10,000 per wooden box. Blasting caps are
packed 500 to 10,000 per wooden box or as required. Most
accessories and tools are packed as required.
(3) Demolition equipment, sets and kits. The explosive items of demoli­
tion equipment sets are packed, shipped, and stored separately
from the nonexplosive items. No standard packing is pre­
scribed. The blast-driven earth rod set is packed in a plywood
box. Demolition kit M37 is packed in a carrying case of the
haversack type with priming assemblies attached to the top of
the case. Bangalore torpedo Ml Al is packed in a wooden box.
Demolition training kits are packed in the standard squad de­
molition chest.
(4) Mine-clearing devices. The antipersonnel mine-clearing detonat­
ing cable, including accessories, is contained in a waterproof
aluminum carrying case. The carrying case is packed in a
wooden box.
b. Marking. In addition to nomenclature and ammunition lot num­
ber, packages prepared for shipment are marked with the Interstate
Commerce Commission (ICC) shipping name or classification of the ar­
ticle, volume and weight, and the Ordnance Corps escutcheon. The
Ammunition Identification Code (AIC) is included in the marking when
specified by the packing drawing.

Section X. GUIDED MISSILES

144. General
a. The term “guided missile” refers to an unmanned vehicle moving
above the earth’s surface or under water, the trajectory or flight path of
which is capable of being altered by a mechanism within the vehicle.
The missile usually carries a lethal or useful military load.
b. For reasons of safety and ease in handling and shipping, the com­
ponents of a guided missile are usually stored and shipped separately and
must be assembled prior to use. Assembly is performed at predesignated
assembly areas. The components of the various guided missiles differ,
depending upon the particular type and model. In general, a guided
missile is composed of seven basic and distinct major components, de­
scribed in (1) through (7) below.
(1) Aerodynamic structure. This refers to the design and fabrication of
the missile body.
(2) Control system. The control system is that component that acts
as a pilot to keep the missile in a stable flight attitude and make
changes in course in response to signals from the guidance sys­
tem. The control system operates the control surfaces and the
propulsion unit.
293
(3) Guidance system. The guidance system is that component that
provides continued target intelligence (course data) that will
take the missile to its target.
(4) Propulsion system. The propulsion system is that component of a
guided missile that supplies the power for the missile flight.
(5) Warhead. The payload of a guided missile is its warhead. The
warhead contains a lethal or useful military load. The mission
of a guided missile is to deliver the warhead to a point where
maximum effect will be inflicted on a specific target.
(6) Fuze. The fuze is that component of a guided missile that
causes the warhead to function at the time and under the cir­
cumstances desired.
(7) Electrical power system. The electrical power system provides
electricity for the operation of guidance, control, and fuzing
systems of the missile.
145. Classification
a. General. Guided missiles are classified according to the origin of the
missile and its destination. They are also designated by service letter,
model number and modification letter, prefix letter, popular name, and
other appropriate designations.
b. Basic Designations Based on Origin and Destination. Basic designations
of guided missiles are:
AAM—Air-to-air missile
ASM—Air-to-surface missile
AUM—Air-to-underwater missile
SAM—Surface-to-air missile
SSM—Surface-to-surface missile
SUM—Surface-to-underwater missile
UAM—Underwater-to-air missile
USM—Underwater-to-surface missile
c. Service Letter, Model Number, and Modification Letter. Each basic desig­
nation is followed by a service letter, model number, and modification
letter. For example, AAMX-51) is an air-to-air missile developed by
the Navy; it is the fifth model and second modification.
d. Prefix Letters. The status of development is indicated by prefix let­
ters. The letter X indicates experimental; Y indicates service test of the
missile; Z indicates obsoletion. For example, XAAM designates an ex­
perimental air-to-air missile.
e. Popular Names. Names such as Viking, Nike, Terrier, and Falcon
may be assigned to guided missiles.
146. Identification
Guided missiles and their components may be identified by the paint­
ing and marking thereon. The markings include such data as name of
the component, its model designation, lot number and manufacturer,
294
date of manufacture, type of warhead, and other appropriate identifying
markings.
147. Warheads
The useful military load of guided missiles is contained in the war­
head. Dependent upon the target and the effect desired, the types of
warheads that may be used are indicated in a through e below.
a. High Explosive. The high-explosive warhead depends upon blast­
effect for destruction or demolition of the target.
b. High-Explosive Fragmentation. The effect of this warhead is produced
primarily by the fragments of the warhead being projected at high
velocity. The blast at the point of functioning will cause additional
damage to the target or nearby objects.
c. Chemical. This type may contain toxic chemical agents.
d. Atomic. This type may be designed to produce casualties (by ther­
mal radiation, blast, and nuclear radiation), to cause destruction and
damage to structures and equipment, and/or to deny the use of an area
due to residual radioactive effects.
e. Practice. Practice warheads simulate service warheads and are pro­
vided for such purposes as training in handling, fuzing, and loading.

148. Fuzes
a. General.
(1) A guided missile fuze is a device used with a warhead to cause
it to function at the time and under the circumstances desired.
(2) One or more fuzes may be used in conjunction with any of the
warheads described in paragraph 147. Depending on the type
of target and effect desired at the target, fuzes used with guided
missiles may be of the impact, VT (proximity), or ground-con­
trolled types.
b. Impact Fuze. An impact fuze is one that is actuated by striking the
target. Functioning time after impact depends upon the design of the
fuze and the nature of the target.
c. VT Fuze. VT fuzes function on approach to a target. Each type
of VT fuze is actuated by some characteristic of, and at a predetermined
distance from, the target. Five basic types of guided missile VT fuzes
are—
(1) Radio-proximity.
(2) Pressure-proximity.
(3) Electrostatic-proximity.
(4) Photoelectric-proximity.
(5) Acoustic-proximity.
d. Ground-Controlled Fuzing. In ground-controlled fuzing, the mecha­
nism for determining target proximity is not housed in the fuze, but is on
the ground. When the proper proximity relationship is reached between
the missile and the target, a signal to detonate is sent to the missile.
295
149. Electrical Power System
This system supplies electrical power for operation of the guidance and
control mechanisms and for the fuzing of the warhead. The types of
systems are as described in a and b below.
a. Battery supply, with or without electronic rectifier and transformer
circuit. This type is suitable for small, short-range missiles.
b. An alternating-current generator using a turbine driven by wind,
battery, engine, or compressed air. This type is suitable for longer
range missiles.
150. Propulsion System
a. General. The propulsion system used in guided missiles employs a jet­
type engine, which is the only known type capable of propelling such mis­
siles at the required speeds. A jet engine is one that operates on the reac­
tion principle. It consists essentially of a combustion chamber and a
nozzle. When a fuel is burned in the combustion chamber, a thrust is pro­
duced as a result of the products of combustion expanding and passing
through the nozzle.
b. Types. Jet engines are of two general types, the air-breathing type,
and the nonair-breathing type. The air-breathing type, of which the
pulse jet, ramjet, and turbojet engines are examples, uses liquid fuel
and atmospheric oxygen as the oxidizer. The nonair-breathing type, of
which rocket engines are examples, uses solid propellant (fuel and oxi­
dizer combined) or liquid fuel with an oxidizer.
c. Fuels and Propellants. Fuels and propellants for jet engines are dis­
cussed in paragraphs 14 through 21.
d. Phases of Operation. The complete missile propulsion system gen­
erally operates in two phases: the launching phase, during which the
missile is accelerated to the cruising speed by some means such as a cata­
pult or a high-thrust jet engine sometimes called a “booster unit” or
“JATO”; and the cruising phase, during which the missile is maintained
at cruising speed by a relatively lower-thrust jet engine sometimes called
a “sustainer unit.” In other cases, the missile propulsion system does
not require a “booster unit” or catapult and operates in only one phase.

151. Control and Guidance Systems

a. General. The control and guidance are parts of an integrated sys­
tem for automatically directing the flight of the missile.
b. Control System.
(1) General. The control system includes all the components neces­
sary for complete automatic control of a missile in flight. The
system receives intelligence from a radio signal or other electri­
cal device and makes corrections for changes in yaw, pitch, and
roll. The systems usually include gyroscopes, signal ampli­
fiers, servomotors, and control surfaces. The system may also

296
receive internal or external guidance signals in order to adjust
the path of a missile.
(2) Gyroscopes. The gyroscope is used in a missile to fix a reference
direction.
(3) Electric amplifiers. The amplifier increases the signal strength to
a sufficient level to control the servomotors.
(4) Servomotors. The servomotor supplies power to the control sur­
faces to change the flight path of a missile.
(5) Control surfaces. The control surface changes the missile path by
application of some force in response to a directing signal.
This change in path (steering) is accomplished by one or more
of the following devices: air vanes, jet vanes, movable jet motor,
or side jets.
c. Guidance System. The main functions performed by the guidance
system are tracking, computing, and directing. Tracking is the process
of determining the location of a missile and its target with respect to the
launcher, and missile and target with respect to each other and some
other reference. Computing is the process of calculating the directing
signals for the missile by the use of tracking information. Directing is
the process of sending the computed signal to the missile. Directing may
also be accomplished from within a missile. The directing signals are
sent to the control system, thus giving control of missile flight. Some
basic guidance systems are described in (1) through (8) below.
(1) Preset guidance system. A “preset system” is a guidance system
wherein a predetermined path is set into the missile before
launching and cannot be adjusted after launching.
(2) Terrestrial reference guidance system. A “terrestrial reference sys­
tem” is a guidance system for a predetermined path, wherein
the path of the missile can be adjusted after launching, by de­
vices within the missile that react to some phenomena of the
earth.
(3) Radio navigation guidance system. A “radio navigation system” is
a guidance system for a predetermined path wherein the path
of the missile can be adjusted by devices within the missile that
are controlled by external radio signals.
(4) Celestial navigation guidance system. A “celestial navigation sys­
tem” is a guidance system for a predetermined path wherein
the path of the missile can be adjusted by the use of continuous
celestial observation.
(5) Inertial guidance system. An “inertial system” is a guidance sys­
tem for a predetermined path wherein the path of the missile
can be adjusted after launching by devices wholly within the
missile.
(6) Command guidance system. A “command system” is a guidance
system wherein the path of the missile can be changed after

297
launching by directing signals from some agency outside the
missile.
(7) Beam climber guidance system. A “beam climber system” is a
guidance system wherein the direction of the missile can be
changed after launching by a device in the missile that keeps
the missile in a beam of energy.
(8) Homing guidance system. A “homing system” is a guidance sys­
tem wherein the direction of the missile can be changed after
launching by a device in the missile that reacts to some dis­
tinguishing characteristic of the target.
1 52. Launchers
a. General. Launchers are mechanical structures that provide what­
ever control and acceleration are needed during the initial stages of
flight to enable the missile’s control and guidance system and the propul­
sion system to direct and carry it to the target.
b. Types of Launchers. Some basic types of launching devices are train-
able platform, vertical tower, vertical ramp, ramp or rail (other than
vertical), zero length (a launcher on which there is negligible travel by
the missile), gun type, catapult, and aircraft.
c. Firing. Firing of guided missiles from a launcher is usually accom­
plished electrically by remote control.
d. Blast Protection. Due to the dangerous blast of flame emitted by
guided missiles, the launching site must be cleared of all personnel and
unnecessary equipment. All unprotected combustible material must
also be removed from the launching area.
1 53. Care, Handling, and Preservation
In general, the same regulations apply to guided missiles as to other
types of ammunition. However, certain components of the missile re­
quire special handling. The control equipment, which includes such
items as gyroscopes, homing devices, electronic equipment, and other
precision instruments, must be protected from rough or careless handling.
Special precautions must be taken with certain of the fuels and oxidizers
due to fire, explosion, contact, and inhalation hazards. Protective cloth­
ing and masks must be used when handling certain of the fuels and oxi­
dizers. Careful training in safety measures, procedures for handling, and
precautions in use of guided missile explosive or flammable components is
essential.
154. Packing and Marking
a. Packing. The components of guided missiles are packed in appro­
priate types of containers. Fuzes and warheads are packed in wooden
or metal containers. Propellants, which includes fuel, oxidizer, reducer,
and solid and liquid propellants, are packed in specially designed tanks,
metal drums, glass bottles, or fiber containers in wooden boxes. Control

298
and guidance equipment are packed in specially constructed packings
since they are precision instruments. Propulsion systems are packed in
metal crates or wooden boxes. Special equipment such as compressors,
cable sets, storage batteries, firing panels, and similar items are also
packed in suitable boxes, crates, and containers.
b. Marking. The packing boxes, crates, drums, and containers in
which guided missile components are packed are marked for easy identi­
fication. They may or may not be coded for a specific guided missile
complete round. Packings of propellants and components of propel­
lants, fuzes, and warheads are also marked to indicate the Interstate
Commerce Commission shipping name and any important instructions
in handling or storage.

Section XI. CARTRIDGE-ACTUATED DEVICES FOR AIRCRAFT

USE

155. General
Cartridge-actuated devices for aircraft use include such items as cata­
pults, removers, initiators, and thrusters. These devices are actuated by
special blank cartridges and are used in emergency-escape mechanisms
in high-speed aircraft.
156. Catapults
a. General. A catapult is a cartridge-actuated device designed to
facilitate an emergency escape from high-speed combat or bomber air­
craft by forcibly ejecting the pilot seat and pilot away from the aircraft.
The ejection may be upward or downward from the aircraft depending
upon the models of aircraft and catapult. Structurally, an aircraft cata­
pult is composed of three tubes; outer tube, telescoping tube, and inner
tube. One end of the catapult is attached to the pilot seat and the other
end is attached to the aircraft structure. The catapult is actuated by
gas pressure from the burning propellant of a special blank cartridge in­
corporated in the catapult. This blank cartridge is fired by a firing pin
in the catapult that, in turn, is actuated by gas pressure from a remotely

r ’ m OrtTAPlJI-T . M-«l
. ».*«*» Mull MM*
i I
* - '■ . X'!) . . G -

p" f
u..... ---- ----- - —.. -..-. -..30 IN- -...... -......

Figure 213. Catapult M4.

299
located (in the aircraft) initiator. Pressure, generated within the ini­
tiator by an integral special blank cartridge, is transmitted to the cata­
pult through a system of connecting hose or tube.
b. Types.
(1) Representative types of service catapults are the M3 for “up­
ward” ejection in high-speed bomber aircraft, the M4 (fig. 213)
for “downward” ejection, and the M5 for “upward” ejection in
fighter planes. Each of these types is operated by a system
consisting of the initiator M3 (fig. 217), which provides for re­
mote (in the aircraft) actuation. This initiator contains
CARTRIDGE, CAD, M38, which, when fired, furnishes gas
pressure through aircraft hose to the catapult. The gas pres­
sure exerts a force on the catapult firing pin, forcing firing pin
downward, shearing the shear pin, unlocking the catapult, and
the remainder of the movement of the firing pin fires the
CARTRIDGE, CAD, M36 in the catapult M3; the CAR­
TRIDGE, CAD, M37 in the catapult M4; or the CARTRIDGE,
CAD, M28A1 in the catapult M5.
(2) Representative types of training catapults are the M2 that uti­
lizes CARTRIDGE, CAD, M30A1 and the M6 that uses CAR­
TRIDGE, CAD, M57. The catapult M2 is used, in simulating
the action of a service catapult, on a fixed tower. It consists
of a pair of telescoping tubes, one of which is attached to the
pilot training seat and the other to the training tower. Upon
firing the cartridge, which simulates the action of the service
catapult cartridge, the tubes telescope and the inner tube con­
tinues in the training flight attached to the seat. The training

RA PD

Figure 214. Remover M2A1.

RA PO 212779

Figure 215. Exactor Ml.

300
catapult M6 is used in conjunction with a mobile seat trainer
rather than on a fixed tower as the training catapult M2.
157. Removers
a. General. A remover is a device designed to jettison an aircraft
canopy from an aircraft in an emergency, to provide an exit for the pilot
when he is ejected by a catapult. The remover is actuated just prior to
actuation of the catapult. The remover is a telescoping tube ejector
similar to a catapult but smaller and somewhat less powerful. One end
of the remover is attached to the canopy, the other to the aircraft struc­
ture. Upon firing the remover cartridge, the remover is extended axi­
ally and the head and inner tube are ejected with the canopy. The
exactor Ml (fig. 215), which is not integral with the remover but attached
to it, is connected to an initiator, and functions independently of the
catapult. The initiator gas pressure operates the exactor plunger, thus
releasing the canopy firing pin that fires the remover cartridge. The ini­
tiator generally employed in this capacity is the M3, which is a mechani­
cally (lanyard or cable) operated device.
b. Types. Representative types of removers are the M1A1, M2A1 (fig.
214), and M3. Each model of these series is designed with a particular
cartridge for a particular type of aircraft. The remover Ml Al uses

rfili

II IHWU 1 >' I
LOADERS LOT NO.

THRUSTER M5A1
RAPD 222156

Figure 216. Thrusters M3A1 and M5A1.

301
Figure 217. Initiator M3.

CARTRIDGE, CAD, M29A2 and is operated by exactor Ml, which is

actuated by initiator M3. The remover M2A1 uses CARTRIDGE,
CAD, M31A1 and is actuated by a sear, which is operated by a cable or
linkage-type system in the aircraft. The remover M3 uses CARTRIDGE,
CAD, M31A1 and is actuated by initiator M3.
158. Thrusters
a. General. Thrusters are cartridge-actuated devices used in aircraft
to position various components of the aircraft, as an initial operation to
facilitate the subsequent emergency escape of personnel. Thrusters con­
sist essentially of a cylinder, piston, cartridge, and a firing pin, which is
actuated by gas pressure furnished from an initiator. When the thruster
cartridge is ignited, the piston is forced down the cylinder, exerting a
thrust on the related aircraft component. The various models of
thrusters differ in design details such as thrust exerted, length of stroke,
etc.
h. Types. Representative types of thrusters are the Ml and Ml Al,
which use CARTRIDGE, CAD, M42; the M2 and M2A1, which use
CARTRIDGE, CAD, M43; the M3 and M3A1, which use CAR­
TRIDGE, CAD, M44; and the M5 and M5A1, which use CARTRIDGE,
CAD, M38 (fig. 216).

159. Initiators
a. General. Initiators are cartridge-actuated devices that are used in
aircraft emergency escape systems to provide a source of gas pressure,
which actuates another component of the system, such as a catapult or
thruster. Initiators may differ in the method of firing; that is, they may
be fired mechanically by the operation of some form of lanyard as is the
initiator M3 or by gas pressure furnished by the preceding item in the
system as in the case of the initiators M5 and M5A1. Delay initiators
incorporate a delay element in the initiator cartridge.
b. Types. Representative types of initiators include the M3 (fig. 217),
M5, and M5A1, which use CARTRIDGE, CAD, M38. Representative
types of delay initiators are the M4, M6, and M6A1, which use CAR­
TRIDGE, delay, CAD, M46.

302
co

I
3U.

. V'A -* V.
r ’*

co

I CO fT”} '
r •» m co Q
r™? o>- InJ w

CARTRIDGE, DELAY, CAD, M46

Figure 218. Cartridges.

160. Cartridges
With exception of CARTRIDGE, delay, CAD, M46 (fig. 218), all the
CAD cartridges are similar in general design, consisting of an aluminum
case, a percussion primer, and a propellant. They differ in size and in
the amount of propellant as determined by the military requirements of
the item to which they are assembled. The CARTRIDGE, delay,
CAD, M46 differs from the other cartridges in that a 2-second delay
element M5 is provided between the primer and the propellant. The
delay element M5 consists of a cylindrical metal body containing a 2-
second fuze with a flash hole on one end of the body and a primer pocket
on the other end.

161. Care and Precautions in Handling

a. General. Due consideration should be given to the observance of
appropriate safety precautions in handling cartridge-actuated devices.
Information concerning the care to be exercised in handling these devices
will be found in TM 9-1903 and in pertinent Air Force Technical Orders
(see app.).

303
b. Types.
(1) All types, that is, catapults, removers, thrusters, and initiators,
must be handled with care as they contain a cartridge.
(2) Air or gas pressure should not be applied to the inlet ports of
those devices that are initiated by gas pressure. When not in­
stalled in an airplane, these ports should be kept closed with a
shipping plug.
(3) The cotter pin must not be taken out until removers are in­
stalled in an airplane and then only if lock pin is in place. Do
not remove removers from the airplane unless cotter pin is re­
placed in the hole.
(4) The safety pin (M3 and M4 type initiators) will always be in­
serted in the initiator except when the initiator is installed in
an aircraft and the aircraft is in flight. Do not remove the ini­
tiator from the aircraft or perform any maintenance in the
initiator or in the immediate area unless the safety pin is
installed.
162. Packing and Marking
a. Packing.
(1) Catapults and training catapults are assembled and shipped as
a sealed unit, with the cartridge contained therein. All cata­
pults are packed one per corrugated fiberboard carton, four
cartons per wooden box, with the exception of the catapult M3,
which is packed two (in fiber container) in a wooden box.
(2) Removers are assembled and shipped as a sealed unit, with the
cartridge contained therein. All removers are packed four in
a carton in a wooden box, with the exception of the remover
M3, which is packed six (in fiber containers) in wooden box in
two layers, three per layer.
(3) Initiators are assembled and shipped as a sealed unit, with car­
tridge contained therein. AU initiators are packed 4 per corru­
gated fiberboard carton, 12 cartons per wooden box.
(4) Thrusters are assembled and shipped as a sealed unit, with the
cartridge contained therein. All thrusters are packed in fiber
ammunition containers, 12 containers per wooden box, with the
exception of thrusters M2 and M2A1, which are packed 9 con­
tainers per wooden box.
b. Marking. In addition to nomenclature and ammunition lot num­
ber, packages prepared for shipment are marked, in accordance with
Interstate Commerce Commission shipping regulations, the same as
small-arms ammunition. The ammunition Identification Code Symbol
(AIC) is included in the marking when specified by the packing drawing.

304
APPENDIX

REFERENCES

1. Publication Indexes
DA pamphlets of the 310-series, DA Pam 108-1, and TO 00-101
should be consulted frequently for latest changes or revisions of refer­
ences given in this appendix and for new publications relating to the
materiel covered in this manual.
2. Forms
DA Form 9-5 Ammunition Inspection and Lot Number Report (cut
sheet).
DA Form 9-6 Ammunition Inspection and Lot Number Report (con­
tinuation sheet) (cut sheet).
DA Form 9-8 Ammunition Stores Slip (pad of 100).
DA Form 347 Registry if Injury Claims (cut sheet).
DA Form 580 Ordnance Ammunition Stock Status Report (cut sheet).
DA Form 580-1 through 12 Ordnance Ammunition Stock Status Re-
port (cut sheets).
DA Form 581 Ammunition (cut sheet).
DA Form 583 Ammunition Visible Index (card).
DA Form 953 Summary of Accident Experience (cut sheet).
3. Types of Ammunition
90-mm HE Shell M71 with PD Fuze; Calibration
Data for Certain Lots.................................................. TB ORD 420
Ammunition: Identification Code (AIC)..................... TB 9-AMM 5
Ammunition: Restricted or Suspended......................... TB 9-AMM 2
Artillery Ammunition.......................................................... TM 9-1901
Bombs for Aircraft................................................................ TM 9-1980
Chemical Bombs and Clusters.............................................. TM 3-400
Demolition Materials............................................................ TM 9-1946
Employment of Land Mines.................................................. FM 20-32
Flame Thrower and Fire Bomb Fuels................................. TM 3-366
Hand and Rifle Grenades...................................................... FM 23-30
JATOS, General.................................................................. TM 9-1955
Land Mines.......................................................................... TM 9-1940
Military Chemistry and Chemical Agents. ....................... TM 3-215
Military Explosives.............................................................. TM 9-1910
Military Pyrotechnics.......................................................... TM 9-1981
408374 0 -56-20 305
Miscellaneous Chemical Munitions ..................................... TM 3 300
Pricing Guide—Ammunition............................................. ORD 5-3-6
Reducer, Flash, Ml: Change in Authorized Use When
Firing Charge, Propelling, M19, in Gun, 155-mm.
M2................................................................................... TB ORD 565
Reducer, Flash, M2 (T2): Clarification of Authorized
Use When Firing Charge, Propelling, M4 or M4A1,
in Howitzer, 155-mm Ml or M45 (T186E1).......... TB ORD 590
Rockets................................................................................... TM 9-1950
Small-Arms Ammunition................................................... TM 9-1990
Type M3 Initiator........................................................ TO 11P3—3—2—1
Type M4 Delay Initiator........................................... TO 11P3-2-2-1
Type M5 Initiator........................................................ TO 11P3—2—3—1
Type M6 Delay Initiator........................................... TO 11P3-2-4-1
4. Safety
Accident Experience; Reporting and Records............ SR 385-10-41
Accident Reporting.......................................................... SR 385-10-40
Coordination with Armed Services Explosives Safety
Board.............................................................................. SR 385-15-1
Fire Report...................................................................... SR 385-45-20
Identification of Inert Ammunition and Ammunition
Components.................................................................. SR 385-410-1
Miscellaneous: Precautions in Handling Gasoline.......... AR 850-20
Regulations for Firing Ammunition for Training, Tar­
get Practice, and Combat................................................ AR 385-63

5. Camouflage
Camouflage, Basic Principles.................................................. FM 5-20
6. Decontamination
Decontamination.................................................................... TM 3-220
Defense Against CBR Attack................................................ FM 21-40

7. Destruction
Explosives and Demolitions..................................................... FM 5-25
Land Mines and Components; Demolition Explosives
and Related Items; and Ammunition for Simulated
Artillery, Booby Trap, Hand Grenade; and Land
Mine Fire................................................................ ORD 3 SNL R-7
8. Disposal
Disposal of Supplies and Equipment: Ammunition. . . SR 755-140-1
Disposal of Supplies and Equipment: Disposition of
Foreign Excess Personal Property................................... AR 755-10

306
Explosive Ordnance Reconnaissance and Disposal.............. FM 9 40
Explosives: Disposal by Dumping at Sea....................... SR 75-70-10
Explosives: Responsibilities for Explosive Ordnance
Disposal................................................................................. AR 75-15
Tool Set, Maintenance (Field), Explosive Ordnance,
Disposal Squad............................................ ORD 3 SNL J—8, Sec 1
9. Maintenance and Renovation
Abrasive, Cleaning, Preserving, Sealing, Adhesive, and
Related Materials Issued for Ordnance Materiel.......... TM 9-850
Ammunition Renovating Tools................... ORD 3 SNLJ-11, Sec 2
Ammunition Renovation...................................................... TM 9-1905
Cleaners, Preservatives, Lubricants, Recoil Fluids, Spe­
cial Oils, and Related Maintenance Materials. . ORD 3 SNL K-l
Tool Set, Maintenance (Field), Ammunition Renova­
tion Platoon.................................................. ORD 3 SNL J-8, Sec 4

10. Surveillance
Ammunition Inspection Guide........................................... TM 9-1904
Inspection of Ordnance Materiel in Hands of Troops. . . TM 9-1100
Inspection of Separate Loading Propelling Charges and
Bulk Propellants.......................................................... SR 742-140-1
Reports............................................................................... SB 9-AMM 8
11. Supply
Ammunition, Blank, for Pack, Light, and Medium
Field, Tank, and Antitank Artillery................... ORD 3 SNL R-5
Ammunition, Fixed and Semifixed, Including Subcali­
ber for Pack, Light, and Medium Field, Aircraft,
Tank, and Antitank Artillery, Including Complete
Round Data............................................................ ORD 3 SNL R-l
Ammunition for Antiaircraft Artillery..................... ORD 3 SNL P-5
Ammunition, Instruction Material for Aircraft Bombs,
Grenades, Pyrotechnics, and Rockets.................. ORD 3 SNL S-6
Ammunition, Instruction Material for Pack, Light and
Medium Field, Aircraft, Tank, and Antitank Artil­
lery ........................................................................... ORD 3 SNL R-6
Ammunition, Instruction Materials for Antiaircraft,
Harbor Defense, Heavy Field Artillery, Including
Complete Round Data.......................................... ORD 3 SNL P-8
Ammunition, Mortar, Including Fuzes, Propelling
Charges and Other Components......................... ORD 3 SNL R-4
Ammunition Renovating Tools................... ORD 3 SNLJ-11, Sec 2
Ammunition, Revolver, Automatic Pistol, and Subma­
chine Guns.............................................................. ORD 3 SNL T-2

307
Ammunition, Rifle, Carbine, and Automatic Gun. ORD 3 SNL T-l
Ammunition: Supply Within the Continental United
States.............................................................................. SB9-AMM6
Bombs, Aircraft, All Types........................................ ORD 3 SNL S-l
Ammunition, Over 125—Millimeter............................. SM 9-5-1320
Fin Assemblies and Miscellaneous Inert Components
for Aircraft Bombs.................................................. ORD 3 SNL S-3
Fuzes and Miscellaneous Explosive Components for
Aircraft Bombs........................................................ ORD 3 SNL S-2
Fuzes, Primers, and Miscellaneous Items for Antiair­
craft and Heavy Field Artillery; Blank Ammunition
for 90-mm Guns...................................................... ORD 3 SNL P-7
Grenades, Hand and Rifle, and Related Compo­
nents ......................................................................... ORD 3 SNL S-4
Chemical Corps Regulated Items...................................... SB 725-350
Ordnance Corps Regulated Items..................................... SB 725-950
Issue of Supplies and Equipment: Processing Requisi­
tions ................................................................................. SR 725-10-2
Land Mines and Components; Demolition Explosives
and Related Items; and Ammunition for Simulated
Artillery, Booby Trap, Hand Grenade; and Land
Mine Fire................................................................ ORD 3 SNL R-7
Miscellaneous Service Components of Small-Arms Am­
munition for Field Service Account, Instruction Ma­
terial, and Ammunition for Simulated Small-Arms
Fire........................................................................... ORD 3 SNL T-4
Ordnance Maintenance and General Supply in the Field. . FM 9-10
Procurement of Supplies and Equipment: Standardiza­
tion of Type Designations............................................. SR 715-50-5
Projectiles and Propelling Charges, Separate Loading,
for Medium Field Artillery, Including Complete
Round Data............................................................ ORD 3 SNL R-2
Ammunition, Over 125-Millimeter................................. SM 9-5-1320
Pyrotechnics, Military, All Types............................. ORD 3 SNL S-5
Rockets, All Types, and Components...................... ORD 3 SNL S-9
Service Fuzes and Primers for Pack, Light and Medium
Field, Aircraft, Tank, and Antitank Artillery. . . ORD 3 SNL R-3
Shells, Shotgun.......................................................... ORD 3 SNL T-3
Small-Arms Ammunition: Lots and Grades................ TB 9-AMM 4
Subcaliber Ammunition for Harbor Defense, Heavy
Field, and Railway Artillery................................. ORD 3 SNL P-6
Supply Control: Distribution of Ammunition for Train­
ing............................................................................... AR 710-1300-1
Tool Set, Maintenance (Field), Ammunition Renova­
tion Platoon.................................................. ORD 3 SNL J-8, Sec 4

308
Tool Set, Maintenance (Field), Explosive Ordnance,
Disposal Squad............................................ ORD 3 SNLJ-8, Sec 1
12. Shipment and Storage
Additional Distinguishing Marking of Weapons and
Ammunition Made Under the Offshore Procurement
Program in Europe....................................................... TB ORD 600
Additional Distinguishing Marking of Weapons and
Ammunition Made Under the Offshore Procurement
Program in Japan.......................................................... TB ORD 521
Army Shipping Document.................................................. TM 38-705
Instruction Guide: Ordnance Preservation, Packaging,
Packing, Storage, and Shipping..................................... TM 9-1005
Marking and Packing of Supplies and Equipment:
Marking of Oversea Supply......................................... SR 746-30-5
Military Standard—Marking of Shipments............ MIL-STD-129*
Preparation of Supplies and Equipment for Shipment:
Processing of Unboxed and Uncrated Equipment for
Oversea Shipment............................................................ AR 747-30
Preservation, Packaging, and Packing of Military Sup­
plies and Equipment........................................................ TM 38-230
Protection of Ordnance General Supplies in Open
Storage............................................................................ TB ORD 379
Shipment of Supplies and Equipment: Report of Dam­
aged or Improper Shipment......................................... SR 745-45-5
Shipping and Packing Containers and Materials, In­
cluding Such Items as Bandoleers, Belts, Clips, Links,
and Ends, for Small-Arms Ammunition............ ORD 3 SNL T-5
Supplies and Equipment: Unsatisfactory Equipment
Report................................................................................... AR700-38
Transportation by Commercial Means; General................. AR55-105
Transportation by Water of Explosives and Hazardous
Cargo..................................................................................... AR55-228
13. Other Publications
Battlefield Illumination.................................................... TC 30 (1952)
Instruction Guide: Small-Arms Accidents, Malfunctions
and Their Causes.............................................................. TM 9-2210
Installations: Report of Loss, Theft, and Recovery of
Government Property.................................................. SR 210-10-10
Introduction.................................................................................. ORD 1
Military Publications: Distribution of Department of
the Army Publications and Blank Forms....................... AR 310-90
*Copies may be obtained from Aberdeen Proving Ground, Aberdeen, Aid.

309
Military Security: Safeguarding Security Information. . . . AR 380-5
Ordnance Ammunition Service in the Field........................... FM 9-6
Ordnance Service in the Field.................................................. FM 9-5
Qualification in Arms: Qualification and Familiarization. AR 370-5
Supplies and Equipment: Report of Malfunctions and
Accidents Involving Ammunition and Explosives
(During Training or Combat)..................................... SR 700-45-6
Targets, Target Material, and Training Course Layouts. TM 9-855
Care, Handling, Preservation and Destruction of Am­
munition............................................................................. TM 9-1903
Storage and Materials Handling..................................... TM 743-200
Explosives, Authority to Waive Ammunition and Ex­
plosives Quantity-Distance Safety Standards.................. AR 75-85

310
INDEX

Paragraph Pago
Accidents, reports....................................................................................................... 3o,b 2
Adamsite (DM)...................................................................................................... 34*/ 64
Aluminum......................................-............................................................................. 36*/ 66
Amatol............................................................................................................................. 27e 54
Ammonium picrate(Explosive D)........................................................................ 27g 55
Ammunition, basic types:
Artillery ammunition........................................................................................ 71—89 114
Bombs....................................................................................................................... 90—98 156
Cartridge-actuated devices............................................................................. 155-162 299
Demolition materials......................................................................................... 138-143 260
Grenades................................................. 64—70 102
Guided missiles................................................... 144-154 293
JATOS.................................................................................................................... 122-129 231
Land mines............................................................................................................ 130-137 237
Pyrotechnics.......................................................................................................... 99—113 185
Rockets................................. 114-121 215
Small arms ammunition.................................................................................. 39-63 68
Armor-piercing cartridge precautions............................................................... 62/ 95
Artillery ammunition:
Blank................................................................................................................................ 85 147
Boosters............................................................................................................................ 80 142
Burster charge.............................................................................................................. 81 142
Care and precautions in handling...................................................................... 87 148
Cartridge case:
Care and precautions in handling...................................................... 87c 148
Description............................................................................................................ 76 128
Classification................................................................................................................. 72 116
Complete round.......................................................................................................... 74 118
Designations.......................................................................................................... 71a 114
Dummy ammunition................................................................................................ 83 146
Fuzes:
Care and precautions in handling...................................................... 87 c 149
Classification.............................................................................. 786131
General.................................................................................................................. 78a 131
Safety features..................................................................................................... 78c 134
Identification............................................................................................................... 716 116
Packing and marking................................................................................................ 89 153
Practice rounds............................................................................................................ 82 142
Precautions in firing.................................................................................................. 88 150
Primers:
Care and precautions in handling............................................................. 87c 149
Combination electric-percussion................................................................. 79c 141
Electric............................................................................................... 79c139
General........................................................................................ 79a139
Ignition....................................................................................... 79/14
Percussion.................................................................................. 79*/141
Types................................................................................................... 796139

311
Paragraph Page
Projectiles:
Care and precautions inhandling........................................................ 876 148
Elements.......................................................................................................... 15b 122
General............................................................................................................ 75a 118
Types................................................................................................................ 75 118
Propellant temperature indicators.............................................................. 86 148
Propelling charges:
Care and precautions in handling...................................................... 87c 148
Fixed and semifixed charges................................................................. 11b 129
Flash reducers.............................................................................................. 77rf(4) 130
General............................................................................................................ Ila 128
Igniter charge.............................................................................................. 77a(3) 128
Separate-loading......................................................................................... lid 130
Separatedammunition............................................................................ 11c 130
Subcaliber.............................................................................................................. 84 146
Types........................................................................................................................ 73 117

Bangalore torpedoes.................................................................................................. 140a(7) 262

Basic types of ammunition. {See Ammunition, basic types.)
Bazooka-type launchers........................................................................................... 120c 227
Bipropellant system (liquid propellants).......................................................... 21a 41
Black powder................................................................................................................ 23 45
Blank ammunition (artillery)................................................................................ 85 147
Blank cartridge precautions................................................................................... 62a,g 95
Blasting machines.......................................................................................................... 1406(10) 269
Blister gases.................................................................................................................... 31 61
Blood and nerve poisons.......................................................................................... 33 62
Bombs:
Arming wire assemblies................................................................................... 94 179
Care and precuations in handling.............................................................. 97 183
Classification......................................................................................................... 91 161
Clusters and adapters....................................................................................... 96 182
Fins............................................................................................................................ 95 180
Fuzes......................................................................................................................... 93 172
General.................................................................................................................... 90 156
Packing and marking........................................................................................ 98 183
Types........................................................................................................................ 92 162
Booby-trapping............................................................................................................ 135a,c 256,257
Boosters, artillery ammunition............................................................................. 80 142
Bourrelet (projectile)................................................................................................. 756(2) 122
Burster charge, artillery ammunition................................................................ 81 142
Cap crimpers................................................................................................................... 1406(10) 269
Care and precautions. {See Specific items.)
Cartridge-actuated devices for aircraft use:
Care and precautions in handling.............................................................. 161 303
Cartridges............................................................................................................... 160 303
Catapults................................................................................................................. 156 299
Initiators................................................................................................................. 159 302
Packing and marking........................................................................................ 162 304
Removers................................................................................................................ 157 301
Thrusters................................................................................................................. 158 302
Cartridges {see also Small arms ammunition):
Grenade (rifle)..................................................................................................... 66^ 110
Photoflash............................................................................................................... 109 210
Catapults......................................................................................................................... 156 299

312
Paragraph Page

Chemical agents (see also Gases):

Blister gases........................................................................................................... 31 61
Blood and nerve poisons................................................................................. 33 62
Choking gases............................................................................ .......................... 32 62
Classification......................................................................................................... 30 60
General.................................................................................................................... 29 60
Identification of ammunition containingchemicalagents................. 38 67
Incendiaries....................................................................................................... 30, 36, 37 60,65,67
Marking of ammunition containingchemical agents.......................... 38 67
Screening smokes................................................................................................ 30, 35 60, 64
Training and riot control gases........................................................................... 34 63
Choking gases (phosgene)............................................................................................... 32 62
Classification:
Ammunition.......................................................................................................... 5 3
Chemical agents.................................................................................................. 30 60
CN-DM (tear gas and Adamsite)...................................................................... 34c 64
Color and markings........................................................................................................... 10 8
Composite propellants. (See Propellants.)
Composition A............................................................................................................. 27/> 57
Composition B......................................... .................................................................. 27<? 57
Composition C (series)............................................................................................. 27r 58
Cyanogen chloride (CK)........................................................................................ 33t? 63

Data:
Calibration............................................................................................................. ?
Firing........................................................................................................................ 13 12
Data card................................................................................................... 6/ 7
DBX..................................................... 27y 59
DDNP.............................................................................................................................. 28rf 60
Definitions, general (see also Specific items)................................................... 4 3
Demolition explosives............................................................................................... 27 52
Demolition materials:
Care and precautions in handling.............................................................. 141 290
Classification......................................................................................................... 139 261
Demolition equipment..................................................................................... 140c 283
Explosive charges................................................................................................ 140a 262
General.................................................................................................................... 138 260
Mine-clearing devices....................................................................................... 140d 287
Packing and marking........................................................................................ 143 292
Precautions in firing.......................................................................................... 142 290
Priming............. .................................................................................................... 142a 290
Priming and initiating components........................................................... 140Z> 269
Types........................................................................................................................ 140 262
Double-base propellants. (See Propellants.)
Dynamite........................................................................................................................ 27/ 56

Earth rod, blast driven............................................................................................. 140c (2) 283

Ednatol............................................................................................................................ 27m 57
Explosive and chemical agents:
Chemical agents.................................................................................................. 29-38 60
High explosives.............................................................. 25-28 46
Low explosives..................................................................................................... 22-24 42
Propellants............................................................................................................. 14—21 33
Explosive charges. (See Demolition materials.)

313
Paragraph Page
Explosive trains:
Fuze explosive...................................................................................................... 25a(8) 47
High explosive...................................................................................................... 256 48
Low explosive....................................................................................................... 22<7 44
Firecracker....................................................................................... 110</(2) 211
Fires, reports................................................................................................................. 3c 3
Firing data..................................................................................................................... 13 12
Flamethrower fuels.................................................................................................... 37 67
Flares. (See Pyrotechnics.)
Flash reducers (propelling charges)................................................................... 77«Z(4) 130
Forms............................................................................................................................... 2 2
Fragmentation bombs............................................................................................... 92a (6) 162
Fragmentation explosives........................................................................................ 27 52
Fragmentation grenades.......................................................... ............................... 656, 66b 103, 107
FS......................................................................................................... ■ ■ 35c 65
Fuzes:
Antitank mines....................................................................... ■ 133<Z 254
Artillery ammunition........................................................................................ 78 131
Bombs......................................................................................... ■ - - 93 172
Guided missiles............................................................................................... ■ ■ 148 295
Proximity (VT)..................................................................... 786(3) 131

Galvanometer, blasting.............................................................. 1406(10) 290

Gases (see also Chemical agents):
Blister.......................................................................................... - ■ 31 61
Blood and nerve poisons.................................................................................. 33 62
Casualty..................................................................................... 30a 60
Choking..................................................................................... ■ ■ 32 62
Military...................................................................................... ■ ■ 30a 60
Simulated military................................................................ ■ ■ 30</ 61
Training and riot control.................................................. • ■ • 30a 60
Grading ammunition................................................................................................ 8 8
Grenades:
Care and precautions in handling........................................................ • • 68 112
General...................................................................................... - . - 64 102
Grenade cartridges............................................................................................. 56 83
Hand........................................................................................... ■ ■ 65 107
Packing and marking........................................................................................ 70 114
Precautions in firing.......................................................................................... 69 112
Rifle:
Adapters and clips................................................................................ ■ ■ 67 110
Antitank.......................................................................................................... 66c 109
Chemical-burning....................................................................................... 66d 109
Chemical-bursting...................................................................................... 66c 109
Fragmentation.............................................................................................. 666 107
General............................................................................................................ 66a 107
Grenade cartridges..................................................................................... 66g 110
Practice and training................................................................................ 66/ 110
Guided missiles:
Care, handling, and preservation............................................................... 153 298
Classification......................................................................................................... 145 294
Control and guidance systems...................................................................... 151 296
Electrical power system................................................................................... 149 296
Fuzes......................................................................................................................... 148 295
Genera].................................................................................................................... 144 293
Identification........................................................................................................ 146 294

314
Paragraph Page
Packing and marking....................................................................................... 154 298
Launchers.............................................................................................................. 152 298
Propulsion system............................................................................................... 150 296
Warheads............................................................................................................... 147 295
Guncotton...................................................................................................................... 20a 40

Hand grenades. (See Grenades.)

Hazardous conditions, reports.............................................................................. 3^ 3
HEX............................................................................................................................... 27 o 57
HC..................................................................................................................................... 35./ 65
High explosives:
Classification......................................................................................................... 26 51
Definitions and terms....................................................................................... 25a 47
Demolition and fragmentation..................................................................... 27 52
General.................................................................................................................... 25 46
High explosive train.......................................................................................... 256 48
Initiating and priming:
Diazodinitrophenol(DDNP).................................................................. 28^ 60
Lead azide..................................................................................................... 286 59
Lead styphnate............................................................................................ 28c 59
Mercury fulminate..................................................................................... 28a 59
Primer compositions.................................................................................. 25a 47
Hydrocyanic acid (AC)........................................................................................... 336 63

Identification of ammunition:
Ammunition containing chemical agents................................................ 38 67
Ammunition IdentificationCode symbols................................................ 6g 7
Calibration data.................................................................................................. 6c 7
Data card............................................................................................................... 6/ 7
General.................................................................................................................... 6a 5
Lot number........................................................................................................... 6rf 6
Mark or model number................................................................................... 6c 5
Type designation................................................................................................ 66 5
Incendiaries:
Aluminum.............................................................................................................. 36./ 66
Flamethrower fuels............................................................................................ 37 67
General.................................................................................................................... 30c 61
Incendiary mixture (PTI).............................................................................. 36g 67
Incendiary oils (IM and NP)....................................................................... 36c,/ 66
Magnesium............................................................................................................ 36c 66
Thermate................................................................................................................ 366 66
Thermite................................................................................................................. 36a 66

J ATOS:
Care and precautions in handling.............................................................. 127 235
Classification......................................................................................................... 123 233
Complete round.................................................................................................. 1226 231
Identification........................................................................................................ 122rf 233
Igniter circuit continuity testing................................................................. 126 234
Igniters.................................................................................................................... 125 234
Packing and marking....................................................................................... 129 236
Precautions in firing.......................................................................................... 128 235
Storage.................................................................................................................... 127 235
Terminology......................................................................................................... 122a 231
Types................................................................. 124 233
Uses.......................................................................................................................... 122c 233

315
Paragraph Page
Land mines:
Antipersonnel mines:
General............................................................................................................ 132a 238
Packing and marking............................................................................... 137a 258
Practice........................................................................................................... 132a 243
Service............................................................................................................. 1326 238
Antitank mines:
Fuzes for......................................................................................................... 133a' 254
General................................................... 133a 243
Packing and marking............................................................................... 1376 258
Practice.............................................. 133a 248
Service............................................................................................................. 1336 244
Booby-trapping.................................................................................................... 135a/ 256,257
Care and precautions inhandling................................................................ 136 257
Chemical mines................................................................................................... 134 256
Classification......................................................................................................... 131 237
General.................................................................................................................... 130 237
Improvisation....................................................................................................... 1356/ 257
Packing and marking........................................................................................ 137 258
Training requirements................................................................................ 135a, 136g 257
Lead azide..................................................................................................................... 286 59
Lead styphnate............................................................................................................ 28a 59
Lewisite (L)................................................................................................................. 316 61
Lot number................................................................................................................... 6d 6
Low explosives:
Blackpowder........................................................................................................ 23 45
Characteristics (table III).............................................................................. 24 45
Classification......................................................................................................... 226 42
Definition................................................................................................................ 22a 42
General.................................................................................................................... 22 42
Low-explosive train........................................................................................... 22d 44
Pyrotechnic compositions................................................................................ 24 45
Requirements for................................................................................................ 22a 42

Magnesium.................................................................................................................... 36a 66
Malfunctions, small-arms ammunition............................................................. 62 95
Marking (see also Specific items):
Ammunition.......................................................................................................... 106, 11 10, 11
Ammunition containing chemical agents................................................ 38 67
Containers.............................................................................................................. 11 11
Mercury fulminate..................................................................................................... 28a 59
Mines. (See Land mines.)
Monopropellant system (liquid propellants)................................................. 21a 41
Mustard gas (H)......................................................................................................... 31a 61
Mustard gas, simulated........................................................................................... 31a 62
Nerve poisons................................................................................................................ 33 62
Nitrocellulose propellants........................................................................................ 20a 40
Nitrostarch explosives............................................................................................... 27£ 56
Nomenclature............................................................................................................... 7 7
Ogive (projectile)....................................................................................................... 756(1) 122

Packing. (See Specific items.)

Packing ammunition................................................................................................. 11 11
Painting........................................................................................................................... 10« ®
PETN............................................................................................................................... 27 52

316
Paragraph Page

Pentolite.......................................................................................................................... 27/ 55
Phosgene (CG)............................................................................................................ 32 62
Photoflash cartridges................................................................................................ 109,110 210
Picratol............................................................................................................................ 27h 55
Picric acid...................................................................................................................... 21f 54
Positioning clips (grenade launchers)............................................................... 67c 112
Precautions (handling and firing). (See Specific items.)
Precautions in use of ammunition................................. 12 11
Primer compositions (high explosives).............................................................. 25a(9) 47
Primers:
Artillery ammunition........................................................................................ 79, 87c 139, 149
Demolition equipment..................................................................................... 142a (2) 290
Small arms ammunition.................................................................................. 40c 74
Priming and initiating components (demolition equipment)................ 1406 269
Priority of issue............................................................................................................ 9 8
Projectiles. (See Artillery ammunition.)
Propellant temperature indicators...................................................................... 86 148
Propellants:
Classification....................................................................................................... 15 33
Composite.............................................................................................................. 19 39
Double-base........................................................................................................... 18 38
For small arms..................................................................................................... 206 40
General.................................................................................................................... 14 33
Guncotton.............................................................................................................. 20a 40
Liquid:
Characteristics.............................................................................................. 216 41
Classification................................................................................................. 21a 41
Uses........................... 21c 41
Nitrocellulose (guncotton).............................................................................. 20a 41
Physical characteristics..................................................................................... 16 33
Single-base............................................................................................................. 17 38
Solid.......................................................................................................................... 19,20 39,40
Propelling charges. (See Artillery ammunition.)
Pyrotechnic compositions........................................................................................ 24 45
Pyrotechnics:
Bombs...........................................................................:......................................... 926 167
Candlepower (table IV).................................................................................. 101 187
Care and precautionsin handling............................................................... Ill 212
Classification......................................................................................................... 100 187
Complete round.................................................................................................. 996 185
Definition............................................................................................................... 99a 185
Flares:
Care and precautions in handling...................................................... 1116(1) 212
Fortraining................................................................................................... 110a 210
Types:
Aircraft.................................................................................................... 103 188
Igniting.................................................................................................... 106 194
Ground.................................................................................................... 104 190
Guide....................................................................................................... 105 194
Tracking................................................................................................. 107 194
Fortraining........................................................................................................... HO 210
Identification........................................................................................................ 99c 186
Ignition train........................................................................................................ 99c 185
Packing and marking....................................................................................... 113 213

317
Paragraph Page

Photoflash cartridges:
Practice........................................................................................................... 1094 210
Service............................................................................................................. 109<z 210
Training.......................................................................................................... 110c 211
Projection............................................................................................................... 99/ 186
Pyrotechnic compositions:
General............................................................................................................ 99rf 185
In illuminating and signaling grenades, artillery shell, and
bombs................................................................................................................. 102c 188
Signals...................................................................................................................... 108 194
Types (table IV)................................................................................................. 101, 102 187, 188
Visibility................................................................................................................. 101 187
RDX........................................................................................................................................ 27c 52
Reports............................................................................................................................ 3 2
Rheostat, blasting machine testing................................................................... 1406(10) 269
Rifle grenades. (See Grenades.)
Rockets:
Aircraft-type......................................................................................................... 117 219
Care and precautions in handling.............................................................. 119 226
Classification......................................................................................................... 115 215
General.................................................................................................................... 114 215
Ground type......................................................................................................... 116 216
Igniter circuit continuity testing................................................................. 118 226
Packing and marking........................................................................................ 121 228
Precautions in firing.......................................................................................... 120 227
Rotating band (projectile)..................................................................................... 756(4) 222

Scope of manual......................................................................................................... 1 2
Screening smokes:
General.................................................................................................................... 306 61
Hexachlorethane-zinc (HC).......................................................................... 35<Z 65
Sulfur trioxide-chlorsulfuric acid (FS)..................................................... 35c 65
White phosphorus (WP and PWP)........................................................... 35a,b 64
Security classification................................................................................................ 5J 5
Shipping regulations, classification of ammunition.................................... 56 4
Shotgun shell................................................................................................................ 59 91
Signals, pyrotechnic. (See Pyrotechnics.)
Simulators:
Practice rounds (artillery ammunition)................................................... 82c 143
Pyrotechnic:
Care and precautions in firing................. 1116(4) 212
Precautions in firing.................................................................................. 1126(3) 213
Used in training.......................................................................................... 11(W 211
Simulated military gases................................................................................. 307 61
Simulated mustard gas..................................................................................... 31c 62
Single-base propellants. (See Propellants.)
Small arms ammunition:
Care and precautions in handling. . ......................................................... 61 92
Cartridges:
Armor-piercing............................................................................................ 44 81
Armor-piercing-incendiary.................................................................... 45 81
Armor-piercing-incendiary-tracer....................................................... 46 81
Ball..................... 42 81
Ball, Hornet.................................................................................................. 43 81

318
Paragraph Page

Blank................................................................................................................ 50 82
Dummy........................................................................................................... 51 82
Frangible........................................................................................................ 53 82
Gallery practice........................................................................................... 54 82
Grenade.......................................................................................................... 56 83
High-explosive-incendiary...................................................................... 47 81
High-pressure test....................................................................................... 52 82
Incendiary...................................................................................................... 48 81
Miscellaneous............................................................................................... 57 86
Subcaliber...................................................................................................... 55 83
Tracer.................................... 49 82
Components of cartridges............................................................................... 40 68
General.................................................................................................................... 39 68
Grades and lots.................................................................................................... 60 91
Links, belts, and clips....................................................................................... 58 87
Malfunctions and reports................................................................................ 62 95
Packing and marking....................................................................................... 63 99
Precautions in firing.......................................................................................... 62 95
Shotgun shell........................................................................................................ 59 91
Types of cartridges............................................................................................ 41 78
Smoke, screening. (See Screening smokes.)
Smokes, demolition........................................... 140<Z(2) 287
Subcaliber ammunition:
Artillery................................................................................................................... 84 146
Small arms............................................................................................................. 55 83
Tables:
Characteristics of low explosives (table III).......................................... 24 45
Color and marking for various types of bombs (table II)................. 10 8
Color and markings for various types of ammunition, except
bombs, pyrotechnics, and small arms cartridges (table I). . . . 10 8
Pyrotechnic types and candlepower (table IV)................................... 101 187
Tear gas (CN, CNB, and CNS).......................................................................... 34a,b,c 63
Tetryl............................................................................................................................... 27a 52
Tetrytol........................................................................................................................... 27j 55
Thermate (TH).......................................................................................................... 364 66
Thermite (TH).......................................................................................................... 36a 66
TNT................................................................................................................................. 27 d 53
Tracer:
Artillery projectiles............................................................................................ 754(8) 122
Small arms............................................................................................................. 49 82
Trainer, artillery field.............................................................................................. 82<4 146
Training:
Flares........................................................................................................................ 110a 210
Gases........................................................................................................................ 30a 60
Grenades................................................................................................................. 65e, 66/ 106, 110
Inert firing devices............................................................................................. 1404(6) 269
Practice mines...................................................................................................... 132, 133 238, 243
Pyrotechnics.......................................................................................................... 110 210
Training requirements (antitank mines)................................................. 135c, 136g 257
Tritonal........................................................................................................................... 27n 57
White phosphorus (WP and PWP).................................................................... 35a,4 64
Windshield (projectile)............................................................................................ 754(1) 122

319